Canon imageCLASS MF416DW Multifunction Printer manual
Printers · 24 Q&As

Canon imageCLASS MF416DW Multifunction Printer

Ask AI

— answers from the official manual

Answers from the official manual.

Common questions

Common Questions

24 total
1

What should I do if a paper jam occurs in the ADF?

When a jam is detected in the ADF, the machine stops scanning and displays 'CHECK DOCUMENT' on the control panel. On models equipped with a fax function, a warning beep will also sound. To clear the jam, remove the jammed paper and open/close the ADF upper cover. (Page 26-27)

2

How long does the MF416dw take to warm up and produce a first copy?

The warm-up time from power-on to standby is 16 seconds or less. The first copy time is 8 seconds or less from the copyboard glass and 10 seconds or less from the feeder. The first print time is 6.3 seconds or less for A4/LTR. (Page 10)

3

Is it safe to disassemble the laser scanner unit for cleaning or adjustment?

No, the laser scanner unit must never be disassembled. Although the machine is classified as a Class 1 laser product overall, the laser scanner unit contains a Class 3B laser beam source that can cause eye injuries. No adjustment can be made to the laser scanner unit in the field. (Page 2)

4

How should I safely handle toner that has spilled or adhered to skin or clothing?

Use dry tissue paper to wipe off toner adhered to skin or clothing, then wash with water. Never use warm water for cleaning up toner, as it can cause toner particles to gel and permanently soak into fibers. Also, never throw toner into flames as it may cause an explosion. (Page 3)

5

What paper types can be loaded in the Multi-Purpose Tray?

The Multi-Purpose Tray supports plain paper, recycled paper, color paper, heavy paper (90 to 163 g/m²), label paper, and envelopes. The cassette does not support label paper, envelopes, or heavy paper above 128 g/m². Auto 2-sided printing is available only for LTR, A4, and LGL paper sizes. (Page 13)

6

How much paper can the cassette and Multi-Purpose Tray hold?

The cassette on the MF416dw holds approximately 250 sheets at 80 g/m², while the Multi-Purpose Tray holds approximately 50 sheets at 80 g/m². The delivery tray capacity is approximately 150 sheets at 80 g/m². (Page 10)

Show 18 more questions

Full Manual

256 pages
Page 1

Service

Manual

imageCLASS MF416dw MF414dw

D1550

D1520

Canon

December 18, 2019 Rev. 7

Copyright © 2019 Canon Inc.

CANON imageCLASS MF416dw/MF414dw/D1550/D1520 Rev. 7 PRINTED IN U.S.A.

Page 2

Important Notices Application This manual has been issued by Canon Inc. for qualified persons to learn technical theory, installation, maintenance, and repair of products. This manual covers all localities where the products are sold. For this reason, there may be information in this manual that does not apply to your locality. Corrections This manual may contain technical inaccuracies or typographical errors due to improvements or changes in products. When changes occur in applicable products or in the contents of this manual, Canon will release technical information as the need arises. In the event of major changes in the contents of this manual over a long or short period, Canon will issue a new edition of this manual. The following paragraph does not apply to any countries/regions where such provisions are inconsistent with local law. Trademarks The product names and company names used in this manual are the registered trademarks of the individual companies. Copyright The copyright of this document belongs to Canon Inc. This document may not be copied, reproduced or translated into another language, in whole or in part, without the prior consent of Canon Inc. Copyright CANON INC. 2017 Caution Use of this manual should be strictly supervised to avoid disclosure of confidential information. Explanation of Symbols The following symbols are used throughout this Service Manual. Symbols Explanation Symbols Explanation Check. 1x Remove the claw. Check visually. 1x Insert the claw. Important Notices

Page 3

Symbols Explanation Symbols Explanation Check a sound. Push the part. 1x Disconnect the connector. Connect the power cable. 1x Connect the connector. Disconnect the power cable. 1x Remove the cable/wire from the cable guide or wire saddle. Turn on the power. 1x Install the cable/wire to the cable guide or wire saddle. Turn off the power. 1x Remove the screw. 1x Loosen the screw. 1x Install the screw. 1x Tighten the screw. Cleaning is needed. Measurement is needed. The following rules apply throughout this Service Manual:

  • Each chapter contains sections explaining the purpose of specific functions and the relationship between electrical and
  • mechanical systems with reference to the timing of operation. In the diagrams, represents the path of mechanical drive; where a signal name accompanies the symbol, the arrow indicates the direction of the electric signal. The expression "turn on the power" means flipping on the power switch, closing the front door, and closing the delivery unit door, which results in supplying the machine with power.
  • In the digital circuits, '1' is used to indicate that the voltage level of a given signal is "High", while '0' is used to indicate "Low".
  • (The voltage value, however, differs from circuit to circuit.) In addition, the asterisk (*) as in "DRMD*" indicates that the DRMD signal goes on when '0'. In practically all cases, the internal mechanisms of a microprocessor cannot be checked in the field. Therefore, the operations of the microprocessors used in the machines are not discussed: they are explained in terms of from sensors to the input of the DC controller PCB and from the output of the DC controller PCB to the loads. The descriptions in this Service Manual are subject to change without notice for product improvement or other purposes, and major changes will be communicated in the form of Service Information bulletins. All service persons are expected to have a good understanding of the contents of this Service Manual and all relevant Service Information bulletins and be able to identify and isolate faults in the machine. Important Notices

    Page 4

    Contents Safety Precautions...............................................................................................1 Laser................................................................................................................................................... 2 Laser Safety......................................................................................................................................... 2 How to Handle the Laser Scanner Unit...................................................................................................2 Power Supply / Lithium Battery........................................................................................................... 2 Power Supply....................................................................................................................................... 2 Notes When Handling a Lithium Battery..................................................................................................3 Toner Safety........................................................................................................................................3 About Toner..........................................................................................................................................3 Handling Adhered Toner........................................................................................................................3 Notes on works....................................................................................................................................3 Points to Note Before Servicing..............................................................................................................3 Points to Note at Cleaning..................................................................................................................... 4 Notes on Assembly/Disassembly........................................................................................................... 4

  • Product Overview.............................................................................................5
  • Product Lineups.................................................................................................................................. 6 Host machine........................................................................................................................................6 Options................................................................................................................................................ 7 Product Features.................................................................................................................................9 Specifications.................................................................................................................................... 10 Product Specifications......................................................................................................................... 10 ADF Specifications..............................................................................................................................11 Wireless LAN Specifications................................................................................................................ 12 Specification of SEND......................................................................................................................... 12 FAX specification................................................................................................................................ 12 Print speed......................................................................................................................................... 13 Paper type..........................................................................................................................................13 Paper size.......................................................................................................................................... 13 Parts Name....................................................................................................................................... 15 External View......................................................................................................................................15 Cross Sectional View...........................................................................................................................17 Control Panel......................................................................................................................................19
  • Technical Explanation (Device).................................................................... 21
  • Basic Configuration........................................................................................................................... 22 Configuration Function.........................................................................................................................22 Basic Sequence................................................................................................................................ 23 Basic Operational Sequence................................................................................................................23 Document Exposure / Delivery System.............................................................................................24 Document Exposure System................................................................................................................24 Document Feeder System................................................................................................................... 25 Controller System..............................................................................................................................28 Outline............................................................................................................................................... 28 Contents i

    Page 5

    Engine Controller PCB.........................................................................................................................28 Low-voltage Power Supply...................................................................................................................30 Laser Exposure System.................................................................................................................... 33 Outline............................................................................................................................................... 33 Optical Unit Failure Detection...............................................................................................................33 Image Formation System.................................................................................................................. 34 Outline............................................................................................................................................... 34 Image Formation Process....................................................................................................................34 High-voltage Power Supply..................................................................................................................37 Fixing System....................................................................................................................................39 Outline............................................................................................................................................... 39 Controls..............................................................................................................................................39 Pickup / Feed System....................................................................................................................... 43 Outline............................................................................................................................................... 43 Drive Configuration..............................................................................................................................43 Jam Detection.....................................................................................................................................44

  • Technical Explanation (System)...................................................................47
  • Overview of System Management.................................................................................................... 48 Version Upgrade............................................................................................................................... 49 Function Overview ..............................................................................................................................49 Version Upgrade Using UST................................................................................................................50 Version Upgrade via Internet................................................................................................................50 Version Upgrade Using a USB Flash Drive (Released Only in Special Cases).................................. 52 Setting Information Export/Import Function (DCM)........................................................................... 54 Overview............................................................................................................................................ 54 Import/Export Procedure from [Settings/Registration] of Remote UI........................................................ 56 Procedure for Exporting/Importing Service Mode Setting Information......................................................60 List of Items Which Can Be Imported....................................................................................................63 Monitoring Function (e-Maintenance/imageWARE Remote)............................................................ 85 Overview of System............................................................................................................................ 85 Servicing Notes...................................................................................................................................86 Setting Procedure............................................................................................................................... 86 Maintenance.......................................................................................................................................87 Error Message List.............................................................................................................................. 88
  • Periodical Service.......................................................................................... 91
  • Periodically Replaced Parts.............................................................................................................. 92 Consumable Parts.............................................................................................................................93 Periodical Service..............................................................................................................................94 Cleaning............................................................................................................................................ 95
  • Parts Replacement and Cleaning................................................................. 96
  • External Cover...................................................................................................................................97 Main Unit......................................................................................................................................... 100 Electrical Components Layout Drawing.......................................................................................... 101 Sensor..............................................................................................................................................101 Motor/Fan.........................................................................................................................................102 Contents ii

    Page 6

    Other................................................................................................................................................103 PCB................................................................................................................................................. 104 Connector Layout Drawing..............................................................................................................105 External Cover.................................................................................................................................110 Removing the Left Cover Unit............................................................................................................ 110 Removing the Left Rear Cover........................................................................................................... 111 Removing the Right Cover Unit.......................................................................................................... 112 Removing the Front Cover Unit.......................................................................................................... 114 Removing the Rear Cover Unit...........................................................................................................115 Removing the Upper Cover................................................................................................................116 Document Exposure / Delivery System...........................................................................................118 Removing the ADF Unit + Reader Unit................................................................................................118 Removing the ADF Roller Unit............................................................................................................119 Removing the ADF Pickup Roller....................................................................................................... 120 Removing the ADF Separation Roller................................................................................................. 120 Removing the ADF Separation Pad.................................................................................................... 121 Removing the ADF Pickup Feed Unit..................................................................................................122 Removing the ADF Pickup Motor Unit.................................................................................................123 Removing the ADF Delivery Solenoid Unit.......................................................................................... 124 Removing the Reader Unit Upper Cover............................................................................................. 124 Removing the CIS Unit...................................................................................................................... 125 Controller System............................................................................................................................127 Removing the Controller Cover.......................................................................................................... 127 Removing the Wireless LAN PCB (except for D1520/ MF412dn).......................................................... 127 Removing the Main Controller PCB.................................................................................................... 127 Removing the NCU PCB (Except for D1520/ MF411dw)...................................................................... 128 Removing the OFF Hook PCB (except for D1520/ MF411dw) ..............................................................129 Removing the Controller Box..............................................................................................................129 Removing the Engine Controller Unit ................................................................................................. 131 Removing the Control Panel...............................................................................................................133 Removing the Control Panel PCB.......................................................................................................134 Removing the NFC PCB (D1550/ MF416dw/ MF415dw)...................................................................... 135 Removing the Main Motor ................................................................................................................. 135 Removing the Main Fan.....................................................................................................................136 Removing the Main Fan Relay Cable..................................................................................................137 Removing the Main Drive Unit ...........................................................................................................138 Removing the Duplex Drive Unit.........................................................................................................140 Removing the Duplex Reverse Solenoid............................................................................................. 141 Removing the Cassette Pickup Solenoid.............................................................................................142 Removing the Connecting PCB.......................................................................................................... 142 Laser Scanner System....................................................................................................................144 Removing the Laser Scanner Unit...................................................................................................... 144 Image Forming System................................................................................................................... 145 Removing the Transfer Roller.............................................................................................................145 Removing the Registration Unit.......................................................................................................... 145 Fixing System..................................................................................................................................147 Removing the Fixing Assembly.......................................................................................................... 147 Pickup / Feed System..................................................................................................................... 149 Removing the Duplex Feed Unit.........................................................................................................149 Removing the Cassette Pickup Roller.................................................................................................149 Removing the Cassette Separation Pad..............................................................................................150 Contents iii

    Page 7

    Removing the Multi-purpose Tray Pickup Roller.................................................................................. 150 Removing the Multi-purpose Tray Separation Pad...............................................................................151

  • Adjustment................................................................................................... 152
  • Overview......................................................................................................................................... 153 Actions after Replacement Parts.....................................................................................................154 Document Exposure / Delivery System............................................................................................... 154 Controller System..............................................................................................................................166
  • Troubleshooting...........................................................................................168
  • Test Print.........................................................................................................................................169 Test Pages....................................................................................................................................... 169 Cartridge Log Report.......................................................................................................................170 Trouble Shooting Items................................................................................................................... 172 Special Mode....................................................................................................................................172 Trailing edge image soiling.................................................................................................................173 Repetitive Image Defects Ruler.......................................................................................................... 173 Nip-width Specifications.....................................................................................................................173 Debug Log.......................................................................................................................................175 Function Overview.............................................................................................................................175 Conditions for collecting logs..............................................................................................................175 Collection procedure..........................................................................................................................175
  • Error/Jam/Alarm...........................................................................................177
  • Overview......................................................................................................................................... 178 Error/Jam Log indication.................................................................................................................... 178 JAM/ERR LOG REPORT...................................................................................................................179 Position Summary Code.................................................................................................................... 180 Position code.................................................................................................................................... 180 Paper Size Code...............................................................................................................................180 Error codes......................................................................................................................................181 Jam code.........................................................................................................................................184 Alarm Code..................................................................................................................................... 186
  • Service Mode................................................................................................187
  • Overview......................................................................................................................................... 188 Service Mode Menu...........................................................................................................................188 Backing up Service Mode.................................................................................................................. 188 Screen flow of Service mode..............................................................................................................189 Remote UI Service Mode...................................................................................................................189 COPIER (Service mode for printer).................................................................................................192 DISPLAY (State display mode)...........................................................................................................192 ADJUST (Adjustment mode).............................................................................................................. 194 FUNCTION (Operation / inspection mode).......................................................................................... 206 OPTION (Specification setting mode)................................................................................................. 217 COUNTER (Counter mode)............................................................................................................... 223 FEEDER (ADF service mode).........................................................................................................228 ADJUST (Adjustment mode).............................................................................................................. 228 Contents iv

    Page 8

    FUNCTION (Operation / inspection mode).......................................................................................... 229 FAX................................................................................................................................................. 231 List of SSSW.....................................................................................................................................231 List of MENU.....................................................................................................................................232 List of NUM.......................................................................................................................................232 Setting of NCU Parameters................................................................................................................233 TESTMODE (Service mode for test print, operation check, etc.)....................................................237 PRINT (Print test mode).....................................................................................................................237 FAX (FAX test mode).........................................................................................................................239 APPENDICES....................................................................................................243 Service Tools...................................................................................................................................244 Special Tools.................................................................................................................................... 244 Solvents and Oils.............................................................................................................................. 244 General Timing Chart......................................................................................................................245 General Circuit Diagram..................................................................................................................246 Backup Data....................................................................................................................................247 Contents v

    Page 9

    Safety Precautions Laser..................................................... 2 Power Supply / Lithium Battery.............2 Toner Safety..........................................3 Notes on works..................................... 3

    Page 10

    Laser Laser Safety Since radiation emitted inside this machine is completely confined with protective housings and external covers, the laser beam cannot escape from the machine during any phase of normal use by users. Therefore, this machine is classified as a Class 1 laser product under the international standard IEC60825-1 that is regarded as safe during normal use. How to Handle the Laser Scanner Unit This machine is classified as a Class 1 laser product. However, the laser scanner unit contains source of Class 3B laser beam and exposure to the beam may cause eye injuries. Therefore, be sure not to disassemble the laser scanner unit. No adjustment can be made to the laser scanner unit in the machine in the field. The mark or the warning label shown in the following figure is affixed on the laser scanner unit. Dieses Gerät ist der Klasse 1 der Laserprodukte zugeordnet. Allerdings enthält die Laserscannereinheit eine Laserstrahlquelle der Klasse 3B, die Augenschäden verursachen kann, wenn man in diesen Strahl blickt. Deshalb darf die Laserscannereinheit nicht zerlegt werden. An der Laserscannereinheit kann keine Justage vor Ort vorgenommen werden. Das in dem folgenden Bild dargestellte Kennzeichen bzw. der Warnaufkleber ist auf der Laserscannereinheit angebracht. Power Supply / Lithium Battery Power Supply

  • As a general rule, do not use extension cords.
  • If an extension cord must be used, however, use one for local rated voltage and over, untie the cord binding, and insert the power plug completely into the extension cord outlet to ensure a firm connection between the power cord and the extension cord.

    Caution:

    Do not plug multiple cords together to an extension cord. It may cause a fire or electrical shock.
  • The socket-outlet shall be installed near the equipment and shall be easily accessible.
  • Safety Precautions 2

    Page 11

    Notes When Handling a Lithium Battery Dispose of used batteries according to the instructions.

    Caution:

    Risk of explosion if battery is replaced by an incorrect type. The following warnings are given to comply with Safety Principles (EN60950-1).

    Caution:

    Wenn mit dem falschen Typ ausgewechselt, besteht Explosionsgefahr. Gebrauchte Batterien gemäß der Anleitung beseitigen. Toner Safety About Toner Toner is a nontoxic matter composed of plastic, iron and a trace of pigments.

    Caution:

    Never throw toner in flames to avoid explosion. Handling Adhered Toner
  • Use dry tissue paper to wipe off toner adhered to skin or clothes and wash in water.
  • Never use warm water for cleaning up toner to prevent toner particles from being gelated to soak into fibers permanently.
  • Toner particles are reactive with vinyl polymers. Avoid contacting these materials.
  • Notes on works Points to Note Before Servicing
  • At servicing, be sure to turn OFF the power source according to the specified steps and disconnect the power plug.
  • Be sure to disconnect the power plug on a regular basis and remove dust and dirt accumulated around the outlet with dry
  • cloth.

    Caution:

    Leaving the power plug connected for a long time in an environment having a lot of dust, moisture, or oily smoke will cause a fire. (Because dust accumulated in the surrounding area will absorb moisture and cause an insulation failure) Safety Precautions 3

    Page 12

  • Be careful not to be injured by burrs of edges, sharp corners or protrusions.
  • Caution:

    Hazardous area such as corners, edges, springs and other sharp sections may be remaining on products. Always be aware of the presence of hazardous area to avoid injury caused by contacting and/or striking those area, by not over- concentrating on service work. Points to Note at Cleaning When performing cleaning using organic solvent such as alcohol, be sure to check that the component of solvent is vaporized completely before assembling. Notes on Assembly/Disassembly Follow the items below to assemble/disassemble the device.
  • Disconnect the power plug to avoid any potential dangers during assembling/disassembling works.
  • If not specially instructed, reverse the order of disassembly to reinstall.
  • Ensure to use the right screw type (length, diameter, etc.) at the right position when assembling.
  • To keep electric conduction, binding screws with washers are used to attach the grounding wire and the varistor. Ensure to
  • use the right screw type when assembling.
  • Unless it is specially needed, do not operate the device with some parts removed.
  • Never remove the paint-locked screws when disassembling.
  • Caution:

    English

    Caution

    The fuse may be in the neutral, and that the mains shall be disconnected to de-energize the phase conductors. German

    Vorsicht

    Die Sicherung kann sich im Nullleiter befinden und das Hauptnetz muss abgetrennt werden, um die Phasenleiter stromlos zu machen. Safety Precautions 4

    Page 13

    Product Overview 1 Product Lineups.................................... 6 Product Features...................................9 Specifications......................................10 Parts Name......................................... 15

    Page 14

    Product Lineups Host machine Function

    D1550

    D1520

    External Copy Yes Yes Print Yes Yes Fax Yes
  • Scan to USB
  • Yes Yes

    Send

    Yes Yes Remote UI Yes Yes

    Dadf

    Yes Yes 2-sided printing (only paper of 60 to 128 g) Yes Yes Secured Print Yes Yes

    Meap

  • -
  • Network Yes Yes Wireless LAN Yes
  • Direct mode
  • Yes
  • Nfc

  • Yes
  • Function
  • MF416dw/MF415dw MF414dw MF412dn MF411dw External Copy Yes Yes Yes Yes Print Yes Yes Yes Yes Fax Yes Yes Yes
  • Scan to USB
  • Yes Yes Yes Yes

    Send

    Yes Yes Yes Yes Remote UI Yes Yes Yes Yes

    Dadf

    Yes Yes Yes Yes
  • Product Overview
  • 6

    Page 15

    Function MF416dw/MF415dw MF414dw MF412dn MF411dw 2-sided printing (only paper of 60 to 128 g/ m2) Yes Yes Yes Yes Secured Print Yes Yes Yes Yes

    Meap

  • -
  • -
  • Network Yes Yes Yes Yes Wireless LAN Yes Yes
  • Yes
  • Direct mode Yes Yes
  • Yes
  • Nfc

    Yes
  • -
  • Options
  • D1550/ D1520

    [1] No. Name Description Remarks [1] Cassette Feeding Unit-U1 Approx. 500 Sheets (Plain paper 60 to 89 g/m2)
  • MF416dw/ MF415dw/ MF414dw/ MF412dn/ MF411dw
  • [2] [1] No. Name Description Remarks [1] Paper Feeder Unit PF-44 Approx. 500 Sheets (Plain paper 60 to 89 g/m2)
  • Product Overview
  • 7

    Page 16

    No. Name Description Remarks [2] Canon TELEPHONE 6 KIT Long cord Cool White Addition of phone MF416dw EUR/ MF411dw

    Eur

  • Product Overview
  • 8

    Page 17

    Product Features

    D1550/ D1520

    450.0 mm 465.0 mm MF416dw/ MF415dw/ MF414dw/ MF412dn/ MF411dw 390.0 mm 431.0 mm Improved Control Panel operability A 3.5-inch color Touch Panel is installed. Support for touch and flick has realized the operability like a smartphone. Support for direct mode (supported models only) Direct communication between the host machine and smartphone, tablet, PC, etc. has been realized. Faster printing from ADF The speed of printing from the ADF has been increased from 28 ppm to 33 ppm for A4 paper.
  • Product Overview
  • 9

    Page 18

    Specifications Product Specifications Item Specifications/Function Copyboard type Fixed Copyboard Machine installation method Desktop (DADF equipped as standard) Light source

    Led (Rgb)

    Photosensitive medium OPC Drum (24mm dia.) Image reading method CIS (color) Exposure method Laser beam exposure Charging method Roller charging Developing method Toner projection development (dry one-component magnetic toner) Transfer method Roller transfer method Separation method Curvature separation Pickup Cassette: Pad separation method Multi-purpose Tray: Pad separation method Drum cleaning method Cleaning by rubber blade Fixing method On-demand fixing Toner level detection function Yes Toner type One-component magnetic toner Toner supplying method Replacement of all-in-one cartridge (drum + toner) Toner saving mode Yes Document type Copyboard Glass: Plain paper, heavy paper, photo, small document (such as a name card), special paper (such as tracing paper and OHP film), book (up to 20 mm in width) Feeder: Plain paper (one sheet of document, or multiple sheets of document of the same size, width and weight) Max. size of document that can be read D1550/D1520 215.9 mm x 355.6 mm MF416dw/ MF415dw/ MF414dw/ MF412dn/ MF411dw Copyboard Glass: 215.9 x 297.0 mm Feeder: 215.9 x 355.6 mm Warm-up time*1 (Duration from power-on to standby) 16 sec. or less Reading resolution : 300 dpi x 600 dpi (default) , , : 600 dpi x 600 dpi Print resolution 600 x 600 dpi First copy time Copyboard Glass: 8 sec. or less (A4/LTR) Feeder: 10 sec. or less First print time 6.3 sec. or less (A4/LTR) Print speed 33 sheets/min (A4), 35 sheets/min (LTR) Paper type Cassette Plain paper, Recycled paper, Color paper, Heavy paper (90 to 128 g/m2) Multi-Purpose Tray Plain paper, Recycled paper, Color paper, Heavy paper (90 to 163 g/m2), Label paper, Envelope Paper size Cassette A4, B5, A5, LGL, LTR, STMT, EXEC, OFFICIO, B-OFFICIO, M-OFFICIO, G-LTR, G-LGL, FLS, A-FLS, I-LGL, Custom (width: 105.0 to 216.0 mm, length: 148.0 to 356.0 mm) Multi-purpose Tray A4, B5, A5, LGL, LTR, STMT, EXEC, OFFICIO, B-OFFICIO, M-OFFICIO, G-LTR, G-LGL, FLS, A-FLS, I-LGL, 76.2 × 127.0 mm (3"×5"), Envelope (No.10 (COM10), Monarch, C5, DL), Custom (width: 76.2 to 216.0 mm, length: 127.0 to 356.0 mm) Cassette paper capacity

    D1550/D1520

    Approx. 500 sheets (80 g/m2) MF416dw/ MF415dw/ MF414dw/ MF412dn/ MF411dw Approx. 250 sheets (80 g/m2) Multi-purpose Tray pickup capacity Approx. 50 sheets (80 g/m2) Delivery Tray capacity Approx. 150 sheets (80 g/m2) Continuous reproduction 1 to 999 sheets
  • Product Overview
  • 10

    Page 19

    Item Specifications/Function Auto 2-sided printing Yes (auto 2-sided printing is available only for LTR, A4 and LGL that weighs between 60 g to 128 g/m2) Memory capacity

    1 Gb

    Sleep mode Yes Range of use environment tempera- ture 10 to 30 deg C Environment humidity range 20 to 80% (Relative humidity; without dew condensation) Operation noise (Measured based on ISO7779, De- clared noise emission value based on

    Iso9296)

    LwAd (declared A-weighted sound power level (1 B = 10 dB)) At standby: No noise At printing: 6.7 B or less (1-sided) At printing: 6.7 B or less (2-sided) LpAm (mean A-weighted emission sound-pressure level (bystander position)) At standby: No noise At printing : Approx. 53 dB (1-sided) At printing : Approx. 52 dB (2-sided) Rated power supply 100V 50/60 Hz, 120V 60Hz, 120-127V 60Hz, 220-240V 50/60Hz Power con- sumption (Reference value) Maximum 930 W or less At standby Average of approx. 10 W During sleep mode Average of approx. 1.2 W (USB connection) Average of approx. 1.3 W (wired LAN connection) Average of approx. 2.1 W (wireless LAN connection) At turn-OFF of the main power switch 0.1 W or less Dimensions (W x D x H)

    D1550/D1520

    450 × 472 × 465 mm (without options) MF416dw/ MF415dw/ MF414dw/ MF412dn/ MF411dw 390 × 473 × 431 mm (without options) Weight*2

    D1550/D1520

    Approx. 21.4 kg MF416dw/ MF415dw/ MF414dw/ MF412dn/ MF411dw Approx. 19.2 kg Interface

    1000Base-T

    100Base-Tx

    10Base-T

    Hi-Speed USB

    Usb

    IEEE 802.11 b/g/n (infrastructure mode) Network Yes

    Send

    Yes *1: It may vary depending on the usage conditions and environment of this machine. *2: Including the Toner Cartridge ADF Specifications Item Specification/Function Position to set a document Center reference Document processing mode 1-sided document -> 1-sided copy/2-sided copy 2-sided document -> 1-sided copy/2-sided copy Document reading method Stream reading Basis weight of document Reading of 1-sided document: 50 g to 105 g Reading of 2-sided document: 64 g to 105 g Document stack capacity A4/LTR: 50 sheets (80 g/m2), LGL: 30 sheets (80 g/m2) Document reading speed A4: 300 × 300 dpi
  • Color: 9.3 sheets/min
  • Gray scale: 28 sheets/min
  • Product Overview
  • 11

    Page 20

    Item Specification/Function Stacking of mixed-size paper Yes (Paper of AB configuration and inch configuration cannot be mixed) Function to automatically detect document density None Function to detect document size None Stamp function None Use environment Depends on the host machine Wireless LAN Specifications Item Specification/Function Standard IEEE 802.11g / IEEE 802.11b / IEEE 802.11n Transmission system DS-SS system / OFDM system Frequency range 2412 to 2472 MHz Communication mode Infrastructure mode / Access point mode Security

    Wep, Wpa-Psk (Tkip/Aes-Ccmp), Wpa2-Psk (Tkip/Aes-Ccmp)

    Setting method WPS (Wi-Fi Protected Setup), Manual setup Specification of SEND Item Specification/Function File server transmission E-Mail transmission I-Fax Communication proto- col

    Smb (Tcp/Ip), Ftp

    Smtp, Pop3 *1

    Data format PDF, PDF (high compression), PDF (high compression/OCR),

    Pdf(Ocr), Jpeg, Tiff

    Tiff

    Resolution JPEG: 300 dpi TIFF: 300 dpi (MMR compression) PDF/PDF (OCR) (B&W): 300 dpi (MMR compression) PDF/PDF (OCR) (Color): 200 dpi (JPEG compression) PDF (Compact)/PDF (compact/OCR): Text 300 dpi, background 150 dpi 200 dpi (MH compression) System environment
  • Windows Vista/7/8/Server 2003/Server 2008/Server 2012
  • Solaris Version 2.6 or later (and Samba 2.2 or later)
  • Mac OS X
  • Red Hat Linux 7.2 or later (and Samba 2.2 or later)
  • Interface

    1000Base-T, 100Base-Tx, 10Base-T

    Input image Text, Text/Photo, Photo Color mode Color, B&W

    B&W

    Original size AB configuration: A4 / A5 / B5 Inch configuration: Legal (LGL), Letter (LTR), Statement (STMT) *1; In the case of E-mail transmission, POP3 can also be used only at authentication before transmission. FAX specification Item Specifications/Function Line used Public Switched Telephone Network (PSTN) *1 Communication mode Super G3, G3 Data compression method

    Mh, Mr, Mmr, Jbig

    Modem speed Super G3: 33.6 Kbps, G3: 14.4 Kbps (With automatic fallback function) Transmission speed Approx. 3 sec. per page*2 (ECM-JBIG, sent from memory at 33.6 kbps) Send/Receive memory Total number of sent/received pages: Approx. 512 pages *2 (Max. number of memory transmissions: 30, Max. number of memory receptions: 90)
  • Product Overview
  • 12

    Page 21

    Item Specifications/Function Fax resolution Normal: 200 x 100 dpi Fine: 200 x 200 dpi Photo: 200 x 200 dpi Super fine: 200 x 400 dpi Ultra fine: 400 x 400 dpi Dial method Favorites (19) Coded dial (281) Group dial (299) Address book dial Normal dial (entry by numeric keypad) Auto redial Manual redial Sequential broadcast (310) Reception method Auto RX Manual RX Remote reception by a telephone (initial setting ID: 25) Report Output TX Report Communication Management Report (to be output automatically for every 40 communications by default) RX Result Report Number Display Not supported Phones that can be connected Handset (option) / External phone / Answering machine / Data modem *1: Communication may not be available depending on the conditions of telephone lines and regions. *2: On ITU-T Test Chart No.1, by JBIG standard mode Print speed (Unit: sheets/min) Paper size 1-sided 2-sided

    A4

    33 8.4

    Ltr

    35 8.5
  • The above values are the speed in the case of continuous printing of the same data on plain paper. Note that they may vary
  • depending on the usage conditions and environment of this machine. Paper type (Yes: Pickup possible, -: Pickup not possible) Paper type Printer driver settings Cassette Multi-purpose Tray Plain paper 60 to 89 g/m2 Plain Yes Yes 60 to 69 g/m2 Plain L Yes Yes Color paper 60 to 89 g/m2 Color Yes Yes Recycled paper 60 to 89 g/m2 Recycled Yes Yes Heavy paper 90 to 128 g/m2 Heavy 1 Yes Yes 129 to 163 g/m2 Heavy 2
  • Yes
  • Label paper Labels
  • Yes
  • Envelope Envelope
  • Yes
  • Auto 2-sided printing is available only for LTR, A4 and LGL
  • Paper size (Yes: Pickup possible, -: Pickup not possible)
  • Product Overview
  • 13

    Page 22

    Paper size Cassette Multi-purpose Tray

    A4

    210.0 mm × 297.0 mm Yes Yes

    B5

    182.0 mm × 257.0 mm Yes Yes

    A5

    148.0 mm × 210.0 mm Yes Yes Legal (LGL) 215.9 mm × 355.6 mm Yes Yes Letter (LTR) 215.9 mm × 279.4 mm Yes Yes Statement (STMT) 139.7 mm × 215.9 mm Yes Yes Executive (EXEC) 184.1 mm × 266.7 mm Yes Yes Oficio 215.9 mm × 317.5 mm Yes Yes Oficio (Brazil) 215.9 mm × 355.0 mm Yes Yes Oficio (Mexico) 215.9 mm × 341.0 mm Yes Yes Letter (Government) 203.2 mm × 266.7 mm Yes Yes Legal (Government) 203.2 mm × 330.2 mm Yes Yes Foolscap 215.9 mm × 330.2 mm Yes Yes Foolscap (Australia) 206.0 mm × 337.0 mm Yes Yes Legal (India) 215.0 mm × 345.0 mm Yes Yes 3"×5" 76.2 mm × 127.0 mm
  • Yes
  • Envelope No.10 (COM10) 104.7 mm x 241.3 mm
  • Yes
  • Envelope Monarch 98.4 mm x 190.5 mm
  • Yes
  • Envelope C5 162.0 mm x 229.0 mm
  • Yes
  • Envelope DL 110.0 mm x 220.0 mm
  • Yes
  • Custom paper
  • Yes*1
  • Yes*2 *1: Custom paper whose width is between 105.0 mm and 216.0 mm and length between 148.0 mm and 356.0 mm can be loaded. *2: Custom paper whose width is between 76.2 mm and 216.0 mm and length between 127.0 mm and 356.0 mm can be loaded.
  • Product Overview
  • 14

    Page 23

    Parts Name External View MF416dw/ MF415dw/ MF414dw/ MF412dn/ MF411dw

    Hand

    Set

    [1] [3] [4] [5] [6] [11] [12] [9] [7] [13] [14] [15] [16] [18] [17] [19] [20] [21] [22] [8] [2] [10] Key Name Key Name [1]

    Dadf

    [12] Pickup Cassette [2] Document Feeder Tray [13] USB Port 2 [3] Document Delivery Tray [14] LAN Port [4] Control Panel [15] Left Cover Unit [5] Right Cover Unit [16] Handset Terminal [6] MP Pickup Tray [17] External Telephone Terminal [7] Upper Cover [18] Telephone Line Terminal [8] USB Port 1 [19] Left Rear Cover [9] Reader Unit [20] Power Socket [10] Front Cover [21] Rear Lower Cover [11] Main Power Switch [22] Rear Upper Cover
  • Product Overview
  • 15

    Page 24

    D1550/ D1520

    [1] [3] [4] [5] [6] [11] [12] [9] [10] [7] [13] [14] [15] [17] [16] [18] [19] [20] [21] [8] [2] Key Name Key Name [1]

    Dadf

    [12] Pickup Cassette [2] Document Feeder Tray [13] USB Port 2 [3] Document Delivery Tray [14] LAN Port [4] Control Panel [15] Left Cover Unit [5] Right Cover Unit [16] External Telephone Terminal *1 [6] MP Pickup Tray [17] Telephone Line Terminal *1 [7] Upper Cover [18] Left Rear Cover [8] USB Port 1 [19] Power Socket [9] Reader Unit [20] Rear Lower Cover [10] Front Cover [21] Rear Upper Cover [11] Main Power Switch

    *1: D1550

  • Product Overview
  • 16

    Page 25

    Cross Sectional View ■ ADF/Reader Unit MF416dw/ MF415dw/ MF414dw/ MF412dn/ MF411dw [1] [2] [3] [4] [5] Key Name Reference [1] ADF Paper Feed Roller

    [2] ADF Separation Roller

    [3] ADF Pickup Roller

    [4] ADF Delivery roller

    [5] ADF Separation Pad

    D1550/ D1520

    [1] [5] [2] [3] [4] Key Name [1] ADF Paper Feed Roller [2] ADF Separation Roller [3] ADF Pickup Roller [4] ADF Delivery roller [5] ADF Separation Pad
  • Product Overview
  • 17

    Page 26

    ■ Host Machine MF416dw/ MF415dw/ MF414dw/ MF412dn/ MF411dw [10] [1] [11] [2] [12] [3] [13] [4] [14] [5] [15] [6] [16] [7] [17] [8] [18] [9] [19] [20] Key Name Key Name [1] Fixing delivery roller [11] MP tray pickup roller [2] Face-down delivery roller [12] MP tray separation pad [3] Pressure roller [13] Registration roller [4] Fixing film unit [14] Feed roller [5] Fixing unit [15] Cassette pickup roller [6] Transfer roller [16] Cassette separation pad [7] Photosensitive drum [17] Cassette [8] Laser scanner unit [18] Duplex re-pickup roller [9] Cartridge [19] Duplex feed unitr [10] Registration shutterroller [20] Duplex feed roller

  • Product Overview
  • 18

    Page 27

    D1550/ D1520

    [1] [11] [2] [12] [3] [13] [4] [14] [5] [15] [6] [16] [7] [17] [8] [18] [9] [19] [10] [20] Key Name Key Name [1] Fixing delivery roller [11] MP tray pickup roller [2] Face-down delivery roller [12] MP tray separation pad [3] Fixing unit [13] Feed roller [4] Fixing film unit [14] Cassette pickup roller [5] Pressure roller [15] Cassette separation pad [6] Laser scanner unit [16] Duplex re-pickup roller [7] Copyboard glass (scanning glass) [17] Transfer roller [8] Cartridge [18] Photosensitive drum [9] Registration shutter [19] Duplex feed roller [10] Registration roller [20] Duplex feed unit Control Panel [1] [3] [6] [4] [2] [5] [8] [9] [7] [10] [11] [14] [21] [12] [18] [19] [20] [15] [16] [13] [17] Key Name Function [1] Home key Press to return to the home screen.
  • Product Overview
  • 19

    Page 28

    Key Name Function [2] Back key Press to return to the screen one layer above. [3] Quick Guide key Press to view the operation methods and the causes/remedies of errors. [4] Status Monitor key Press to check the job status or device status. [5] Energy Saver key Press to manually enter/recover from energy saver mode. [6] Numeric keys Press to enter the number of copies, zoom value and the names and numbers of address book. [7] Tone key Press to send the tone signal from the dial line. [8] SYMBOLS key Press to enter symbols. [9] Reset key Press to reset the settings (to change the settings of copy/scan/fax/media print to standard mode). [10] ID key Press after entering the ID and PIN to log on when Department ID Management is enabled. After using the machine, press again to log off. [11] Clear key Press to clear numbers such as number of copies, or text. [12] Sound Volume key Press to adjust the volume. [13] Start key Press to start a job. [14] Stop key Press to stop a job. [15] NFC tag *1 Hold a mobile device over this tag when performing NFC communication. [16] Touch Panel Displays a message or operation status. Displays menu, selected item, texts, num- bers and other information when changing settings. Tap or flick the panel when per- forming the operation. *1: MF416dw/ MF415dw/ D1550 Key

    Led

    LED status Condition [17] Start LED Yellow and green are lit When the machine can be started Unlit When the machine cannot be started [18] Processing Data LED Yellow and green are blink- ing Job is being operated Yellow and green are lit
  • When the memory has accumulated data
  • When received memory is waiting for processing
  • Lighting has priority when lighting and blinking simultaneously oc-
  • cur. [19] Wireless LAN LED *2 Blue is lit Wireless LAN is connected Blue is blinking Wireless LAN connection is being established Unlit Wireless LAN is not connected [20] Error LED Red is blinking When an error that can be recovered by the user (such as paper jam, no paper/toner, etc.) occurs Red is lit When an error that cannot be recovered by the user (service call) occurs
  • Lighting has priority when lighting and blinking simultaneously oc-
  • cur. [21] Energy Saver LED Yellow and green are lit During energy saver mode/low power mode/sleep mode Unlit During standbys *2: Except for MF412dn/ D1520
  • Product Overview
  • 20

    Page 29

    Technical Explanation (Device) 2 Basic Configuration.............................22 Basic Sequence.................................. 23 Document Exposure / Delivery System.............................................24 Controller System................................28 Laser Exposure System......................33 Image Formation System....................34 Fixing System......................................39 Pickup / Feed System......................... 43

    Page 30

    Basic Configuration Configuration Function This device is roughly composed of the 6 functional blocks as shown in the figure below

  • Document Exposure/Delivery System
  • Image Formation System
  • Controller System
  • Fixing System
  • Laser Exposure System
  • Pickup / Feed System
  • Engine controller Casette Laser scanner MP Tray Cartridge Transfer roller Laser beam Paper flow Signal flow Fixing unit Delivery unit ADF unit Contact Sensor Main Controller Laser Exposure System

    Pc

    Image Formation System Pickup / Feed System Fixing System Controller system Document exposure/delivery system Photosensitive drum
  • Technical Explanation (Device)
  • 22

    Page 31

    Basic Sequence Basic Operational Sequence The CPU on the Engine Controller PCB controls the operational sequence. The table below shows the operation and the purposes in each status from start-up of the device and to last rotation after print job completion. Status Operation

    Wait

    (Wait) Interval from power-ON or reactivation from sleep mode upon shutting the door(s) to en- tering the print-ready status Activate the printer to be ready for printing. During WAIT time, the following operations are done: pressure is applied to the pressure roller of the Fixing Unit; check cartridges and units being in place; move the developing unit to the home position; and, clean the ITB. When needed, color displacement is correc- ted and the image is stabilized.

    Stby

    (Stby)

    Interval from the wait time or the last rotation to issuance of a print command from the main controller or power-OFF. Maintain the print-ready status. The printer enters the sleep mode upon receiving a “sleep” command from the main controller during the stand-by status. The printer exe- cutes color displacement correction or im- age stabilization upon receiving correspond- ing commands from the main controller.

    Intr

    (Iintr)

    Interval from issuance of a print command from the main controller during the stand-by status to warming up the Fixing Unit to the target temperature. To make the printer ready for print jobs, ac- tivate high-voltage bias PCBs, the Laser Scanner Unit and the Fixing Unit.

    Print

    (Print) Interval from the initial rotation to completion of last page fixation. Based on the video signals input from the main controller, form the static latent image on the photosensitive drum to transfer and fix the toner image on paper. When a certain pages are printed after power-ON, the de- vice undergoes color displacement correc- tion and/or image stabilization.

    Lstr

    (Last rotation) Interval from print job completion to Motor deactivation. The last page of the print job is completely delivered. In this status, the Laser Scanner Unit and high-voltage bias PCBs are inac- tive. The printer starts the initial rotation upon receiving a print command from the main controller during this status.
  • Technical Explanation (Device)
  • 23

    Page 32

    Document Exposure / Delivery System Document Exposure System ■ Outline Specifications / Control / Function List item Function / Method Document Exposure

    Led

    Document Scan Book mode: scan by the shift of the contact Book mode: scan by the shift of the contact image sensor (CIS) ADF: document stream reading by fixed contact image sensor (CIS) Scanning Resolution 300 or 600 dpi (horizontal scanner) X 600 dpi (vertical scanner) Number Of Gradations 256 gradations Magnification 50% to 200% Horizontal: image processing by Main Controller PCB Vertical: change of carriage shift speed, image processing by Main Controller PCB Lens Rod lens array CMOS Sensor Number of lines: 1 line Number of pixels: 5184 pixels as total pixels (5107 pixels as effective pixels) Maximum document scanning width: 216 mm CS Drive Control Drive control by Reader Motor (M3) CS HP Detection Yes Document Size Detection None Dirt Sensor Detection None ■ Major Components Followings are the major components for Document Exposure System.
  • The Contact Sensor to scan document
  • The Reader Motor (M3), the Drive Pulley, the Drive Belt, to shift the Contact Sensor
  • In image scanning control, the Contact Image Sensor is shifted by rotating the Reader Motor based on the drive signal from the Engine Controller PCB and scan the original on the Copyboard Glass. When ADF is in use, image is scanned by feeding the originals by ADF instead of shifting the Contact Image Sensor. Drive Belt Drive Pulley Drive Pulley Contact Image Sensor Reader motor (M3)
  • Technical Explanation (Device)
  • 24

    Page 33

    Document Feeder System ■ Outline Pickup/Feed/Delivery Operation The Auto Document Feeder (ADF) mounted onto this host machine is dedicated to stream-reading. 1 Motor (ADF Motor: M4) is engaged in pickup/feeding/delivery. At the start of copy/fax/scan, the DADF Motor (M4) is driven by the drive command from the Main Controller PCB to pickup/feed the originals set face up on the original tray one by one in order from the top. The original is scanned by the Contact Image Sensor when moving through the Copyboard Glass, and then delivered face down to the original delivery assembly.

    Mcon

    J926

    1 2 3 4 5 6

    +3.3V

    Gnd

    Ds

    Gnd

    +3.3V

    Des

    Ps2

    Ps3

    Operation at Duplex Reading
  • In order to read from the back side, the paper is temporarily reversed.
  • The paper is reversed, and the back side is read.
  • Technical Explanation (Device)
  • 25

    Page 34

  • The paper is reversed once more, and the front side ie read.
  • ■ Controls ● Original Detection There are two types of Original Detection in this Equipment.
  • Original Presence / Absence Detection
  • Detected by DS (Document Sensor: PS3) Setting the original onto the original tray pushes up the actuator, activating (light shielded =>light transmitted) the DS (PS3), and resulting in detection of the presence of original.
  • Detection of the End of the Original
  • Detected by the DES (Document End Sensor: PS2) The leading edge of the original that is fed pushes up the actuator, activating the DES (PS2) (light shielded =>light transmitted) and resulting in detection of the reach of the leading edge of original. Furthermore, when the trailing edge of the original passes the actuator position, the actuator returns to the original position, inactivating the DES (PS2) (light transmitted => light shielded). The trailing edge of the original is detected by this mechanism. The original length that can be scanned with this equipment is less than 400 mm. Passing of the original longer than this results in jam stop. The original length is calculated by the time it takes from detection of the leading edge of the original to detection of the trailing edge of the original..

    Note:

    There is no function to detect the original size (original width, length) in this equipment.

    Mcon

    J926

    1 2 3 4 5 6

    +3.3V

    Gnd

    Ds

    Gnd

    +3.3V

    Des

    Ps2

    Ps3

    ● Jam Detection The following cases are judged as jam.
  • In case of delay in reaching DS/DES or stationary during scanning of original
  • In case DS/DES is detected as ON at power-on (residual paper jam)
  • In case of detecting original of which length is 400 mm or longer
  • Operation after Detection of Jam
  • The host machine stops scanning operation and displays "CHECK DOCUMENT" on the control panel. In case of the model equipped with fax function (with built-in speaker), the warning beep occurs at the detection of jam.
  • Technical Explanation (Device)
  • 26

    Page 35

  • How to release Jam.
  • Remove the jammed paper and open / close the ADF upper cover
  • Technical Explanation (Device)
  • 27

    Page 36

    Controller System Outline The Engine Control System controls all the other systems according to commands from the Main Controller. The Engine Control System contains the following components:

  • DC Controller
  • Low-voltage Power Supply
  • High-voltage Power Supply
  • Block diagram of the Engine Control System is shown below. Engine controller DC controller Low-voltage power supply High-voltage power supply Laser exposure system Document exposure/delivery system Image formation system Fixing system Engine Control System Main Controller

    Option Pickup / Feed System Engine Controller PCB ■ Outline The Engine Controller controls the operational sequence of the printer. Block diagram of the Engine Controller and table of the electrical components are shown below.

  • Technical Explanation (Device)
  • 28

    Page 37

    Fixing unit High-voltage power supply Low-voltage power supply Cartridge Transfer roller AC input Motor Solenoid Photointerrupter DC controller Laser scanner unit Fan Option Operation panel Switch Engine controller Main controller Symbol for component Component Remarks Fan

    Fm3

    Controller Fan

    Fm201

    Main Fan

    Fm203

    Controller Fan

    Motor

    M201

    Main Motor

    Solenoid

    Sl201

    Cassette Pickup Solenoid

    Sl202

    Duplex Reverse Solenoid
  • Sl203

  • MP Tray Pickup Solenoid
  • Switch
  • Sw1

    Power Switch
  • Sw2

  • Door Switch
  • Photointerrupter
  • Ps201

    Duplex Reverse Sensor
  • Ps202

  • MP Tray Media Presence Sen- sor
  • Ps203

  • Cassette Media Presence Sen- sor
  • Ps204

  • TOP Sensor
  • Ps205

  • Media Width Sensor
  • Ps206

  • FD Tray Media Full Sensor
  • Ps915

  • Fixing Delivery Sensor
  • ■ Motor / Fan Control
  • This machine has a motor for paper feeding and image formation and 2 fans for control of temperature increase inside the printer. Arrangement of Motor and the specifications are shown below.
  • Technical Explanation (Device)
  • 29

    Page 38

    Fm3

    M1

    Fm1/Fm2

    Symbol Description Function Failure de- tection

    M1

    Main Motor To drive the rollers of the printer and the rollers of the Paper Feeder Yes FM2(Except

    Eur)

    FM1(EUR only) Main Fan To cool inside the printer

    Fm3

    Controller Fan To cool the Controller Assembly ■ Failure Detection Failure Point Cause of Failure Main Motor In the case that the speed of Motor does not reach the specified speed after the specified time has passed since the startup of the Main Motor. Main Fan In the case that the Fan has been locked continuously for the speci- fied period of time since the startup of the Main Fan Motor. Low-voltage Power Supply ■ Outline The Low-voltage power supply converts AC Power from the power receptacle into DC Power to cover the DC loads. Block diagram of the Low Voltage Power Supply is shown below.
  • Technical Explanation (Device)
  • 30

    Page 39

    +5V

    +3.3V

    +3.3V

    +24V

    +24U

    +24V_S

    Door

    Sns

    Noise filter

    Fet

    +24P1

    Fuse

    (Fu1002)

    Fuse

    (Fu1001)

    Door switch

    (Sw301)

    +24V generation circuit DC controller Low-voltage power supply Engine controller Fixing control circuit Fixing unit Main motor, etc. Main controller

    +5V

    generation circuit

    +3.3V

    generation circuit High-voltage power supply Noise filter Protection circuit Fuse

    (Fu101)

    Fet

    Power switch

    (Sw1,Sw11)

    ■ Protective Function The Low-voltage Power Supply has a protective function against overcurrent and overvoltage to prevent failures in the power supply circuit. If there flows an overcurrent or an overvoltage, the system automatically cuts off the output voltage. If the DC Power is not being supplied from the Low-voltage Power Supply, the protective function may be running. In such case, turn off the power switch and unplug the power cord. Do not plug in the power cord or turn the power switch on again until the root cause is found. In addition, two fuses in the Low-voltage Power Supply protect against overcurrent. If overcurrent lows into the AC line, the fuse blows and cuts off the power distribution. ■ Safety For user and service technician's safety, the printer has a function to interrupt 24V power supply. The door switch is turned off and 24V power supply to the Fixing Assembly and the High-voltage Power Supply Unit stops under the following condition:
  • If the cartridge door is opened (SW2 is turned off)
  • ■ Low-voltage Power Supply Unit Failure Detection The Engine Controller determines a Low-voltage power supply unit failure and stops +24V output. Once 24V output is stopped, 3.3V of the engine CPU stops, so notification is not made. Likely, 3.3V of the controller stops, so the machine seems power-off.
  • +24V is higher than a specified voltage
  • +3.3V is higher than a specified voltage
  • +5V is higher than a specified voltage
  • ■ Power-Saving Mode This is the function to save power consumed by the printer.
  • Technical Explanation (Device)
  • 31

    Page 40

    The table below lists various power-saving modes. Power-Saving Mode Status Stand-by at power-OFF on the reader Power-saving at power-OFF on the reader The control panel enters the power-saving mode. Sleep Sleep1 A / 1B at power-OFF on the reader and the engine The control panel enters the power-saving mode. Sleep2 at power-OFF on the reader and the engine Sleep3 at power-OFF on the reader and the engine The control panel and main controler enters the power-saving mode.

  • The reader is turned ON only when it is used.
  • Automatically shifted depending on the conditions Automatically shifted depending on the conditions Service error Reader Control panel Engine Main Controler Service error Sleep 1A Sleep 2 Sleep 1B Sleep 3 Print Energy Saver Standby Power ON Power OFF Standby recovery event Press [Power-saving] key Press [Power-saving] key Standby recovery event Enters auto-sleep status Start / complete jobs Start / complete jobs Start / complete jobs Enters auto-sleep status Enters auto-shutdown status Detects hook (Eco-recovery OFF) (Eco-recovery not supported) Enters auto-sleep status Non-all-night

    24V Off

    Non-all-night

    24V Off

    State of power supply ON Energy Saving State of power supply OFF
  • Technical Explanation (Device)
  • 32

    Page 41

    Laser Exposure System Outline The Laser Exposure System forms a latent image on the photosensitive drum according to the VIDEO signals sent from the Main Controller. The main components of the Laser Scanner are the Laser Unit and the Scanner Motor Unit, which are controlled by the signals sent from the Engine Controller. Diagram of the Laser Scanner Unit is shown below. Main controller DC controller Engine controller Scanner mirror Scanner motor unit Photosensitive drum BD sensor Laser unit LASER CONTROL signal VIDEO signal SCANNER MOT OR SPEED CONTROL signal BD INPUT signal Optical Unit Failure Detection The Optical Unit failure detection manages the Laser Scanner failure detection functions. The Engine Controller determines an Optical Unit failure and notifies the Main Controller if the Laser Scanner encounters the following conditions:

  • After the drive of Scanner Motor, BD within a specified period is not detected.
  • If the Scanner Motor does not reach a specified rotation within a specified period of start-up.
  • If an out of specified BD interval is detected during a print operation.
  • Technical Explanation (Device)
  • 33

    Page 42

    Image Formation System Outline The Image-Formation System forms a toner image on print media. The following are the main components of the Image-Formation system:

  • Cartridge
  • Transfer Roller
  • Fixing Unit
  • Laser Scanner
  • The Engine Controller controls the Laser Scanner and High-voltage power supply to form the toner image on the photosensitive drum. The image is transferred to the print media and fixed. Diagram of the image formation system is shown below. High-voltage power supply DC controller Laser scanner Photosensitive drum Cartridge Transfer roller Laser beam Pressure roller Fixing film Fixing unit Engine controller Image Formation Process ■ Outline The Image-Formation process consists of the following seven steps divided among five functional blocks: Latent Image Formation Block Step 1: Primary charging Step 2: Laser-beam exposure Developing Block Step 3: Developing Transfer Block Step 4: Transfer Step 5: Separation Fixing Block Step 6: Fixing Drum Cleaning Block Step 7: Drum cleaning
  • Technical Explanation (Device)
  • 34

    Page 43

  • Laser-beam exposure
  • Fixing
  • Fixing
  • Delivery
  • Drum cleaning
  • Developing
  • Primary charging
  • Pickup 4.Transfer
  • Separation
  • Transfer Latent image formation Media path Direction of the drum rotation Block Step Drum cleaning Developing ■ Latent Image Formation Block During the two steps that comprise this block, an invisible latent image is formed on the photosensitive drum. Step 1: Primary Charging To prepare for latent image formation, the surface of the photosensitive drum is charged with a uniform negative potential. The primary charging bias is applied to the primary charging roller and the roller charges the drum directly. Primary charging bias Photosensitive drum Primary charging roller Step 2: Laser-beam Exposure The laser beam scans the photosensitive drum to neutralize the negative charge on portions of the drum surface. An electrostatic latent image forms where the negative charge was neutralized. Laser beam Unexposed area Exposed area ■ Developing Block Toner adheres to the electrostatic latent image on the photosensitive drum, which becomes visible. Step 3: Developing Toner acquires a negative charge from the friction that occurs when the developing roller rotates against the developing blade. The negatively charged toner is attracted to the latent image on the photosensitive drum surface because the drum surface has a higher potential. The developing bias is applied to the developing roller.
  • Technical Explanation (Device)
  • 35

    Page 44

    Developing bias Blade Developing rolle Photosensitive drum Unexposed area Exposed area Exposed area Unexposed area ■ Transfer Block During the two steps that comprise this block, a toner image on the photosensitive drum is transferred to the print media. Step 4: Transfer The transfer bias is applied to the transfer roller to charge the print media positive. The positively charged media attracts the negatively charged toner from the photosensitive drum surface. Transfer bias Media Transfer roller Photosensitive drum Step 5: Separation The elasticity of the print media and the curvature of the photosensitive drum cause the media to separate from the drum surface. The static charge eliminator reduces back side static discharge of the media for stable media feed and image quality. Media Transfer roller Photosensitive drum Static charge eliminator ■ Fixing Block The toner image is fixed onto the print media.

  • Technical Explanation (Device)
  • 36

    Page 45

    Step 6: Fixing The printer uses an on-demand Fixing method. The toner image is permanently affixed to the print media by heat and pressure. The Fixing bias is applied to the Fixing Film to improve image quality. Fixing bias Fixing film Toner Pressure roller Fixing heater Media ■ Drum Cleaning Block The residual toner is cleared from the photosensitive drum surface. Step 7: Drum Cleaning The cleaning blade scrapes the residual toner off the surface of the photosensitive drum. The residual toner is deposited in the toner collection box. Toner collection box Photosensitive drum Cleaning blade High-voltage Power Supply ■ Outline The High-voltage Power Supply applies biases to the following components:

  • Primary Charging Roller
  • Developing Roller
  • Transfer Roller
  • Fixing Flm
  • The Engine controller controls the High-voltage Power Supply to generate biases.
  • Technical Explanation (Device)
  • 37

    Page 46

    Tr

    Pr

    Dv

    Fb

    High-voltage power supply Primary charging bias circuit Developing bias circuit Transfer bias circuit DC controller Engine controller Primary charging roller Cartridge Photosensitive drum Transfer roller Developing roller Fixing unit Pressure roller Fixing film
  • Technical Explanation (Device)
  • 38

    Page 47

    Fixing System Outline The Fixing/Delivery Unit fixes the toner onto a print paper and delivers it to the Delivery Tray. The operation of the Fixing/Delivery Unit is explained in the following.

  • The print paper fed from the Pickup/Feed Unit is fused the toner by the Fixing Film and the pressure roller.
  • The print paper delivered from the Fixing Assembly is delivered to the face-down Delivery Tray or the face-up Delivery slot.
  • When the engine controller detects that the heater temperature reaches 50 deg C after the last rotation is completed, it drives the main Motor for 50 msec. and dislocates the nip part. This prevents the toner adhering to the pressure roller. The Fixing Assembly of this printer utilizes the on-demand Fixing method. It is structured as shown below.
  • Heater:
  • This Fixing Assembly incorporates one heater. Fixing Heater (H201/2010): To heat the Fixing Film (ceramic heater)
  • Thermistor:
  • This Fixing Assembly incorporates one thermistor. Thermistor (TH1/11): Sit almost at the center of the Fixing Film. (contact type) To control the temperature of the Fixing Film
  • Thermal switch:
  • Thermoswitch (TP201/2010): Sit almost at the center of the Fixing Film (contact type) If the temperature of the heater rises abnormally high, the contact gets broken and cuts off the AC Voltage Supply to the Fixing Heater to interrupt the power supply to the heater. The temperature control of the Fixing Assembly incorporated as above is operated by the Fixing temperature control circuit according to the command from the CPU (IC201) on the DC Controller. The followings describe the each circuit and function of the temperature control of the Fixing Assembly. Fixing film Fixing unit Thermistor Fixing heater Thermoswitch Pressure roller

    Fixing Temperature

    DETECTION signal

    Fixing Temperature

    CONTROL signal Fixing temperature control circuit Engine controller PCB

    Cpu

    Controls The Fixing control circuit controls the temperature in the Fixing Assembly.
  • Technical Explanation (Device)
  • 39

    Page 48

    The printer uses an on-demand Fixing method. The figure below shows the configuration of the Fixing control circuit.

    Th1

    Tp1

    H1

    Pressure roller Fixing film Fixing heater safety circuit DC controller Low-voltage power supply unit Engine controller Fixing control circuit FIXNG HEATER CONTROL signal FIXING TEMPERA TURE signal Fixing heater control circuit
  • Fixing Heater (H1): Heats the Fixing Film
  • Thermistor (TH1): Detects Fixing temperature (Contact type)
  • Thermoswitch (TP1):Prevents an abnormal temperature rise of the Fixing Heater (Contact type)
  • These temperature controls in the Fixing Assembly are performed by the Fixing Heater control circuit and the Fixing Heater safety circuit according to the commands from the DC Controller. ■ Throughput Reduction Control During continuous printing, the throughput is changed to reduce heat buildup on parts not in contact with paper, to improve Fixing characteristics and reduce curling. The throughput reduction is implemented according to the following conditions. Small Size Paper Speed Control Fixing Mode Throughput

    Envelope

    1 - 2 imprints 3 - 4 imprints 5 imprints 8 6 imprints or more 17 ppm 12 ppm 8 ppm 6 ppm

    Envelope2

    1 - 3 imprints 4 - 7 imprints 8 - 22 imprints 23 imprints or more 17 ppm 12 ppm 8 ppm 6 ppm

    Envelope3

    1 - 3 imprints 4 - 5 imprints 6 imprints or more

    12 ppm 8 ppm 6 ppm

    Postcard 1 - 3 imprints 4 - 5 imprints 6 imprints or more

    12 ppm 8 ppm 6 ppm

    Long Narrow Normal / Light / OHT 1 - 280 imprints 281 imprints or more

    2 ppm 1 ppm

    Label / Heavy1 / Heavy2 Envelope / Envelope2 / Envelope3 1 imprints or more

    3 ppm

  • Technical Explanation (Device)
  • 40

    Page 49

    16K Paper Speed Control Fixing Mode Throughput Normal / Light / OHT (Normal mode) 1 - 27 imprints 28 - 39 imprints 40 - 79 imprints 80 - 199 imprints 200 imprints or more 16 ppm 14 ppm 12 ppm 10 ppm 8 ppm Normal / Light / OHT 1 imprints or more

    6 ppm

    Envelope2 / Quiet 1 - 89 imprints 90 imprints or more

    17 ppm 14 ppm

    Label / Envelope / Envelope3 Heavy1 / Heavy2 / Postcard 1 - 34 imprints 35 imprints or more

    17 ppm 8 ppm

    ■ Fixing Temperature Control The Fixing temperature control maintains the temperature of the Fixing Heater at its targeted temperature. Block diagram of this control is shown below.

    Freqsns

    Th1

    Tp1

    H1: Fixing heater TP1: Thermoswitch TH1: Thermistor

    Fsrd

    Rlyd

    Fsrth

    +24V

    Rl101

    Pressure roller Fixing film unit Fixing heater control circuit Fixing heater safety circuit DC controller Low-voltage power supply Engine controller Fixing control circuit Fixing unit Relay control circuit Frequency detection circuit The DC Controller monitors the FIXING TEMPERATURE (FSRTH) signal and sends the FIXING HEATER CONTROL (FSRD) signal according to the detected temperature. The Fixing Heater control circuit controls the Fixing Heater depending on the signal so that the heater remains at the targeted temperature. ■ Protective Function The protective function detects an abnormal temperature rise in the Fixing Assembly and interrupts power supply to the Fixing Heater.
  • Technical Explanation (Device)
  • 41

    Page 50

    The following three protective components prevent an abnormal temperature rise of the Fixing Heater:

  • DC Controller
  • Fixing Heater safety circuit
  • Thermoswitch
  • DC Controller
  • The DC Controller monitors the detected temperature of the thermistor. The DC Controller makes the FIXING HEATER CONTROL signal inactive and releases the relay to interrupt power supply to the Fixing Heater under the following condition:
  • Fixing Heater safety circuit
  • The Fixing Heater safety circuit monitors the detected temperature of the thermistor. The Fixing Heater safety circuit releases the relay control circuit to interrupt power supply to the Fixing Heater under the following condition:
  • Thermoswitch
  • The contact of the thermoswitch is broken to interrupt power supply to the Fixing Heater under the following condition: ■ Failure Detection The DC Controller determines a Fixing Assembly failure, makes the FIXING HEATER CONTROL signal inactive, releases the relay to interrupt power supply to the Fixing Heater and notifies the formatter of a failure state when it encounters the following conditions:
  • Start-up failure
  • If the detected temperature of the thermistor is kept a specified degrees or higher for a specified period of heater start-
  • up during the wait period.
  • If the detected temperature of the thermistor is kept a specified degrees or lower for a specified period under the heater
  • temperature control during the print period.
  • If the detected temperature of the thermistor does not reach its targeted temperature within a specified period under the
  • heater temperature control during the initial rotation period.
  • Abnormal low temperature
  • If the detected temperature of the thermistor is kept a specified degrees or lower for a specified period under the heater
  • temperature control.
  • Abnormal high temperature
  • If the detected temperature of the main thermistor is kept a specified degrees or higher for a specified period.
  • Drive circuit failure
  • If a specified frequency of the FREQUENCY signal is not detected within a specified period after the printer is turned
  • on.
  • Technical Explanation (Device)
  • 42

    Page 51

    Pickup / Feed System Outline The Media Feed System picks up, feeds and delivers the print media. It consists of several types of rollers. The Duplex Feed Unit in the Duplex model reverses and Refeeds the print media to print on both sides of media. The media path is shown below. : Simplex media path : Duplex media path Pressure roller Photosensitive drum Face-down delivery roller Fixing film Fixing delivery roller Duplex feed roller Transfer roller Registration roller Duplex re-pickup roller Cassette pickup roller MP tray separattion pad MP tray separattion roller Cassette separation pad Drive Configuration Diagram and table of the electrical components are shown below.

  • Technical Explanation (Device)
  • 43

    Page 52

    Sl2

    M1

    Ps206

    Ps201

    Ps915

    Ps205

    Ps204

    Ps202

    Sl1

    Ps203

    Sl3

    Electrical component Symbol Signal Main Motor

    M1

    Main Motor Control Signal Cassette Pickup Solenoid

    Sl1

    Cassette Pickup Solenoid Control Signal MP Tray Pickup Solenoid

    Sl3

    MP Tray Pickup Solenoid Control Signal Duplex Reverse Solenoid

    Sl2

    Duplex Reverse Solenoid Control Signal TOP Sensor

    Ps204

    TOP Signal Cassette Media Presence Sensor

    Ps203

    Cassette Media Presence Signal MP Tray Presence Sensor

    Ps202

    MP Tray Media Presence Signal Fixing Delivery Sensor

    Ps915

    Fixing Delivery Signal Duplex Reverse Sensor

    Ps201

    Duplex Reverse Signal FD Tray Media Full Sensor

    Ps206

    FD Tray Media Full Signal Media Width Sensor

    Ps205

    Media Width Signal Jam Detection ■ Outline The printer uses the following sensors to detect the presence of media and to check whether media is being fed correctly or has jammed:
  • TOP Sensor (PS204)
  • Fixing Delivery Sensor (PS915)
  • Duplex Reverse Sensor (PS201)
  • Media Width Sensor (PS205)
  • Technical Explanation (Device)
  • 44

    Page 53

    : Simplex media path : Duplex media path

    Ps915

    Ps201

    Ps205 Ps204

    ■ Pickup Delay Jam When the TOP Sensor (PS204) cannot detect the leading edge of paper within the specified time after starting pickup from a cassette, pickup retry is executed twice. After that, the sensor still cannot detect the leading edge of paper within the specified time, it is judged as a pickup jam. ■ Pickup Stationary Jam When the TOP Sensor (PS204) cannot detect the trailing edge of paper after the specified time has passed since it detected the leading edge of paper, it is judged as a pickup stationary jam. ■ Delivery Delay Jam When the Fixing Delivery Sensor (100V:PS915, 230V:PS9150) cannot detect the leading edge of paper after the specified time has passed since the TOP Sensor (PS204) detected the leading edge of paper, it is judged as a delivery delay jam. ■ Fixing Paper Wrap Jam After judging that it is not a delivery delay jam, execute the detection of Fixing paper wrap jam. It is judged as a Fixing paper wrap jam when all of the following conditions are met: after the specified time had passed since the Fixing Delivery Sensor (100V:PS915, 230V:PS9150) detected the leading edge of paper, after the specified time had passed since the TOP Sensor (PS204) detected the leading edge of paper, and the Fixing Delivery Sensor (100V:PS915, 230V:PS9150) detects no paper.
  • Technical Explanation (Device)
  • 45

    Page 54

    ■ Delivery Stationary Jam After judging that it is not a Fixing paper wrap, execute the detection of delivery stationary jam. When the Fixing Delivery Sensor (100V:PS915, 230V:PS9150) does not detect no paper within the specified time since the TOP Sensor (PS204) detected the trailing edge of paper, it is judged as a delivery stationary jam. ■ Reverse Delay Jam After judging that it is not a delivery stationary jam, execute the detection of reverse stationary jam. When the Duplex Reverse Sensor (PS201) does not detect paper after the specified time has passed since the Fixing Delivery Sensor (100V:PS915, 230V:PS9150) detected the trailing edge of paper, it is judged as a reverse delay jam. ■ Reverse Stationary Jam When the Duplex Reverse Sensor (PS201) cannot detect the trailing edge of paper after the specified time has passed since the sensor detected the leading edge of paper, it is judged as a reverse stationary jam. ■ Internal Residual Jam When a paper is detected by the TOP Sensor (PS204), Fixing Delivery Sensor (100V:PS915, 230V:PS9150), Paper Width Sensor (PS205), or Duplex Reverse Sensor (PS201) at the time of starting initial rotation, it is judged as an internal residual jam. ■ Door Open Jam When a door-open is detected while feeding papers, it is judged as a door open jam.

  • Technical Explanation (Device)
  • 46

    Page 55

    Technical Explanation (System) 3 Overview of System Management...... 48 Version Upgrade................................. 49 Setting Information Export/Import Function (DCM)............................... 54 Monitoring Function (e-Maintenance/ imageWARE Remote)..................... 85

    Page 56

    Overview of System Management This chapter describes information for service technicians on the system of this machine. Although this chapter contains some information described in the User's Guide, for details on the functions for users, refer to the e-Manual.

  • Technical Explanation (System)
  • 48

    Page 57

    Version Upgrade Function Overview The following firmware upgrade methods are available with this device. Version upgrade using User Support Tool (UST). Upgrade the firmware of the device using UST Open the file for UST version upgrade on a PC connected with the device and upgrade the firmware. Since the host machine and the PC are connected using a USB cable as well as a network cable, version upgrades can be performed in an environment where a network is not available. Version upgrade via Internet Access the dedicated server, and download and upgrade the firmware. Provided that Internet connection is available, the system automatically configures the connection destination setting and executes processing such as download and version upgrade. Version upgrade using a USB flash drive (released only in special cases) Upgrade the firmware of this machine using a USB flash drive. Connect a USB flash drive where the firmware is stored to the device, and update the firmware in service mode. Version upgrades can be performed in an environment where a PC or network is not available.

    Note:

    Firmware that can be used for version upgrade using a USB flash drive is released only in special cases such as a tender business, and is not normally released. As for the detailed version upgrade procedure, follow the instructions given at the time of release of the customized firmware for version upgrade using a USB flash drive. Version upgrade by replacing the PCB Version upgrade by replacing the existing PCB with a PCB where the latest firmware is installed

    Caution:

    A message appears when an attempt is made to upgrade a host machine to which specified firmware has been applied. This is a precaution not to use wrong firmware to upgrade a host machine to which specified firmware has been applied. See the following regarding the combination of whether the message will be displayed: Type of firmware applied to the host machine Firmware to upgrade General firmware Specified firmware General firmware No message No message Specified firmware Message displayed Message displayed
  • Technical Explanation (System)
  • 49

    Page 58

    Version Upgrade Using UST a zip file and a folder containing UST is extracted by decompressing the file. When executing UST on the PC connected to the machine with a USB Cable or Network cable, the firmware can be upgraded by downloading it from the PC to the machine. For the detailed procedure, refer to "User Support Tool Operation Guide" stored in the decompressed folder. "User Support Tool Operation Guide" is also available on the website of CINC. Firmware

    Pc

    USB cable/ Network cable Firmware Version Upgrade via Internet Connect to the Internet using the network function of the device, and download and upgrade the latest firmware from the server. If the device is in an environment where Internet connection is available, firmware versions can be upgraded only by operation from the menu without using PC. ■ Prerequisite In order to perform version upgrade of the device via Internet, the following conditions must be met. There should be no other jobs being executed. Firmware cannot be upgraded while there is a job being executed. If there is a job being executed, wait for completion of the job and then perform the work. The device should be able to be connected to the external network. If connection is not available because, for example, there is a proxy server, follow the e-Manual to configure the proxy server settings and enable connection to the external network. The serial number of the host machine should be shown on the Main Controller PCB. Whether or not the serial number of the host machine is shown on the Main Controller PCB can be checked from the Control Panel or SPEC REPORT. The procedure for checking the serial number using SPEC REPORT is shown below as reference information. Procedure to check from SPEC REPORT
  • Execute the following service mode to print SPEC REPORT.
  • • Copier > Function > Misc-P > Spec

  • Technical Explanation (System)
  • 50

    Page 59

  • Check if the serial number (3 alphabetical characters + 5-digit number or 1-digit number + 2
  • alphabetical characters + 5-digit number) is shown in [MACHINE SERIAL NUMBER] of the printed SPEC

    Report.

    ******

    * Spec Report *

    ****** Device Info

    ZZ999 Series ROM Version

    Main

    00.75

    Boot

    00.25

    Lang

    01.36

    Econt

    00.10

    Panel

    05.01 Device Code

    A0000000

    Locale

    9 Voltage TYpe

    0 BODY No.

    Zzz99999

    Factory Flag

    12345678 ■ Procedure for Upgrading the Firmware via Internet

  • Select the following menu to upgrade the firmware via Internet:
  • [Menu] > [Management Settings] > [ense Other] > [Update Firmware] > [Via Internet ]
  • System Management Settings PDL Selection (Plug and Play) Register License Update Firmware Initialize key and Certificate Initialize Addres Book Initialize Menu Update firmware ? Must turn main power OFF/ON after update Yes

    No Menu Scan Settings MEmory Media Settings Printer Settings Adjust memory /Maintenance System Management Settings

    Output Report Update Firmware Via PC Via Internet Version Information When the upgrading of firmware is completed, the machine automatically restarts.

  • Select the following menu, and check that the firmware has been correctly upgraded:
  • [Menu] > [Management Settings ] > [ense Other] > [Update Firmware] > [Version Information]
  • Update Firmware Via PC Via Internet Version Information Version Information Main Controller : Ver. 00.73 Boot ROM : Ver. 00.25

    Dcon :

    Close

    Caution:

    This function does not support the operations from remote UI. ( [Update Firmware] does not exist in the [System Management Settings] menu of the remote UI.)
  • Technical Explanation (System)
  • 51

    Page 60

    ■ Messages The message displayed on the device operation panel is as follows. No . Error message The timing of oc- currence Remedy 1 Job in progress... Wait a moment, then try again. If there is a job being executed:

  • Wait until the job is completed.
  • Cancel the job.
  • 2 Cannot check the firmware version. (Server com- munication error.) Network error
  • Check whether the device can be connected to the ex-
  • ternal network.
  • Check whether the proxy setting has been made (in
  • case of access via a proxy server). 3 Cannot download the firmware. (Error during download.)
  • Check whether the device can be connected to the ex-
  • ternal network.
  • Check whether the proxy setting has been made (in
  • case of access via a proxy server).
  • Check that the serial number of the host machine is
  • shown on the Main Controller PCB. 4

    *Download Mode* Network Availa-

    BLE IP ADRESS IP address of the machine

    Press Stop Key To Exit

    If update (writing) of the firmware has ended in failure:
  • Update the firmware again using UST.
  • 5

    *Download Mode* Failed To Update

    6

    *Download Mode* Update Is Com-

    Plete

    If the update of the firmware is suc- cessful
  • Version Upgrade Using a USB Flash Drive (Released Only in Special
  • Cases) Connect a USB flash drive where the firmware is stored to this machine, and update the firmware in service mode.

    Note:

    Firmware that can be used for version upgrade using a USB flash drive is released only in special cases such as a tender business, and is not normally released. As for the detailed version upgrade procedure, follow the instructions given at the time of release of the customized firmware for version upgrade using a USB flash drive. ■ Prerequisite In order to perform version upgrade of the machine using a USB flash drive, the following conditions must be met. There should be no other jobs being executed. Firmware cannot be upgraded while there is a job being executed. If there is a job being executed, wait for completion of the job and then perform the work. ■ Procedure for Upgrading the Firmware Using a USB Flash Drive
  • Connect a USB flash drive where the firmware is stored to this machine.
  • Execute one of the following service modes.
  • • Copier > Function > System > Download

    • Copier > Function > System > Download_Force

    Note:

    If you want to apply only firmware that is newer than the firmware currently applied in the machine, execute DOWNLOAD. If you want to apply all the firmware contained in the USB flash drive regardless of whether it is newer or older, execute DOWNLOAD_

    Force.

  • The signature data of the downloaded file is verified, and download instruction information is written to the
  • designated area of the flash memory only if the verification result is correct.
  • Technical Explanation (System)
  • 52

    Page 61

  • The machine is automatically restarted.
  • When the upgrading of firmware is completed, the machine automatically restarts.
  • Technical Explanation (System)
  • 53

    Page 62

    Setting Information Export/Import Function (DCM) Overview Various data is stored in the storage inside the device. Depending on the works to be done such as replacing parts, this data needs to be backed up and restored. There are some ways to back up and restore data, and the appropriate one should be used depending on the purpose and storage destination. This section describes the procedure for backing up and restoring service mode setting values. For the procedure for backing up and restoring other information, refer to the e-Manual. ■ Function Overview This machine has a setting information export/import function (hereinafter referred to as DCM (Device Configuration Management) function) which exports/imports the machine's setting value information as a file. The file exported/imported using the DCM function is called a DCM file, and the target setting information is as follows:

  • Setting information of [Menu] ([Setting/ Registration ] menu)
  • Service mode setting information
  • Address Book
  • The DCM file is exported to a USB flash drive or PC local disk from the Control Panel or remote UI. The exported DCM file can be returned to the original device or imported to a different device. When the file is returned to the original device, this can be used as a function to back up the settings, and when the file is imported to a different device, this can be used as a function to copy setting information. Data can also be imported to or exported from an iR-ADV machine by using iW EMC/MC DCM Plug-in. In the case of the setting value backup function before implementation of the DCM function, an exported file could be imported only to the same device, but the DCM function enables import of an exported file to a different device.

    Dcm

    Dcm

    Dcm

    Dcm

    Dcm

    Dcm

    Dcm

    DCM support device DCM support device Settings/ Registration Service mode Remote UI DCM file iW EMC/MC with DCM Plug-in DCM support iR-ADV DCM file DCM file DCM file DCM file DCM file USB memory device Conceptual diagram

    Note:

    In order to export or import setting information using DCM, it is necessary that the device supports DCM. ■ Backup/Restoration for Service Technicians Backup and restoration from [Menu] ([Setting/ Registration ] menu) Setting information can be backed up and restored from the Control Panel of the device or from [Menu] ([Setting/ Registration ] menu) of remote UI. Although [Menu] ([Setting/ Registration ] menu) is for users, the service mode settings information can be backed up and restored from the Import/Export function by changing the service mode setting. The service mode settings information can be backed up and restored only by accessing from the remote UI [Settings/Registration] menu. Backup/Restoration Using Service Mode Some of the functions in service mode can be used to backup and restore data. DC-CON/R-CON setting value information and service counter (DC-CON) values can be backed up and restored.
  • Technical Explanation (System)
  • 54

    Page 63

    ■ Combination of Information Exported/Imported by DCM, Means, and Storage Locations A DCM file is exported and imported using the Control Panel, remote UI, or the iW EMC server, depending on the situation of the site. The information exported/imported differs depending on the means. Combinations of them are shown in the following table. Menu used Operation Information exported Save destination Setting values of menu options Address book**1 Service mode set- ting values [Settings/Registra- tion] menu Control panel Yes (fixed)*2 Yes (fixed)*2 No USB flash drive Remote UI Yes Yes With conditions*3 PC local disk Service mode Control panel No No Yes USB flash drive / Storage in the host machine Remote UI No No Yes Storage in the host machine ■ Compatibility of Data The following table shows compatibility of data in the case where the device from which the data is exported and the device to which the data is imported differ in model and/or serial number. For items that are imported in Cases A, B, and C, refer to “List of Items Which Can Be Imported” on page 63. Model Serial number Import process Same Same Items corresponding to Case A are imported.*4 Same Different*5 Items corresponding to Case B are imported.*4 Different Different*5 Items corresponding to Case C are imported.*6 Different Same The file is judged to be invalid, and the process ends with an error. ■ Replacement Mode When this function is used for migrating the setting data upon replacement of a device, some of the data cannot be migrated if the model to which the data is migrated is different. When this function is used in normal mode, data that is applicable to either Case B (of different serial number) or Case C (of different model) cannot be imported. When replacement mode is enabled on the device on the importing side, data can be forcibly migrated even to a device of a different serial number or even between different models. Case A Case B Case C Case A Case B Case C Normal mode Replace mode *1. Models without address books are excluded. In the case of a fax option model without SEND function, address books are exported only if a fax option is connected with the device. *2. When the [Settings/ Registration] menu is used from the Control Panel, both the setting menu information and the address book are imported/exported. It is not possible to export/import only either of them. Information which is not included in the data to be imported is not imported. *3. Service mode is added to the data to be exported only when service mode COPIER > OPTION > USER > SMD-EXPT is set. For information on items that are imported, refer to "List of Items Which Can Be Imported". *4. If the firmware version at the time of import differs from that at the time of export, predetermined corrective processing may be performed. *5. If a serial number is missing, the serial numbers are judged to be mismatched. *6. Predetermined corrective processing may be performed.

  • Technical Explanation (System)
  • 55

    Page 64

    The following shows the procedure to turn ON/OFF replacement mode of the device to which the migrating data is imported.

  • Set the following service mode setting value to "1(ON)" or "0(OFF)".
  • • Copier > Option > User > Rpl-Imp

    Caution:

    Since replacement mode is not lifted automatically, the setting value of the foregoing service mode needs to be changed back to "0" to return to normal mode. The targeted items of replacement mode are as follows. List of Replacement Mode Targeted Items User mode setting items Settings (* indicates default values) Remarks System settings

    Device information settings

    Device name 32 characters Model name is displayed as a default value. Installation site 32 characters

    Network settings

    TCP/IP settings

    IPv4 settings

    IP address 0.0.0.0 *

    IPv6 settings

    Manual address settings

    Use manual address

    Off*/On

    Manual address IP address input screen

    Prefix length (0 to *64 to 128)

    Default router address Router address input screen

    DNS settings

    Use the same host/domain name as those of IPv4

    Off/On*

    Host name Enter the host name

    Domain name Enter the domain name

    mDNS Settings

    mDNS Settings

    Off/On*

    Use the same mDNS name as that of IPv4

    Off/On*

    mDNS name Enter the mDNS name

    SMB settings

    NetBIOS name NetBIOS name for own machine (15 byte)

    Workgroup name Belonging workgroup name (15 byte)

    AirPrint settings

    Installation site 32 characters Setting values to be referred are the same as [Installation Site] in the [System Settings] Import/Export Procedure from [Settings/Registration] of Remote UI This section describes the procedure for backing up and restoring service mode setting information by using the [Import/Export] function in the [Settings/Registration] menu of Remote UI.

  • Technical Explanation (System)
  • 56

    Page 65

    Caution:

  • The service mode setting information can be backed up and restored only from the [Settings/Registration] menu on
  • Remote UI, and the operation cannot be performed from the [Settings/Registration] menu on the Control Panel.
  • In the case of backing up and restoring only the setting information of the [Settings/Registration] menu or the address
  • book, refer to the procedure described in the e-Manual. ■ Limitations The following limitations exist when backing up and restoring the service mode settings information from the [Settings/ Registrations] menu of remote UI. A job must not be accepted during an import/export processing. Except for the calibration requested by the engine, a job is not allowed to be accepted during a processing. In addition, import/ export must not be performed during execution of a job. Firmware must not be updated during an import/export processing. Fax cannot be received while firmware is updated during a processing. In addition, import/export must not be performed also during firmware update. Power must not be turned off during an import/export processing. If power discontinuity occurs during an import processing, a rollback processing is not performed, therefore the settings imported up to that point are reflected while the rest of the settings remain as-is. When power discontinuity occurs during an export processing, export is not executed. ■ Procedure for Export from Remote UI ([System Management Settings] Menu) Service mode setting information can be exported from the [Management Settings] menu by setting the following service mode setting value to "1".
  • Enter service mode, and set the following item to "1".
  • • Copier > Option > User > Smd-Expt

    Tnrb-Sw

    : 0

    Scall-Sw

    : 0

    Scallcmp

    : 0

    Ps-Mode

    : 0

    Smd-Expt

    : 1

    All-Slp

    : 1

    Rpl-Imp

    : 0

    Note:

    The [SMD-EXPT] setting can be configured either from the Control Panel or from the remote UI.
  • Technical Explanation (System)
  • 57

    Page 66

  • Exit service mode, start remote UI, log in as a system administrator, and then select the following item:
  • [Setting/ Registration] > [Management Settings] > [Data Management] > [Import/Export] > [Export]
  • 1 2
  • After confirming that [Service Mode] is displayed/selected in [Select Item to Export], enter the password and click
  • [Start Exporting]. 1 2 3 Address Book Select the check box to export the address book data. Settings/Registration Select this check box to import the menu option data. Encryption password Enter 32 or less numeric characters set when the file was exported.
  • The [File Download] dialog box will appear. Save the file to any location.
  • Enter service mode, and set the following item to "0".
  • • Copier > Option > User > Smd-Expt

    Caution:

    Since the screen of export function can also be accessed by the user, be sure to disable the [SMD-EXPT] setting (setting value: 0). ■ Procedure for Import from Remote UI ([System Management Settings] Menu) Import the service mode setting information file that was exported in the previous procedure.
  • Technical Explanation (System)
  • 58

    Page 67

  • Enter service mode, and set the following item to "1".
  • • Copier > Option > User > Smd-Expt

    Tnrb-Sw

    : 0

    Scall-Sw

    : 0

    Scallcmp

    : 0

    Ps-Mode

    : 0

    Smd-Expt

    : 1

    All-Slp

    : 1

    Rpl-Imp

    : 0

    Note:

    The [SMD-EXPT] setting can be configured either from the Control Panel or from the remote UI.
  • Exit service mode, start remote UI, log in as a system administrator, and then select the following item:
  • [Setting/ Registration] > [Management Settings] > [Data Management] > [Import/Export] > [Import]
  • 1 2
  • Configure the import setting, and click [Start Importing].
  • Entering the encryption password and clicking [Start Importing] imports the menu option data. 1 2 3 [Browse...] button Click to select the file to import. Decryption password Enter 32 or less numeric characters set when the file was exported. Address Book Select the check box to import the address book data. Settings/Registration Select this check box to import the menu option data.
  • Technical Explanation (System)
  • 59

    Page 68

  • A dialog box asking whether the user wants to execute import will appear. Click [OK].
  • A message will appear to indicate that the process has been completed. Click the [OK] button.
  • Restart this machine, enter service mode, and confirm that the setting information is reflected. This completes the
  • procedure for importing a setting information file.
  • Enter service mode, and set the following item to "0".
  • • Copier > Option > User > Smd-Expt

    Caution:

    Since the screen of export function can also be accessed by the user, be sure to disable the [SMD-EXPT] setting (setting value: 0). Procedure for Exporting/Importing Service Mode Setting Information Service mode setting information can be backed up and restored by using service mode functions. The backup file can be saved to a USB flash drive or a storage in the machine. Backup/restoration to a USB flash drive

    Copier > Function >System > Export

    Copier > Function >System > Import

    Backup/restoration to a storage in the machine

    Copier > Function >System > Save-Sm

    Copier > Function >System > Rstr-Sm

    Backup/restoration to a USB flash drive Backup/restoration to a storage in the machine Storage destination USB flash drive Storage in the machine Number of files saved Depends on the capacity of the USB flash drive One Duplication of the setting values for other machines Possible Not possible ■ Procedure for Exporting to a USB Flash Drive Use the service mode function to save the service mode setting information to a USB flash drive. This operation can be performed both from the Control Panel and remote UI. The following USB flash drives can be used for export/import.

  • USB flash drive in FAT 16 format (storage capacity: 2 GB)
  • USB flash drive in FAT 32 format (storage capacity: 32 GB)
  • Note that the descriptions in parenthesis in the procedure are the descriptions in the case of remote UI.
  • Connect the USB flash drive to the USB Memory Port.
  • Technical Explanation (System)
  • 60

    Page 69

  • Enter service mode, and execute the following service mode.
  • • Copier > Function > System > Export

    Panel-Up

    Logwrite

    Import

    Export

    Display

    Io

    Adjust

    Function

    Option

    Counter

    Ccd

    Clear

    Misc-R

    Misc-P

    System

    Viffnc

    Splman

    Caution:

    Even if the service mode is executed without connecting a USB flash drive, an error is not displayed. It looks as if the process has been completed successfully, but the file has not been exported to anywhere. For the reason shown above, be sure to check before execution that a USB flash drive is connected.
  • The message shown below which is displayed during the process will disappear. When the display has returned to
  • the original state, remove the USB flash drive. Executing...
  • Check that a setting information file (service.dcm) exists in the directory directly under the root of the USB flash
  • drive. This completes the procedure for exporting a setting information file. ■ Procedure for Import from USB Flash Drive
  • Save the setting information file (service.dcm) to be imported to directly under the root of the USB flash drive.
  • Technical Explanation (System)
  • 61

    Page 70

  • Connect the USB flash drive to the USB Memory Port.
  • Enter service mode, and execute the following service mode.
  • • Copier > Function > System > Import

    Service Mode

    Copier

    Feeder

    Fax

    Testmode

    Display

    Io

    Adjust

    Function

    Option

    Counter

    Ccd

    Clear

    Misc-R

    Misc-P

    System

    Viffnc

    Splman

    Panel-Up

    Logwrite

    Import

    Export

  • The message shown below which is displayed during the process will disappear. When the display has returned to
  • the original state, remove the USB flash drive. Executing...
  • Restart the host machine, enter service mode, and confirm that the setting information is reflected.
  • This completes the procedure for importing a setting information file. ■ Backup Procedure to the Storage in the Machine Use the service mode function to back up the service mode setting information to the storage in the machine. This operation can be performed both from the Control Panel and remote UI. The setting information that can be saved in the machine's storage is only one.
  • Enter service mode, and execute the following service mode.
  • Access service mode, select COPIER > FUNCTION > SYSTEM > SAVE-SM, and click [OK (EXEC)].

    Service Mode

    Copier

    Feeder

    Fax

    Testmode

    Display

    Io

    Adjust

    Function

    Option

    Counter

    Ccd

    Clear

    Misc-R

    Misc-P

    System

    Viffnc

    Splman

    Panel-Up

    Logwrite

    Import

    Export

    Save-Sm

    Rstr-Sm

    Log2Usb

  • The following screen is displayed during the processing:
  • Technical Explanation (System)
  • 62

    Page 71

    Executing...

  • Finish the operation after checking that the screen returns to the previous display.
  • ■ Procedure for Restoration from Internal Storage Restore the service mode setting information that has been backed up to the storage in the machine in the previous procedure.
  • Enter service mode, and execute the following service mode.
  • • Copier > Function > System > Rstr-Sm

    Service Mode

    Copier

    Feeder

    Fax

    Testmode

    Display

    Io

    Adjust

    Function

    Option

    Counter

    Ccd

    Clear

    Misc-R

    Misc-P

    System

    Viffnc

    Splman

    Panel-Up

    Logwrite

    Import

    Export

    Save-Sm

    Rstr-Sm

    Log2Usb

  • The following screen is displayed during the processing:
  • Executing...
  • Finish the operation after checking that the screen returns to the previous display.
  • List of Items Which Can Be Imported The following shows items to be imported for this function. Note that the setting values are not imported in cases such as below:
  • Items which are originally not included in a DCM file (e.g.:"Settings/Registration Basic Information" of a DCM file exported
  • using service mode)
  • Not included in the import coverage (Cases A to C)
  • There are no options and functions related to setting values
  • The import coverage shown in the table below is as shown below. Those that are not described here cannot be imported. Import coverage Description Case A: The same machine Import to the same machine (for backup and restoration, etc.) Case B: The same model Import to a different machine of the same model (the same series) Case C: Different model Import to a different machine of a different model (a different series)

    Note:

    This list is the common list for this function. Therefore, this list may contain some items that are not supported by this function.
  • Technical Explanation (System)
  • 63

    Page 72

    ■ Service Mode Initial screen Large Middle Small Case A Case B Case C

    Copier

    Adjust

    Feed-Adj

    Adj-C1

    Yes
  • -
  • Copier

    Adjust

    Feed-Adj

    Adj-C2

    Yes
  • -
  • Copier

    Adjust

    Feed-Adj

    Adj-Mf

    Yes
  • -
  • Copier

    Adjust

    Feed-Adj

    Adj-Refe

    Yes
  • -
  • Copier

    Function

    Splman

    Spl14159

    Yes Yes Yes

    Copier

    Function

    Splman

    Spl65677

    Yes
  • -
  • Copier

    Function

    Splman

    Spl68676

    Yes
  • -
  • Copier

    Function

    Splman

    Spl68677

    Yes
  • -
  • Copier

    Function

    Splman

    Spl25607

    Yes
  • -
  • Copier

    Function

    Splman

    Spl93822

    Yes Yes Yes

    Copier

    Function

    Splman

    Spl78788

    Yes Yes Yes

    Copier

    Function

    Splman

    Spl71100*1

    Yes
  • -
  • Copier

    Function

    Splman

    Spl00171

    Yes Yes Yes

    Copier

    Function

    Splman

    Spl80100

    Yes Yes Yes

    Copier

    Function

    Splman

    Spl84194

    Yes Yes Yes

    Copier

    Function

    Install

    Erds

    Yes Yes Yes

    Copier

    Function

    Install

    Rgw-Port

    Yes Yes Yes

    Copier

    Option

    Body

    Mibcount

    Yes Yes Yes

    Copier

    Option

    Body

    Ns-Cmd5

    Yes
  • -
  • Copier

    Option

    Body

    Ns-Pln

    Yes
  • -
  • Copier

    Option

    Body

    Ns-Lgn

    Yes
  • -
  • Copier

    Option

    Body

    Slpmode

    Yes Yes Yes

    Copier

    Option

    Body

    Sdtm-Dsp

    Yes Yes Yes

    Copier

    Option

    Fnc-Sw

    Crg-Proc

    Yes Yes
  • Copier

  • Option

    Fnc-Sw

    Crglf-K

    Yes Yes
  • Copier

  • Option

    Dsply-Sw

    Crglw-Lv

    Yes Yes Yes

    Copier

    Option

    Img-Mcon

    Regm-Sel

    Yes
  • -
  • Copier

    Option

    User

    Scall-Sw

    Yes Yes Yes

    Copier

    Option

    User

    Smd-Expt

    Yes
  • -
  • Copier

    Option

    User

    Acc-Slp

    Yes Yes Yes

    Fax

    Sssw

    Sw01 *1

  • Yes
  • -
  • Fax

    Sssw

    Sw02 *1

  • Yes
  • -
  • Fax

    Sssw

    Sw03 *1

  • Yes
  • -
  • Fax

    Sssw

    Sw04 *1

  • Yes
  • -
  • Fax

    Sssw

    Sw05 *1

  • Yes
  • -
  • Fax

    Sssw

    Sw06 *1

  • Yes
  • -
  • Fax

    Sssw

    Sw07 *1

  • Yes
  • -
  • Fax

    Sssw

    Sw08 *1

  • Yes
  • -
  • Fax

    Sssw

    Sw09 *1

  • Yes
  • -
  • Fax

    Sssw

    Sw10 *1

  • Yes
  • -
  • Fax

    Sssw

    Sw11 *1

  • Yes
  • -
  • Fax

    Sssw

    Sw12 *1

  • Yes
  • -
  • Fax

    Sssw

    Sw13 *1

  • Yes
  • -
  • Fax

    Sssw

    Sw14 *1

  • Yes
  • -
  • Fax

    Sssw

    Sw15 *1

  • Yes
  • -
  • Fax

    Sssw

    Sw16 *1

  • Yes
  • -
  • Fax

    Sssw

    Sw17 *1

  • Yes
  • -
  • Fax

    Sssw

    Sw18 *1

  • Yes
  • -
  • Fax

    Sssw

    Sw19 *1

  • Yes
  • -
  • *1. FAX model only
  • Technical Explanation (System)
  • 64

    Page 73

    Initial screen Large Middle Small Case A Case B Case C

    Fax

    Sssw

    Sw20 *1

  • Yes
  • -
  • Fax

    Sssw

    Sw21 *1

  • Yes
  • -
  • Fax

    Sssw

    Sw22 *1

  • Yes
  • -
  • Fax

    Sssw

    Sw23 *1

  • Yes
  • -
  • Fax

    Sssw

    Sw24 *1

  • Yes
  • -
  • Fax

    Sssw

    Sw25 *1

  • Yes
  • -
  • Fax

    Sssw

    Sw26 *1

  • Yes
  • -
  • Fax

    Sssw

    Sw27 *1

  • Yes
  • -
  • Fax

    Sssw

    Sw28 *1

  • Yes
  • -
  • Fax

    Sssw

    Sw29 *1

  • Yes
  • -
  • Fax

    Sssw

    Sw30 *1

  • Yes
  • -
  • Fax

    Sssw

    Sw31 *1

  • Yes
  • -
  • Fax

    Sssw

    Sw32 *1

  • Yes
  • -
  • Fax

    Menu

    005 *1
  • Yes
  • -
  • Fax

    Menu

    006 *1
  • Yes
  • -
  • Fax

    Menu

    007 *1
  • Yes
  • -
  • Fax

    Menu

    008 *1
  • Yes
  • -
  • Fax

    Menu

    009 *1
  • Yes
  • -
  • Fax

    Menu

    010 *1
  • Yes
  • -
  • Fax

    Num

    002 *1
  • Yes
  • -
  • Fax

    Num

    003 *1
  • Yes
  • -
  • Fax

    Num

    004 *1
  • Yes
  • -
  • Fax

    Num

    005 *1
  • Yes
  • -
  • Fax

    Num

    006 *1
  • Yes
  • -
  • Fax

    Num

    008 *1
  • Yes
  • -
  • Fax

    Num

    010 *1
  • Yes
  • -
  • Fax

    Num

    011 *1
  • Yes
  • -
  • Fax

    Num

    012 *1
  • Yes
  • -
  • Fax

    Num

    013 *1
  • Yes
  • -
  • Fax

    Num

    015 *1
  • Yes
  • -
  • Fax

    Num

    016 *1
  • Yes
  • -
  • Fax

    Num

    017 *1
  • Yes
  • -
  • Fax

    Num

    018 *1
  • Yes
  • -
  • Fax

    Num

    019 *1
  • Yes
  • -
  • Fax

    Num

    020 *1
  • Yes
  • -
  • Fax

    Num

    021 *1
  • Yes
  • -
  • Fax

    Num

    022 *1
  • Yes
  • -
  • Fax

    Num

    023 *1
  • Yes
  • -
  • Fax

    Num

    024 *1
  • Yes
  • -
  • Fax

    Num

    025 *1
  • Yes
  • -
  • Fax

    Num

    026 *1
  • Yes
  • -
  • Fax

    Num

    027 *1
  • Yes
  • -
  • Fax

    Num

    029 *1
  • Yes
  • -
  • Fax

    Num

    049 *1
  • Yes
  • -
  • Fax

    Num

    051 *1
  • Yes
  • -
  • Fax

    Num

    053 *1
  • Yes
  • -
  • Fax

    Num

    054 *1
  • Yes
  • -
  • Fax

    Ncu

    Tone

    001 *1 Yes
  • -
  • *1. FAX model only
  • Technical Explanation (System)
  • 65

    Page 74

    Initial screen Large Middle Small Case A Case B Case C

    Fax

    Ncu

    Tone

    002 *1 Yes
  • -
  • Fax

    Ncu

    Pulse

    Form *1

    Yes
  • -
  • Fax

    Ncu

    Pulse

    001 *1 Yes
  • -
  • Fax

    Ncu

    Pulse

    002 *1 Yes
  • -
  • Fax

    Ncu

    Pulse

    003 *1 Yes
  • -
  • Fax

    Ncu

    Pulse

    004 *1 Yes
  • -
  • Fax

    Ncu

    Dialtone

    Bit *1

    Yes
  • -
  • Fax

    Ncu

    Dialtone

    001 *1 Yes
  • -
  • Fax

    Ncu

    Dialtone

    002 *1 Yes
  • -
  • Fax

    Ncu

    Dialtone

    003 *1 Yes
  • -
  • Fax

    Ncu

    Dialtone

    004 *1 Yes
  • -
  • Fax

    Ncu

    Dialtone

    005 *1 Yes
  • -
  • Fax

    Ncu

    Dialtone

    006 *1 Yes
  • -
  • Fax

    Ncu

    Dialtone

    007 *1 Yes
  • -
  • Fax

    Ncu

    Dialtone

    008 *1 Yes
  • -
  • Fax

    Ncu

    3rd DLTN

    Bit *1

    Yes
  • -
  • Fax

    Ncu

    4th DLTN 001 *1 Yes
  • -
  • Fax

    Ncu

    5th DLTN 002 *1 Yes
  • -
  • Fax

    Ncu

    6th DLTN 003 *1 Yes
  • -
  • Fax

    Ncu

    7th DLTN 004 *1 Yes
  • -
  • Fax

    Ncu

    8th DLTN 005 *1 Yes
  • -
  • Fax

    Ncu

    9th DLTN 006 *1 Yes
  • -
  • Fax

    Ncu

    10th DLTN 007 *1 Yes
  • -
  • Fax

    Ncu

    11th DLTN 008 *1 Yes
  • -
  • Fax

    Ncu

    Bustone1

    Bit *1

    Yes
  • -
  • Fax

    Ncu

    Bustone2

    001 *1 Yes
  • -
  • Fax

    Ncu

    Bustone3

    002 *1 Yes
  • -
  • Fax

    Ncu

    Bustone4

    003 *1 Yes
  • -
  • Fax

    Ncu

    Bustone5

    004 *1 Yes
  • -
  • Fax

    Ncu

    Bustone6

    005 *1 Yes
  • -
  • Fax

    Ncu

    Bustone7

    006 *1 Yes
  • -
  • Fax

    Ncu

    Bustone8

    007 *1 Yes
  • -
  • Fax

    Ncu

    Bustone9

    008 *1 Yes
  • -
  • Fax

    Ncu

    Bustone2

    Bit *1

    Yes
  • -
  • Fax

    Ncu

    Bustone3

    001 *1 Yes
  • -
  • Fax

    Ncu

    Bustone4

    002 *1 Yes
  • -
  • Fax

    Ncu

    Bustone5

    003 *1 Yes
  • -
  • Fax

    Ncu

    Bustone6

    004 *1 Yes
  • -
  • Fax

    Ncu

    Bustone7

    005 *1 Yes
  • -
  • Fax

    Ncu

    Bustone8

    006 *1 Yes
  • -
  • Fax

    Ncu

    Bustone9

    007 *1 Yes
  • -
  • Fax

    Ncu

    Bustone10

    008 *1 Yes
  • -
  • Fax

    Ncu

    Reordrtn

    Bit *1

    Yes
  • -
  • Fax

    Ncu

    Reordrtn

    001 *1 Yes
  • -
  • Fax

    Ncu

    Reordrtn

    002 *1 Yes
  • -
  • Fax

    Ncu

    Reordrtn

    003 *1 Yes
  • -
  • Fax

    Ncu

    Reordrtn

    004 *1 Yes
  • -
  • Fax

    Ncu

    Reordrtn

    005 *1 Yes
  • -
  • *1. FAX model only
  • Technical Explanation (System)
  • 66

    Page 75

    Initial screen Large Middle Small Case A Case B Case C

    Fax

    Ncu

    Reordrtn

    006 *1 Yes
  • -
  • Fax

    Ncu

    Reordrtn

    007 *1 Yes
  • -
  • Fax

    Ncu

    Reordrtn

    008 *1 Yes
  • -
  • Fax

    Ncu

    Auto Rx

    001 *1 Yes
  • -
  • Fax

    Ncu

    Auto Rx

    002 *1 Yes
  • -
  • Fax

    Ncu

    Auto Rx

    003 *1 Yes
  • -
  • Fax

    Ncu

    Auto Rx

    004 *1 Yes
  • -
  • Fax

    Ncu

    Auto Rx

    005 *1 Yes
  • -
  • Fax

    Ncu

    Auto Rx

    006 *1 Yes
  • -
  • Fax

    Ncu

    Auto Rx

    007 *1 Yes
  • -
  • Fax

    Ncu

    Auto Rx

    008 *1 Yes
  • -
  • Fax

    Ncu

    Auto Rx

    009 *1 Yes
  • -
  • Fax

    Ncu

    Cngdtct

    001 *1 Yes
  • -
  • Fax

    Ncu

    Cngdtct

    002 *1 Yes
  • -
  • Fax

    Ncu

    Cngdtct

    006 *1 Yes
  • -
  • Fax

    Ncu

    Cngdtct

    007 *1 Yes
  • -
  • Fax

    Ncu

    Cngdtct

    008 *1 Yes
  • -
  • Fax

    Ncu

    Cngdtct

    009 *1 Yes
  • -
  • Fax

    Ncu

    Cngdtct

    011 *1 Yes
  • -
  • Fax

    Ncu

    Cngdtct

    012 *1 Yes
  • -
  • Fax

    Ncu

    Specialb

    Sw01 *1

    Yes
  • -
  • Fax

    Ncu

    Specialb

    Sw02 *1

    Yes
  • -
  • Fax

    Ncu

    Specialb

    Sw03 *1

    Yes
  • -
  • Fax

    Ncu

    Specialb

    Sw04 *1

    Yes
  • -
  • Fax

    Ncu

    Specialb

    Sw05 *1

    Yes
  • -
  • Fax

    Ncu

    Specialb

    Sw06 *1

    Yes
  • -
  • Fax

    Ncu

    Specialb

    Sw07 *1

    Yes
  • -
  • Fax

    Ncu

    Specialb

    Sw08 *1

    Yes
  • -
  • Fax

    Ncu

    Specialb

    Sw09 *1

    Yes
  • -
  • Fax

    Ncu

    Specialb

    Sw10 *1

    Yes
  • -
  • Fax

    Ncu

    Specialb

    Sw11 *1

    Yes
  • -
  • Fax

    Ncu

    Specialb

    Sw12 *1

    Yes
  • -
  • Fax

    Ncu

    Specialb

    Sw13 *1

    Yes
  • -
  • Fax

    Ncu

    Specialb

    Sw14 *1

    Yes
  • -
  • Fax

    Ncu

    Specialb

    Sw15 *1

    Yes
  • -
  • Fax

    Ncu

    Specialb

    Sw16 *1

    Yes
  • -
  • Fax

    Ncu

    Specialb

    Sw17 *1

    Yes
  • -
  • Fax

    Ncu

    Specialb

    Sw18 *1

    Yes
  • -
  • Fax

    Ncu

    Specialb

    Sw19 *1

    Yes
  • -
  • Fax

    Ncu

    Specialb

    Sw20 *1

    Yes
  • -
  • Fax

    Ncu

    Specialb

    Sw21 *1

    Yes
  • -
  • Fax

    Ncu

    Specialb

    Sw22 *1

    Yes
  • -
  • Fax

    Ncu

    Specialb

    Sw23 *1

    Yes
  • -
  • Fax

    Ncu

    Specialb

    Sw24 *1

    Yes
  • -
  • Fax

    Ncu

    Specialb

    Sw25 *1

    Yes
  • -
  • Fax

    Ncu

    Specialb

    Sw26 *1

    Yes
  • -
  • Fax

    Ncu

    Specialb

    Sw27 *1

    Yes
  • -
  • Fax

    Ncu

    Specialb

    Sw28 *1

    Yes
  • -
  • *1. FAX model only
  • Technical Explanation (System)
  • 67

    Page 76

    Initial screen Large Middle Small Case A Case B Case C

    Fax

    Ncu

    Specialb

    Sw29 *1

    Yes
  • -
  • Fax

    Ncu

    Specialb

    Sw30 *1

    Yes
  • -
  • Fax

    Ncu

    Specialn

    004 *1 Yes
  • -
  • Fax

    Ncu

    Specialn

    005 *1 Yes
  • -
  • Fax

    Ncu

    Specialn

    006 *1 Yes
  • -
  • Fax

    Ncu

    Specialn

    007 *1 Yes
  • -
  • Fax

    Ncu

    Specialn

    008 *1 Yes
  • -
  • Fax

    Ncu

    Specialn

    009 *1 Yes
  • -
  • Fax

    Ncu

    Specialn

    011 *1 Yes
  • -
  • Fax

    Ncu

    Specialn

    012 *1 Yes
  • -
  • Fax

    Ncu

    Specialn

    013 *1 Yes
  • -
  • Fax

    Ncu

    Specialn

    014 *1 Yes
  • -
  • Fax

    Ncu

    Specialn

    015 *1 Yes
  • -
  • Fax

    Ncu

    Specialn

    016 *1 Yes
  • -
  • Fax

    Ncu

    Specialn

    017 *1 Yes
  • -
  • Fax

    Ncu

    Specialn

    019 *1 Yes
  • -
  • Fax

    Ncu

    Specialn

    020 *1 Yes
  • -
  • Fax

    Ncu

    Specialn

    024 *1 Yes
  • -
  • Fax

    Ncu

    Specialn

    025 *1 Yes
  • -
  • Fax

    Ncu

    Specialn

    026 *1 Yes
  • -
  • Fax

    Ncu

    Specialn

    027 *1 Yes
  • -
  • Fax

    Ncu

    Specialn

    030 *1 Yes
  • -
  • Fax

    Ncu

    Specialn

    040 *1 Yes
  • -
  • Fax

    Ncu

    Specialn

    041 *1 Yes
  • -
  • Fax

    Ncu

    Specialn

    042 *1 Yes
  • -
  • Fax

    Ncu

    Specialn

    044 *1 Yes
  • -
  • Fax

    Ncu

    Specialn

    045 *1 Yes
  • -
  • Fax

    Ncu

    Specialn

    046 *1 Yes
  • -
  • Fax

    Ncu

    Specialn

    047 *1 Yes
  • -
  • Fax

    Ncu

    Specialn

    048 *1 Yes
  • -
  • Fax

    Ncu

    Specialn

    065 *1 Yes
  • -
  • Fax

    Ncu

    Specialn

    066 *1 Yes
  • -
  • Fax

    Ncu

    Rkey

    001 *1 Yes
  • -
  • Fax

    Ncu

    Rkey

    002 *1 Yes
  • -
  • Fax

    Ncu

    Pbxdialt

    Bit *1

    Yes
  • -
  • Fax

    Ncu

    Pbxdialt

    001 *1 Yes
  • -
  • Fax

    Ncu

    Pbxdialt

    002 *1 Yes
  • -
  • Fax

    Ncu

    Pbxdialt

    003 *1 Yes
  • -
  • Fax

    Ncu

    Pbxdialt

    004 *1 Yes
  • -
  • Fax

    Ncu

    Pbxdialt

    005 *1 Yes
  • -
  • Fax

    Ncu

    Pbxdialt

    006 *1 Yes
  • -
  • Fax

    Ncu

    Pbxdialt

    007 *1 Yes
  • -
  • Fax

    Ncu

    Pbxdialt

    008 *1 Yes
  • -
  • Fax

    Ncu

    Pbxbusyt

    Bit *1

    Yes
  • -
  • Fax

    Ncu

    Pbxbusyt

    001 *1 Yes
  • -
  • Fax

    Ncu

    Pbxbusyt

    002 *1 Yes
  • -
  • Fax

    Ncu

    Pbxbusyt

    003 *1 Yes
  • -
  • Fax

    Ncu

    Pbxbusyt

    004 *1 Yes
  • -
  • *1. FAX model only
  • Technical Explanation (System)
  • 68

    Page 77

    Initial screen Large Middle Small Case A Case B Case C

    Fax

    Ncu

    Pbxbusyt

    005 *1 Yes
  • -
  • Fax

    Ncu

    Pbxbusyt

    006 *1 Yes
  • -
  • Fax

    Ncu

    Pbxbusyt

    007 *1 Yes
  • -
  • Fax

    Ncu

    Pbxbusyt

    008 *1 Yes
  • -
  • ■ [Setting/Registration] menu ● System Management Settings System Management Settings User mode setting items Setting description Case A Case B Case

    C

    System Manager Information Settings

    System Manager ID Up to 7 digits Yes Yes Yes

    System Manager PIN Set (7 digits) Yes Yes Yes

    System Manager Name 32 characters Yes Yes Yes

    Contact Information 32 characters Yes Yes Yes

    E-mail Address 64 characters Yes Yes Yes

    System Manager Comment 32 characters Yes Yes Yes Device Information Settings

    Device Name 32 characters; Model name is displayed as an initial value Yes

    Location 32 characters Yes

    Support Link 128 characters Yes Yes Yes Information for Purchasing Consumables

    Purchase From 32 characters Yes Yes Yes

    E-mail Address 64 characters Yes Yes Yes

    Url

    256 characters Yes Yes Yes

    Display Consumables Purchase Button On/Off Yes Yes Yes

    Toner Status Settings

    Use Toner Status On/Off Yes Yes Yes

    Display Consumables Purchase Button On/Off Yes Yes Yes Department ID Management The * marks in [Setting description] indicates the default setting values. User mode setting items Setting description Case

    A

    Case B Case C Department ID Management (not displayed for models with- out N/W) Off*/On Yes Yes Yes Register New Department (can be set from remote UI) Yes Yes Yes

    Department ID Up to 7 digits Yes Yes Yes

    Set PIN 7 digits Yes Yes Yes

    Restrict Functions

    Black & White Copy Off*/On Yes Yes Yes

    Black & White Print Off*/On Yes Yes Yes

    Scan Off*/On Yes Yes Yes

    Fax Off*/On Yes Yes Yes

    Allow Printer Jobs with Unknown IDs (can be set from remote UI) Allow*/Reject Yes Yes Yes

    Allow Scan Jobs W/ Unknown IDs (can be set from re- mote UI) Allow*/Reject Yes Yes Yes *1. FAX model only

  • Technical Explanation (System)
  • 69

    Page 78

    Network Settings The * marks in [Setting description] indicates the default setting values. User mode setting items Setting description Case A Case

    B

    Case C TCP/IP settings

    IPv4 Settings

    Auto Acquire Off/On* Yes Yes Yes

    AutoIP Off/On* Yes Yes Yes

    Select Protocol

    Dhcp*/Bootp/Rarp/Off

    Yes Yes Yes

    IP Address IP address 0.0.0.0* Yes

    Subnet Mask IP address 0.0.0.0* Yes Yes Yes

    Gateway Address IP address 0.0.0.0* Yes Yes Yes

    DNS Settings

    Primary DNS Server Enter the server address Yes Yes Yes

    Secondary DNS Server Enter the server address Yes Yes Yes

    Yes

    Host Name Enter the host name Yes

    Domain Name Enter the domain name Yes

    DNS Dynamic Update Settings Yes Yes Yes

    DNS Dynamic Update Off*/On Yes Yes Yes

    DNS Dynamic Update Interval 0 to 48 hr. (*24 hr.) Yes Yes Yes

    mDNS Settings

    mDNS Settings Off/On* Yes

    mDNS Name mDNS name entryt Yes

    DHCP Option Settings

    Acquire Host Name (option12) Off/On* Yes Yes Yes

    DNS Dynamic Update (option81) Off*/On Yes Yes Yes

    Acquire DNS Server Address (option6) Off/On* Yes Yes Yes

    Acquire Domain Name (option15) Off/On* Yes Yes Yes

    Acquire WINS Server Address (op- tion44) Off/On* Yes Yes Yes

    Acquire SMTP Server Address (op- tion69) Off*/On Yes Yes Yes

    Acquire POP3 Server Address (op- tion70) Off*/On Yes Yes Yes

    IPv6 Settings

    Use IPv6

    Use IPv6 Off*/On The Link-Local Address is displayed Yes Yes Yes

    Stateless Address Settings

    Use Stateless Address Off/On* The Stateless Address and the Prefix Length are displayed (max 6 addresses) Yes Yes Yes

    Manual Address Settings

    Use Manual Address Off*/On Yes

    Manual Address IP address entry screen Yes

    Prefix Length (0 to *64 to 128) Yes

    Default Router Address Router address entry screen Yes

    Use DHCPv6

    Use DHCPv6 Off*/OnThe Stateful Address and the Prefix Length are displayed. Yes Yes Yes

    DNS Settings

    DNS Server Settings Yes Yes Yes

    Primary DNS Server Enter the server address Yes Yes Yes

    Secondary DNS Server Enter the server address Yes Yes Yes

    DNS Host Name/Domain Name Settings Yes

    Use Same Host Name/Domain Name as IPv4 Off/On* Yes

  • Technical Explanation (System)
  • 70

    Page 79

    User mode setting items Setting description Case A Case

    B

    Case C

    Host Name Enter the host name Yes

    Domain Name Enter the domain name Yes

    DNS Dynamic Update Settings Yes Yes Yes

    DNS Dynamic Update Off*/On Yes Yes Yes

    Register Manual Address Off*/On Yes Yes Yes

    Register Stateful Address Off*/On Yes Yes Yes

    Register Stateless Address Off*/On Yes Yes Yes

    DNS Dynamic Update Interval 0 to 48 hr. (*24 hr.) Yes Yes Yes

    mDNS Settings

    mDNS Settings Off/On* Yes

    Use Same mDNS Name as IPv4 Off/On* Yes

    mDNS Name Enter the mDNS name Yes

    DHCPv6 Option Settings

    Acquire DNS Server Address (option23) Off/On* Yes Yes Yes

    Acquire Domain Name (option24) Off/On* Yes Yes Yes

    WINS Settings

    WINS Resolution Off*/On Yes Yes Yes

    WINS Server Address WINS server's IP address (only in the case of WINS resolution) Initial value: 0.0.0.0 Yes Yes Yes

    LPD Settings

    LPD Print Settings Off/On* Yes Yes Yes

    Period Before Timeout 1 to 60 (*5) Yes Yes Yes

    RAW Settings

    RAW Print Settings Off/On* Yes Yes Yes

    Period Before Timeout 1 to 60 (*5) Yes Yes Yes

    RAW Settings

    WSD Print Settings

    Use WSD Print Off/On* Yes Yes Yes

    Use WSD Browsing Off/On* Yes Yes Yes

    WSD Scan Settings

    Use WSD Scan Off*/On Yes Yes Yes

    Use Computer Scan Off*/On Yes Yes Yes

    Use Multicast Discovery Off/On* Yes Yes Yes

    Use FTP PASV Mode Off*/On Yes Yes Yes

    Use HTTP Off/On* Yes Yes Yes

    Port Number Settings

    Lpd

    1 to 65535 ( *515 ) Yes Yes Yes

    Raw

    1 to 65535 ( *9100 ) Yes Yes Yes

    Http

    1 to 65535 ( *80 ) Yes Yes Yes

    Pop3

    1 to 65535 ( *110 ) Yes Yes Yes

    Ftp

    1 to 65535 ( *21 ) Yes Yes Yes

    Smtp

    1 to 65535 ( *25 ) Yes Yes Yes

    Snmp

    1 to 65535 ( *161 ) Yes Yes Yes

    WSD Multicast Discovery 1 to 65535 ( *3702 ) Yes Yes Yes

    Multicast Discovery 1 to 65535 ( *427 ) Yes Yes Yes

    MTU Size 1300/1400/*1500 Yes Yes Yes

    IPP Print Settings

    Use IPP Printing Off/On* Yes Yes Yes

    Use TLS Off*/On Yes Yes Yes

    Network Link Scan Settings

    Use Network Link Scan Off/On* Yes Yes Yes

    SNTP Settings

    Use SNTP Off*/On Yes Yes Yes

  • Technical Explanation (System)
  • 71

    Page 80

    User mode setting items Setting description Case A Case

    B

    Case C

    Polling Interval 1 to 48 ( *24 ) Yes Yes Yes

    NTP Server Address (up to 255 characters) *NULL Yes Yes Yes

    Multicast Discovery Settings

    Respond to Discovery Off/On* Yes Yes Yes

    Scope Name (up to 32 characters) *default Yes Yes Yes

    Sleep Mode Notification Settings

    Sleep Mode Notification Off/On* Yes Yes Yes

    Port Number 1 to 65535 ( *11427 ) Yes Yes Yes

    Number of Routers to Traverse 0 to 254 ( *3 ) Yes Yes Yes

    Notification Interval 60 to 65535 ( *600 ) Yes Yes Yes Proxy Settings

    Use Proxy Off*/On Yes Yes Yes

    HTTP Proxy Server Address IP address or character strings (max. 128 bytes+ Null) Yes Yes Yes

    HTTP Proxy Server Port Number 1 to 65535 80* Yes Yes Yes

    Use Proxy within Same Domain Off*/On Yes Yes Yes

    Use Proxy Authentication Off*/On Yes Yes Yes

    User Name (up to 24characters) Yes Yes Yes

    Password (up to 24characters) Yes Yes Yes E-Mail/I-Fax Settings

    SMTP Server Enter the server address Yes Yes Yes

    E-mail Address Enter an e-mail address (max. 120 bytes) Yes Yes Yes

    POP Server Enter the server address Yes Yes Yes

    User Name Enter a user name Yes Yes Yes

    Password Enter a password Yes Yes Yes

    Pop Rx

    Off*/On Yes Yes Yes

    Pop Interval

  • up to 99 (0=Off)
  • Yes Yes Yes

    Authentication/Encryption Settings

    Use POP Auth. Before Sending Off*/On Yes Yes Yes

    Apop

    Off*/On Yes Yes Yes

    SMTP Authentication Off*/On Yes Yes Yes

    User Name Enter a user name Yes Yes Yes

    Allow TLS (SMTP) Off*/On Yes Yes Yes

    Verify Certificate On/Off* Yes Yes Yes

    Verify CN On/Off* Yes Yes Yes

    Allow TLS (POP) Off*/On Yes Yes Yes

    Verify Certificate On/Off* Yes Yes Yes

    Verify CN On/Off* Yes Yes Yes SMB Settings

    NetBIOS Name NetBIOS name of own machine (15 bytes) Yes

    Workgroup Name Workgroup name (15 bytes) to which the user be- longs Yes

    SNMP Settings

    SNMPv1 Settings

    Use SNMPv1 Settings Off/On* Yes Yes Yes

    Use Community Name 1 Off/On* Yes Yes Yes

    Community Name 1 Character strings; Public* Yes Yes Yes

    Use Community Name 2 Off*/On Yes Yes Yes

    Community Name 2 Character strings Yes Yes Yes

    MIB Access Permission 1 Read Only*/Read/Write Yes Yes Yes

    MIB Access Permission 2 Read Only*/Read/Write Yes Yes Yes

    Use Dedicated Community Off/On* Yes Yes Yes

    Dedicated Community Settings RW/RO*/Off; The value of DB: RW (0x00)/ RO(0x01)/Off(0x02) Yes Yes Yes

  • Technical Explanation (System)
  • 72

    Page 81

    User mode setting items Setting description Case A Case

    B

    Case C

    SNMPv3 Settings

    Use SNMPv3 Settings Off*/On Yes Yes Yes

    Context Settings

    Acquire Printer Management Information from Host Off*/On Yes Yes Yes AirPrint Settings

    Use AirPrint Off/On* Yes Yes Yes

    Printer Name Enter the mDNS name Yes

    Location 32 characters Yes

    Latitude N*/S, 0* to 90°, 0* to 59′, 0* to 59.999″ Yes

    Longitude E*/W, 0* to 180°, 0* to 59′, 0* to 59.999″ Yes

    Mopria Settings

    Use Mopria Off/On* Yes Yes Yes Dedicated Port Settings

    Dedicated Port Settings Off/On* Yes Yes Yes Waiting Time for Connection at Startup (0 to 300) sec *0 sec (NCA) Yes Yes Yes Ethernet Driver Settings

    Auto Detect Off/On* Yes Yes Yes

    Communication Mode Half Duplex*/Full Duplex Yes Yes Yes

    Ethernet Type 10 Base-T*/100 Base-TX /1000 Base-T Yes Yes Yes Wireless LAN Settings

    Wireless LAN Manual Settings

    SSID Settings

    SSID Manual Settings Character strings (ASCII: 1 to 32 characters) Yes Yes Yes

    Securety Settings

    Security WPA/WPA2 PSK*/WEP/None Yes Yes Yes

    WPA/WPA2 PSK Settings

    WPA/WPA2 Encryption Method Auto (AES-CCMP or TKIP) */ AES-CCMP Yes Yes Yes

    Entry Format ASCII (8 to 63 characters)/ Hex number (64 digits) Yes Yes Yes

    Wpa/Wpa2 Psk

    Character strings (ASCII: 8 to 63 characters, Hex number: 64 digits) Yes Yes Yes

    WE Settings

    WEP Key Length 40bit WEP key* / 104bit WEP key Yes Yes Yes

    Entry Format 40-bit ASCII (5 characters)/104-bit ASCII (13 char- acters)/40-bit hex number (10 digits)//104-bit hex number (26 digits) Yes Yes Yes

    WEP Key 1 Character strings (ASCII: 5 characters/13 charac- ters, Hex number: 10 digits/26 digits) Yes Yes Yes

    WEP Key 2 Character strings (ASCII: 5 characters/13 charac- ters, Hex number: 10 digits/26 digits) Yes Yes Yes

    WEP Key 3 Character strings (ASCII: 5 characters/13 charac- ters, Hex number: 10 digits/26 digits) Yes Yes Yes

    WEP Key 4 Character strings (ASCII: 5 characters/13 charac- ters, Hex number: 10 digits/26 digits) Yes Yes Yes

    Select WEP Key 1 to 4 (*1) Yes Yes Yes

    802.11 Authentication Open System*/Shared Key Yes Yes Yes

    Power Save Mode

    Power Save Mode On/Off* Yes Yes Yes

    Select Wired/Wireless LAN

    Select Wired/Wireless LAN Wired LAN*/Wireless LAN Yes Yes Yes

    Settings for Device Settings Management

    Use Device Settings Management On*/Off Yes Yes Yes

  • Technical Explanation (System)
  • 73

    Page 82

    Security Settings The * marks in [Setting description] indicates the default setting values. User mode setting items Setting description Case

    A

    Case

    B

    Case C IPv4 Address Filter

    Outbound Filter

    Use Filter Off*/On Yes Yes Yes

    Default Policy Reject/Allow* Yes Yes Yes

    Exception Addresses Up to 16 send exception IPv4 addresses Yes Yes Yes

    Inbound Filter

    Use Filter Off*/On Yes Yes Yes

    Default Policy Reject/Allow* Yes Yes Yes

    Exception Addresses Up to 16 send exception IPv4 addresses Yes Yes Yes IPv6 Address Filter

    Outbound Filter

    Use Filter Off*/On Yes Yes Yes

    Default Policy Reject/Allow* Yes Yes Yes

    Exception Addresses Up to 16 send exception IPv6 addresses Yes Yes Yes

    Inbound Filter

    Use Filter Off*/On Yes Yes Yes

    Default Policy Reject/Allow* Yes Yes Yes

    Exception Addresses Up to 16 send exception IPv6 addresses Yes Yes Yes MAC Address Filter

    Outbound Filter

    Use Filter Off*/On Yes Yes Yes

    Default Policy Reject/Allow* Yes Yes Yes

    Exception Addresses Up to 32 MAC addresses Yes Yes Yes

    Inbound Filter

    Use Filter Off*/On Yes Yes Yes

    Default Policy Reject/Allow* Yes Yes Yes

    Exception Addresses Up to 32 MAC addresses Yes Yes Yes Restrict TX Function The * marks in [Setting description] indicates the default setting values. User mode setting items Setting description Case A Case B Case C Address Book PIN 7 digits Yes Yes Yes Restrict New Destinations Off*/On Yes Yes Yes Restrict Sending from Log Off*/On Yes Yes Yes One-Touch/Coded Dial TX Confirmation Off*/On Yes Yes Yes Register LDAP Server The * marks in [Setting description] indicates the default setting values. User mode setting items Setting description Case A Case B Case C Register New LDAP Server (For Search)

    Server Name Character strings (UTF-8 in 24 characters, max. 96 bytes) Yes Yes Yes

    Server Address IP address or character strings (47 bytes) Yes Yes Yes

    Position to Start Search Specify the part of the tree of the directory server where search is started (120bytes) Yes Yes Yes

    Port Number The communication port number of LDAP used by the LDAP server (1 to 65535); Initial value: 389 Yes Yes Yes

    Search Timeout Response time from the LDAP server (30 to 300 sec); Initial val- ue: 60 Yes Yes Yes

    Login Information Do Not Use*/Use/Use (Security Authentication) Yes Yes Yes

  • Technical Explanation (System)
  • 74

    Page 83

    User mode setting items Setting description Case A Case B Case C

    User Name User name that can be authenticated for LADP server (120 bytes) Yes Yes Yes

    Domain Name 120byte Yes Yes Yes

    Display Authentication Screen When Searching On/Off* Yes Yes Yes

    Use Auth. Info. at Send Start On*/Off Yes Yes Yes Register New LDAP Server (For Authentication)

    Server Name Character strings (UTF-8 in 24 characters, max. 96 bytes) Yes Yes Yes

    Server Address IP address or character strings (47 bytes) Yes Yes Yes

    Position to Start Search Specify the part of the tree of the directory server where search is started (120bytes). Yes Yes Yes

    Port Number The communication port number of LDAP used by the LDAP server (1 to 65535); Initial value: 389 Yes Yes Yes

    Auth/Attrib Acquisition Timeout Response time from the LDAP server (15 to 150 sec); Initial val- ue: 30 Yes Yes Yes

    User Name Attribute Attribute name used to obtain the user name from the authenti- cation server (64 bytes) Yes Yes Yes

    E-Mail Address Attribute Attribute name used to obtain the e-mail address from the au- thentication server (64 bytes) Yes Yes Yes

    Login Information Use*/Use (Security Authentication) Yes Yes Yes

    Use System Manager ID On/Off* Yes Yes Yes

    User Name name that can be authenticated for LADP server (120 bytes) Yes Yes Yes

    Domain Name 120byte Yes Yes Yes Authentication Settings for Send Function The * marks in [Setting description] indicates the default setting values. User mode setting items Setting description Case A Case B Case C Display Authentication Screen When Sending Operation Starts On/Off* Yes Yes Yes

    Display Confirmation Screen When Logging Out On/Off* Yes Yes Yes

    E-Mail/I-Fax Sending Settings

    E-Mail/I-Fax Sending: Do Not Allow/Allow*/Only Allow Sending to Myself Yes Yes Yes

    Authentication Method Display the authentication screen using the same user name as when the sending operation started/Display the authentica- tion screen without any authentication in- formation/Use device-specific authenti- cation information and do not display the authentication screen* Yes Yes Yes

    Specify Authentication User Destination as Sender On*/Off Yes Yes Yes

    File Sending Settings

    File Sending Do Not Allow/Allow*/Only Allow Sending to Myself or Specified Folder Yes Yes Yes

    When Sending File to Destination Registered in Address Book

    Authentication Method Display the authentication screen using the same authentication information as when the sending operation started/ Display the authentication screen without any authentication information/Use the authentication information from the ad- dress book and do not display the au- thentication screen* Yes Yes Yes

    When Sending File to Myself

    Authentication Method Use Same Authentication Information as When Send Operation Started/Display the authentication screen without any au- thentication information Yes Yes Yes

  • Technical Explanation (System)
  • 75

    Page 84

    User mode setting items Setting description Case A Case B Case C

    Display Authentication Screen On/Off* Yes Yes Yes

    Specify Destination Folder On/Off* Yes Yes Yes

    Host Name 120byte Yes Yes Yes

    Folder Path 120byte Yes Yes Yes

    Add User Name On*/Off Yes Yes Yes

    Fax Sending Settings

    Fax Sending Do Not Allow/Allow* Yes Yes Yes Others The * marks in [Setting description] indicates the default setting values. User mode setting items Setting description Case A Case B Case C Display Job Log

    (Display Job Log) Off/On* Yes Yes Yes USB Device Settings

    (Use as USB Device) Off/On* Yes Yes Yes Memory Media Settings

    (Store to Memory Media) Off*/On Off/On* Yes Yes Yes Memory Media PrintF

    (Memory Media Print) Off*/On Off/On* Yes Yes Yes Enable Product Extended Survey Program

    ( Use Product Extended Survey Program ) Off/On* Yes Yes Yes Canon Mobile Scanning

    ( Canon Mobile Scanning) Off/On* Yes Yes Yes Notify to Check Paper Settings

    (Notify to Check Paper Settings) Off/On* Yes Yes Yes Secure Print Settings

    Secure Print Off/On* Yes Yes Yes

    Secure Print Deletion Time 10 to 240 min (Default: 30 min) Yes Yes Yes PDL Selection (Plug and Play)

    Usb

  • Yes
  • Yes

    ● Other than System Management Settings Preferences The * marks in [Setting description] indicates the initial setting values. User mode setting items Setting description Case

    A

    Case

    B

    Case C Sound Volume Control

    Fax Tone Off/On* (1-3) 1* Yes Yes Yes

    Ring Tone Off/On* (1-3) 1* Yes Yes Yes

    TX Done Tone Off/On* (1-3) 1* /Only When Error Occurs (1-3) 1* Yes Yes Yes

    RX Done Tone Off/On* (1-3) 1* /Only When Error Occurs (1-3) 1* Yes Yes Yes

    Scanning Done Tone Off/On* (1-3) 1* /Only When Error Occurs (1-3) 1* Yes Yes Yes

    Entry Tone Off/On* Yes Yes Yes

    Invalid Entry Tone Off*/On Yes Yes Yes

    Restock Supplies Tone Off*/On Yes Yes Yes

    Warning Tone Off/On* Yes Yes Yes

    Job Done Tone Off/On* Yes Yes Yes

    Energy Saver Alert Off*/On Yes Yes Yes

    Original in Feeder Detection Tone Off/On* Yes Yes Yes Display Settings

  • Technical Explanation (System)
  • 76

    Page 85

    User mode setting items Setting description Case

    A

    Case

    B

    Case C

    Default Screen after Startup/Restora- tion Home*1 /Copy*2 / Scan / Fax / Memory Media Print / Status Monitor/ Cancel Yes Yes Yes

    Language Select the display language Yes Yes Yes

    Remote UI Language Select the display language Yes Yes Yes

    Brightness -4 to 0* Yes Yes Yes

    Invert Screen Colors Off*/On Yes Yes Yes

    Millimeter/Inch Entry Millimeter*/Inch (* Inch: Only when the country/region is set to USA) Yes Yes Yes

    Gram/Pound Switch Gram/Pound* Yes Yes Yes

    Message Display Time 1-5 2* Yes Yes Yes

    Scrolling Speed Slow/Standard*/Fast Yes Yes Yes

    Cursor Movement Auto*/Manual Yes Yes Yes English Keyboard Layout USA Layout/UK Layout Yes Yes Yes Timer Settings The * marks in [Setting description] indicates the initial setting values. User mode setting items Setting description Case

    A

    Case

    B

    Case

    C

    Date/Time Settings Time zone

    Date Format

    "Mm/Dd/Yyyy","Dd/Mm Yyyy","Yyyy Mm/Dd"

    Yes Yes Yes

    Time Format 12 Hour (AM/PM) / 24 Hour Yes Yes Yes

    Time Zone UTC-12:00 to UTC+14:00+City name Yes Yes

    Daylight Saving Time Off*/On, When On: Start, End Yes Yes Yes

    Start Month/Week/Day Yes Yes Yes

    End Month/Week/Day Yes Yes Yes Auto Sleep Time xxx to xxx min Default: xxx Yes Yes Yes Auto Reset Time 0=None, 1...2*...9 min. (1-minute increment) Yes Yes Yes Function After Auto Reset Default Function*/Selected Function Yes Yes Yes Auto Offline Time 0=None, 1 to 60 min. (1-minute increment) Default: 5 Yes Yes Yes Auto Shutdown Time 0=None, 1 to 8 hours (1-hour increment) Default: 4 (Europe), 0 (Other than Europe) Yes Yes Yes Common Settings The * marks in [Setting description] indicates the initial setting values. User mode setting items Setting description Case A Case

    B

    Case C Paper Drawer Auto Selection Copy/Printer/RX or Fax/Other (Multi-Purpose Tray:*Off/On + Each Cassette:*Off/On)

    Copy

    Multi-purpose Tray Off*/On Yes Yes Yes

    Drawer 1 Off/On* Yes Yes Yes

    Drawer 2 Off/On* Yes Yes Yes

    Printer

    Drawer 1 Off/On* Yes Yes Yes

    Drawer 2 Off/On* Yes Yes Yes

    Fax/Receive (Fax for Fax-only models, Receive for others)

    Multi-purpose Tray Off*/On Yes Yes Yes

    Drawer 1 Off/On* Yes Yes Yes

    Drawer 2 Off/On* Yes Yes Yes

    Other

    Multi-purpose Tray Off*/On Yes Yes Yes

    Drawer 1 Off/On* Yes Yes Yes *1. Not displayed on models without Touch Panel. *2. Default of models without Touch Panel.

  • Technical Explanation (System)
  • 77

    Page 86

    User mode setting items Setting description Case A Case

    B

    Case C

    Drawer 2 Off/On* Yes Yes Yes Switch Paper Feed Method

    Multi-purpose Tray Speed Priority*/Print Side Priority Yes Yes

    Drawer 1 Speed Priority*/Print Side Priority Yes Yes

    Drawer 2 Speed Priority*/Print Side Priority Yes Yes

    Copy Settings User mode setting items Setting description Case A Case B Case C Change Default Settings Register Yes Yes

    Fax Settings The * marks in [Setting description] indicates the initial setting values. User mode setting items Setting description Case A Case B Case C Basic Settings

    Unit Telephone Number

    Telephone number Max. 20 digits Yes Yes

    Select Line Type Auto/Manual* Yes Yes Yes

    Manual 120V, 230V: Tone*/Pulse(10PPS); 100V: Dial 20 PPS/ Dial 10 PPS/Tone* Yes Yes Yes

    Off-Hook Alarm Off*/On (1-3) Yes Yes Yes

    Communication Management Settings

    TX Start Speed 33600*/14400/9600/7200/4800/2400 bps Yes Yes Yes

    RX Start Speed 33600*/14400/9600/7200/4800/2400 bps Yes Yes Yes

    R-Key Setting

    Pstn*/Pbx

    Yes Yes Yes

    Pbx

    Hooking/Prefix

    Yes Yes Yes

    Prefix Code > Prefix Code Yes Yes Yes TX Function Settings

    Change Default Settings Register Yes Yes Yes

    2-Sided Original Off*/On Yes Yes Yes

    Resolution standard*/fine/photo/sfine/ufine Yes Yes Yes

    Density -4 to +4(0*) Yes Yes Yes

    Sharpness -3 to +3(0*) Yes Yes Yes

    Register Unit Name (Fax) Enter the unit name Yes Yes Yes

    Ecm Tx

    Off/On* Yes Yes Yes

    Set Pause Time 1 to 15(sec)/4 to 11(sec)/3 to 6(sec) (2*) Yes Yes Yes

    Auto Redial Off/On* Yes Yes Yes

    Number of Times to Redial

    1-N

    Yes Yes Yes

    Redial Interval (min) 2-99(2*) Yes Yes Yes

    Redial When Err Occurs Off/On* Yes Yes Yes

    Add TX Terminal ID Off/On* Yes Yes Yes

    Print Position Inside Image Area/Outside Image Area* Yes Yes Yes

    Mark Number as: TEL/FAX

    Fax*/Tel

    Yes Yes Yes

    Check Dial Tone Before Sending Off*/On Yes Yes Yes

    Allow Fax Driver TX Off*/On Yes Yes Yes

    Confirm Entered Fax Number Off*/On Yes Yes Yes

    Restrict Sequential Broadcast Confirm Sequential Broadcast/Reject Sequential Broad- cast/Off* Yes Yes Yes RX Function Settings

    Ecm Rx

    Off/On* Yes Yes Yes

    Use Incoming Ring Off/On* Yes Yes Yes

    Number of Rings 1 to N times *2 times Yes Yes Yes

    Remote RX Off/On* Yes Yes Yes

  • Technical Explanation (System)
  • 78

    Page 87

    User mode setting items Setting description Case A Case B Case C

    Remote RX ID (Remote RX ID: 00 to 99, 25*) Yes Yes Yes

    Switch to Auto RX Off*/On Yes Yes Yes

    Ring Time Until Auto RX 1 to 99 sec *15 sec Yes Yes Yes

    Memory Lock Setting

    Pin

    Register a PIN (7 digits) Yes Yes Yes

    Use Memory Lock Off*/On Yes Yes Yes

    Print Report Off/On* Yes Yes Yes

    Specify Memory Lock Time On/Off* Yes Yes Yes

    Memory Lock Start Time (hr.) Set the time Yes Yes Yes

    Memory Lock Start Time (min.) Set the time Yes Yes Yes

    Memory Lock End Time (hr.) Set the time Yes Yes Yes

    Memory Lock End Time (min.) Set the time Yes Yes Yes RX Print Settings

    Print on Both Sides Off*/On Yes Yes Yes

    Reduce RX Size Off/On* Yes Yes Yes

    Reduction Mode Auto*/Fixed Yes Yes Yes

    Reduction Ratio 97/95/90*/75(%) Yes Yes Yes

    Reduction Direction Vertical/Horizontal / Vertical Only* Yes Yes Yes

    Add RX Page Footer Off*/On Yes Yes Yes

    Use K-Paper Off*/On Yes Yes Yes

    Continue Printing When Amount in Car- tridge Is Low Off/On Yes Yes Yes Forwarding Settings

    Print Images Off / Only When Error Occurs / On* Yes Yes Yes

    Store Images in Memory Do Not Store* / Only When Error Occurs Yes Yes Yes Scan Settings The * marks in [Setting description] indicates the initial setting values. User mode setting items Setting description Case A Case B Case C USB Memory Settings

    Change Default Settings Register Yes Yes Yes

    Scan Size Refer to the list of supported paper sizes Yes Yes Yes

    Color Mode Color*/Black & White Yes Yes Yes

    File Format PDF (Compact)/PDF*/PDF (Compact/OCR)/PDF

    (Ocr)/Jpeg/Tiff

    Yes Yes Yes

    Encrypted PDF None*/Acrobat7.0 or later/Acrobat9.0 or equivalent/Acro- bat10.0 or equivalent Yes Yes Yes

    Digital Signatures None*/OK Yes Yes Yes

    Density -4 to +4(0*) Yes Yes Yes

    Original Orientation Portrait*/Landscape Yes Yes Yes

    Original Type Text/ Text/Photo* / Photo Yes Yes Yes

    2-Sided Original Off*/On Yes Yes Yes

    Sharpness -3 to +3(0*) Yes Yes Yes

    Data Size Memory Priority/Standard*/Image Quality Priority Yes Yes Yes E-mail Settings

    Register Default Settings Register Yes Yes Yes

    Scan Size Refer to the list of supported paper sizes Yes Yes Yes

    Color Mode Color*/Black & White Yes Yes Yes

    File Format PDF (Compact)/PDF*/PDF (Compact/OCR)/PDF

    (Ocr)/Jpeg/Tiff

    Yes Yes Yes

    Encrypted PDF None*/Acrobat7.0 or later/Acrobat9.0 or equivalent/Acro- bat10.0 or equivalent Yes Yes Yes

    Digital Signatures None*/OK Yes Yes Yes

    Density -4 to +4(0*) Yes Yes Yes

  • Technical Explanation (System)
  • 79

    Page 88

    User mode setting items Setting description Case A Case B Case C

    Original Orientation Portrait*/Landscape Yes Yes Yes

    Original Type Text/ Text/Photo* / Photo Yes Yes Yes

    2-Sided Original Off*/On Yes Yes Yes

    Sharpness -3 to +3(0*) Yes Yes Yes

    Data size Memory Priority/Standard*/Image Quality Priority Yes Yes Yes

    Subject Enter the subject Yes Yes Yes

    Message Enter the message Yes Yes Yes

    Reply-to Specify from Address Book... Yes Yes Yes

    Priority Low/Standard*/High Yes Yes Yes I-Fax Settings

    TX Function Settings

    Change Default Settings Register Yes Yes Yes

    Scan Size Refer to the list of supported paper sizes Yes Yes Yes

    Density -4 to +4(0*) Yes Yes Yes

    Original Type Text*/ Text/Photo / Photo Yes Yes Yes

    2-Sided Original Off*/On Yes Yes Yes

    Sharpness -3 to +3(0*) Yes Yes Yes

    Subject Enter the subject Yes Yes Yes

    Message Enter the message Yes Yes Yes

    Reply-to Specify from Address Book... Yes Yes Yes

    Add TX Terminal ID Off/On* Yes Yes Yes

    Print Position Inside Image Area/Outside Image Area* Yes Yes Yes

    RX Print Settings

    Print on Both Sides Off*/On Yes Yes Yes

    RX Print Size Refer to the list of supported paper sizes. Default: AB configuration=>A4, AB/Inch configuration=>A4, Inch configuration=>LTR Yes Yes Yes

    Continue Printing When Amount in Cartridge Is Low Off*/No Yes Yes Yes File Settings

    Change/Register Default Settings

    File Register Yes Yes Yes

    Scan Size Refer to the list of supported paper sizes Yes Yes Yes

    Color Mode Color*/Black & White Yes Yes Yes

    File Format PDF (Compact)/PDF*/PDF (Compact/OCR)/PDF

    (Ocr)/Jpeg/Tiff

    Yes Yes Yes

    Encrypted PDF None*/Acrobat7.0 or later/Acrobat9.0 or equivalent/Acro- bat10.0 or equivalent Yes Yes Yes

    Digital Signatures None*/OK Yes Yes Yes

    Density -4 to +4(0*) Yes Yes Yes

    Original Orientation Portrait*/Landscape Yes Yes Yes

    Original Type Text/ Text/Photo* / Photo Yes Yes Yes

    2-Sided Original Off*/On Yes Yes Yes

    Sharpness -3 to +3(0*) Yes Yes Yes

    Data size Memory Priority/Standard*/Image Quality Priority Yes Yes Yes Common Settings

    Unit Name (E-Mail/I-Fax) Enter the unit name Yes Yes Yes Output File Image Settings

    YCbCr Tx Gamma Value γ1.0/γ1.4/γ1.8*/γ2.2 Yes Yes

    OCR (Text Searchable) Settings

    Smart Scan Off/On* Yes Yes

  • Technical Explanation (System)
  • 80

    Page 89

    Memory Media Print Settings The * marks in [Setting description] indicates the initial setting values. User mode setting items Setting description Case A Case B Case C Change Default Settings Register Yes Yes Yes File Sort Default Settings Name (Ascending)*/Name (Descending), Date/Time (Ascend- ing) / Date/Time (Descending) Yes Yes Yes File Name Display Format Short File Name/Long File Name* Yes Yes Yes Default Display Settings Details*/Images Yes Yes Yes Printer Settings The * marks in [Setting description] indicates the initial setting values. User mode setting items Setting description Case A Case B Case C Custom Settings

    Prioritize Driver Settings When Printing Yes Yes Yes

    Multi-purpose Tray *Off/On Yes Yes Yes

    *Force Output/Display Error (displayed only when set to On) Yes Yes Yes

    Drawer 1 *Off/On Yes Yes Yes

    *Force Output/Display Error (displayed only when set to On) Yes Yes Yes

    Drawer 2 *Off/On Yes Yes Yes

    *Force Output/Display Error (displayed only when set to On) Yes Yes Yes

    Drawer 3 *Off/On Yes Yes Yes

    *Force Output/Display Error (displayed only when set to On) Yes Yes Yes

    Copies 1* to 99 Yes Yes Yes

    2-Sided Printing Off*/On Yes Yes Yes

    Paper

    Yes Yes

    Default Paper Size

  • Yes
  • Yes

    Default Paper Type

  • Yes
  • Yes

    Paper Size Over- ride Off*/On Yes Yes Yes

    Print Quality Yes Yes Yes

    Density -8 to +8 0* Yes Yes Yes

    Fine Adjust High: -8 to +8 0* Yes Yes Yes

    Medium: -8 to +8 0* Yes Yes Yes

    Low: -8 to +8 0* Yes Yes Yes

    Toner Save Off*/On Yes Yes Yes

    Resolution 600dpi*/1200dpi Yes Yes Yes

    Barcode Ad- justment Mode Off*/Mode 1/Mode 2/Mode 3 Yes Yes Yes

    Layout

    Binding Loca- tion Long Edge*/Short Edge Yes Yes Yes

    Gutter mm/in; For mm:-50.0 to 50.0, Default: 0, in 0.5-mm increment; For inch: -1.90 to 1.90, Default: 0, in 0.01-inch increment Yes Yes Yes

    Offset Short Edge (Front) mm/in; For mm:-50.0 to 50.0, Default: 0, in 0.5-mm increment; For inch: -2.00 to 2.00, Default: 0, in 0.01-inch increment Yes Yes Yes

    Offset Long Edge (Front) Same as above Yes Yes Yes

    Offset Short Edge (Back) Same as above Yes Yes Yes

    Offset Long Edge (Back) Same as above Yes Yes Yes

    Auto Error Skip Off*/On Yes Yes Yes

    Timeout Timeout (Timeout: 5 to 300 sec) 15* Yes Yes Yes

  • Technical Explanation (System)
  • 81

    Page 90

    User mode setting items Setting description Case A Case B Case C

    Personality *Auto/PS/PCL/PDF/XPS Yes Yes Yes LIPSLX or UFRII

    Halftones

    Text ColorResolution*/GradationBWResolution*/Color Tone/Gradation/High Resolution Yes Yes Yes

    Graphics ColorResolution/Gradation*BWResolution/Color Tone*/Gradation/High Resolution Yes Yes Yes

    Image ColorResolution/Gradation*BWResolution/Color Tone*/Gradation/High Resolution Yes Yes Yes

    Pcl

    Paper Save Off*/On Yes Yes Yes

    Orientation Vertical*/Portrait Yes Yes Yes

    Font Number 0 to max. number of fonts Yes Yes Yes

    Point Size Point : 4 to 999.75, Default: 12, in 0.25 increment; The value multiplied by 100 is retained as an internal value Yes Yes Yes

    Pitch cpi : 0.44 to 99.99, Default: 10, in 0.01 increment; The value multiplied by 100 is retained as an internal value Yes Yes Yes

    Form Lines Line: 5 to 128, Default: 60 (US), 64 (other than US) Yes Yes Yes

    Character Code Default PC8 Yes Yes Yes

    Set Custom Paper Off*/On Yes Yes Yes

    Unit of Measure For countries other than US: Millimeters*/Inch; For US; Millimeters/Inch* Yes Yes Yes

    X dimension

  • Yes
  • Yes Yes

    Y dimension

  • Yes
  • Yes Yes

    Append CR to LF Yes/No* Yes Yes Yes

    Enlarge A4 Print Width Off*/On Yes Yes Yes

    Halftones

    Text Color:Resolution*/GradationBW:Resolution*/Color Tone/Gradation/High Resolution Yes Yes Yes

    Graphics Color:Resolution/Gradation*BW:Resolution/Color Tone*/Gradation/High Resolution Yes Yes Yes

    Image Color:Resolution/Gradation*BW:Resolution/Color Tone*/Gradation/High Resolution Yes Yes Yes

    BarDIMM Disable*/Enable Yes Yes Yes

    FreeScape Off, ~, ", #, $, /, \, ?, {, }, | Initial value~ Yes Yes Yes

    Ps

    Job timeout 0 to 3600[sec], Default: 0[sec] Yes Yes Yes

    Print PS Error On/Off* Yes Yes Yes

    Halftones

    Text Color:Resolution*/GradationBW:Resolution*/Gradation/High Resolution Yes Yes Yes

    Graphics Color:Resolution/Gradation*BW:Resolution*/Gradation/High Resolution Yes Yes Yes

    Image Color:Resolution/Gradation*BW:Resolution*/Gradation/High Resolution Yes Yes Yes

    Grayscale Con- version sRGB/NTSC*/Uniform RGB Yes Yes Yes

    Pdf

    Enlarge/Reduce to Fit Size On/*Off Yes Yes Yes

    Enlarge Print Area On/*Off Yes Yes Yes

    N on 1 *Off/2 on 1/4 on 1/6 on 1/8 on 1/9 on 1/16 on 1 Yes Yes Yes

    Comment Print Off/Auto* Yes Yes Yes

    Halftones

    Text Color:Resolution*/GradationBW:Resolution*/Gradatio/High Resolution Yes Yes Yes

    Graphics Color:Resolution/Gradation*BW:Resolution*/Gradatio/High Resolution Yes Yes Yes

    Image Color:Resolution/Gradation*BW:Resolution*/Gradatio/High Resolution Yes Yes Yes

  • Technical Explanation (System)
  • 82

    Page 91

    User mode setting items Setting description Case A Case B Case C

    Grayscale Con- version sRGB/NTSC*/Uniform RGB Yes Yes Yes

    Xps

    Halftones

    Text Color:Resolution*/GradationBW:Resolution*/Gradatio/High Resolution Yes Yes Yes

    Graphics Color:Resolution/Gradation*BW:Resolution*/Gradatio/High Resolution Yes Yes Yes

    Image Color:Resolution/Gradation*BW:Resolution*/Gradatio/High Resolution Yes Yes Yes

    Grayscale Conversion

    Text sRGB/NTSC*/Uniform RGB Yes Yes Yes

    Graphics sRGB/NTSC*/Uniform RGB Yes Yes Yes

    Image sRGB/NTSC*/Uniform RGB Yes Yes Yes

    Compressed Im- age Output Output*/Display Error Yes Yes Yes Imaging

    Halftones Error Diffusion/Gradation* Yes Yes Yes Adjustment/Maintenance The * marks in [Setting description] indicates the initial setting values. User mode setting items Setting description Case A Case B Case C Printer Density -4 to +4 0* Yes Yes

    Toner Saver Mode Off*/On Yes Yes

    Display Timing for Cartridge Preparation

    Auto

    Yes Yes

    Custom 1%-99%, *20% Yes Yes

    Special Processing

    Special Mode A Off/MODE1*/MODE2/MODE3/MODE4 Yes Yes

    Special Mode U Off*/On Yes Yes

    Special Mode V Off*/MODE1/MODE2 Yes Yes

    Special Mode Z Off/MODE1*/MODE2/MODE3 Yes Yes

    Special Mode B Off*/MODE1/MODE2/MODE3 Yes Yes

    Special Mode C Off*/On Yes Yes

    Special Mode D Off*/On Yes Yes

    Special Mode G Off*/On Yes Yes

    Report Output Displayed when Report key is pressed. Not displayed in the Settings/Registration menu. The * marks in [Setting description] indicates the initial setting values. User mode setting items Setting description Case A Case B Case C Output Report Settings

    Fax TX Result Report Off / On / Only When Error Occurs* Yes Yes

    TX Image Report Off/On* Yes Yes

    E-Mail/I-Fax/File TX Result Report Off / On / Only When Error Occurs* Yes Yes

    Communication Management Report

    Auto Print After 40 Transmis- sions Off/On* Yes Yes

    Separate TX/RX Off*/On Yes Yes

    RX Result Report Off* / On / Only When Error Occurs Yes Yes

    ● Common settings User mode setting items Case A Case B Case C Paper Settings

    Multi-purpose Tray

  • Technical Explanation (System)
  • 83

    Page 92

    User mode setting items Case A Case B Case C

    Specify When Loading Paper Yes Yes

    Paper Size Yes Yes

    Paper Type Yes Yes

    Drawer 1

    Paper Size Yes Yes

    Paper Type Yes Yes

    Drawer 2

    Paper Size Yes Yes

    Paper Type Yes Yes

    Register Custom Paper Yes Yes

    Select Frequently Used Paper Sizes

    Multi-purpose Tray Yes Yes

    Drawer 1 Yes Yes

    Drawer 2 Yes Yes

    Address Book Settings (Model with FAX and/or SEND)

    One-touch Dial

    Fax Yes Yes Yes

    Fax Number Yes Yes Yes

    Name Yes Yes Yes

    Set Details Yes Yes Yes

    Long Distance Yes Yes Yes

    TX Speed Yes Yes Yes

    Ecm Tx

    Yes Yes Yes

    E-mail

    E-mail Address Yes Yes Yes

    Name Yes Yes Yes

    File: SMB

    Host Name Yes Yes Yes

    Name Yes Yes Yes

    Folder Path Yes Yes Yes

    User Name Yes Yes Yes

    Password Yes Yes Yes

    File: FTP

    Host Name Yes Yes Yes

    Name Yes Yes Yes

    Folder Path Yes Yes Yes

    User Name Yes Yes Yes

    Password Yes Yes Yes

    I-Fax

    I-Fax Address Yes Yes Yes

    Name Yes Yes Yes

  • Technical Explanation (System)
  • 84

    Page 93

    Monitoring Function (e-Maintenance/imageWARE Remote) Overview of System ■ Function Overview E-RDS (Embedded RDS) is a monitoring program that runs on the host machine. When the monitoring option is enabled by making the setting on this machine, information such as the status change of the machine, counter information, and failure information are collected. The collected device information is sent to a remote maintenance server called UGW (Universal Gateway Server) via Internet. The information to be monitored is:

  • Billing counter
  • Parts counter
  • ROM version
  • Service call error log
  • Jam log
  • Alarm log
  • Change of status (such as status of consumables)
  • Since the information shown above is customer information, HTTPS/ SOAP protocol is used for communication between the UGW server and the host machine to improve security. 㻲㼕㼞㼑㼣㼍㼘㼘

    Ugw

    Internet DNS Server This machine Proxy Server Administrator Customer Environment Sales Company ■ Features E-RDS is embedded in the network module of the device, and the front-end module of the e-Maintenance/ imageWARE Remote system is realized without requiring hardware besides the device. ■ Main Functions Functional cat- egory Sub category Description Communication Test Test By executing the following service mode, E-RDS communicates with UGW, retrieves schedule information, and establish communication.

    Copier > Function > Install > Com-Test

    Transmission of counters Billing/all resources/parts/ mode-by-mode counters E-RDS Periodically send billing/all resources/parts/mode-by-mode counters to the server. Transmission of event logs Service call/alarm/jam log Each time a service call, alarm, or jam log occurs, the error log is sent to the server. Having alarm log or not is different by a model. Data transmis- sion ROM version / Device configu- ration E-RDS periodically sends the firmware information of the device to UGW. E-RDS sends the device configuration information only when there is any change in the configuration. E-RDS Debug information Debug information of E-RDS are stored in E-RDS, and they are sent to UGW only when they exceed a specific size. Repair request E-RDS sends error information (image failure, jams or others) according to the in- struction of the user. Debug log transmission When E-RDS catches the debug log transmission of a message designation than UGW, send data such as device Debug logs and DCON logs to the server.
  • Technical Explanation (System)
  • 85

    Page 94

    Functional cat- egory Sub category Description Operation in- struction Operation check E-RDS contacts UGW to check if there is processing to be executed next, and re- ceives the following instructions if any.

  • Linkage with CDS
  • Debug log transmission
  • Servicing Notes
  • After clearing the Main Controller PCB, initialization of the E-RDS setting (ERDS-DAT) and a communication test (COM-
  • TEST) need to be performed. If this work is omitted, an error may occur when counters are sent to UGW. After replacing the Main Controller PCB, all the settings need to be reconfigured.
  • Do not change the values of the following service modes unless otherwise instructed.
  • If they are changed, it will ends with a communication error with UGW.
  • Port number of UGW
  • Copier > Function > Install > Rgw-Port

    Default: 443
  • If the e-Maintenance/imageWARE Remote contract of the device becomes invalid, be sure to turn OFF the E-RDS setting
  • (E-Rds: 0).

  • When the E-RDS function is enabled, a communication test can be performed from [Check Counter] of the Control Panel of
  • the host machine. *1 When conducting a communication test from [Check Counter], pay attention to the following points:
  • During a communication test, do not take any actions such as pressing a key. Actions are not accepted until the
  • communication test is completed (actions are ignored).
  • When a communication test is being conducted from service mode or from [Check Counter], do not conduct a
  • communication test from the other. This operation is not guaranteed. Setting Procedure ■ Preparation Since this function communicates with the UGW server, it is necessary to connect to the external network. Check the following items, and make the settings if not yet set.
  • IP address settings
  • DNS server settings
  • Proxy server settings*2
  • Installation of CA certificate (arbitrary *3 )
  • Caution:

  • Obtain the information on the network environment from the system administrator of the user.
  • When having changed the network settings, turn OF and then ON the main power of the machine.
  • *1. The user can perform a communication test or browse the result of communication test. Monitoring Service Communication Test Check Counter Check Device Configuration

    Monitr. Serv. Do you want to perform a communication test ? Yes

    No If the communication results in failure, an error code (hexadecimal number, 8 digit) is displayed on the Control Panel. *2. If authentication is necessary, make the settings of the authentication information as well. *3. When using a certificate other than those pre-installed in the device

  • Technical Explanation (System)
  • 86

    Page 95

    ■ Procedure for Setting E-RDS

  • In the following service mode, select the following service mode to initialize the E-RDS setting values:
  • • Copier > Function > Clear > Erds-Dat

    Note:

    This operation initializes the E-RDS settings to factory setting values. For the setting values to be initialized, see the section of“Setting values and data to be initialized” on page 87 .
  • Enable the E-RDS function in the following service mode, and perform a communication test.
  • Select the following item:
  • • Copier > Function > Install > Erds

  • Enter [1] from the keyboard, and press [Apply].
  • Caution:

    The following settings i.e. RGW-PORT in Service mode must not be change unless there are specific instructions to do so. Changing these values will cause error in communication with UGW. When the E-RDS function is enabled, the function to communicate with UGW is enabled.
  • Select [COM-TEST] and then touch [Yes].
  • If the communication is successful, "OK" is displayed. If "NG" is displayed, check the network settings and USW server address (URL).

    Caution:

    The communication results with UGW can be distinguished by referring to the COM-LOG. By performing the communication test with UGW, E-RDS acquires schedule information and starts monitoring and meter reads operation. Maintenance ■ Initializing E-RDS settings It is possible to clear the FLASH data of E-RDS and change the E-RDS setting back to the default value. ● Initialization procedure Follow the procedure shown below to initialize E-RDS.
  • Enter service mode as a system administrator user.
  • Select the following service mode, and press [OK] to execute.
  • COPIER > Function > CLEAR > ERDS-DAT
  • ● Setting values and data to be initialized The following E-RDS settings, internal data, and Alarm filtering information are initialized.

    • Copier > Function > Install > Erds

    • Copier > Function > Install > Rgw-Port

    • Copier > Function > Install > Com-Log

    Caution:

    If a certificate other than the CA certificate at the time of shipment has been installed, initializing the E-RDS setting will not change the settings back to those at the time of shipment. To change the certificate back to the CA certificate at the time of shipment, delete the certificate (install the CA certificate at the time of shipment) after initializing the E-RDS settings. ■ Report Output of Communication Error Log (COM-LOG) A report of communication error log information on five affairs can be output.
  • Technical Explanation (System)
  • 87

    Page 96

    ● Report output procedure

  • Select the following service mode, and press [Yes].
  • • Copier > Function > Misc-P > Erds-Log

    12/09 2015 10:14Am

    ********

    * E-Rds-Com-Log*

    ******** No.01

    Date

    12/09 2015

    Time 03:21 Am

    Code 05000003

    Information SUSPEND: Communication test is not performed. No.02

    Date

    12/09 2015

    Time 03:21 Am

    Code 00000000

    Information SUSPEND: mode changed. No.03

    Date

    12/09 2015

    Time 03:18 Am

    Code 05000003

    Information SUSPEND: Communication test is not performed. No.04

    Date

    12/09 2015

    Time 03:18 Am

    Code 00000000

    Information SUSPEND: mode changed. No.05

    Date

    12/09 2015

    Time 01:56 Am

    Code 05000003

    Information SUSPEND: Communication test is not performed. Output sample Error Message List Error information displayed on the communication error log detail screen is shown below. (The "server" described here means UGW.) Code Character strings Cause Remedy 0000 0000 SUSPEND: mode changed. Operation mode mismatch Execute initialization of the E-RDS settings

    (Erds-Dat).

    0500 0003 SUSPEND: Communication test is not performed. E-RDS was enabled, but the main power of the device was turned OFF and then ON without performing a communication test. Perform and complete a communication test

    (Com-Test).

    0xxx 0003 Server schedule is not exist The schedule does not exist. Perform and complete a communication test

    (Com-Test).

    0xxx 0003 Communication test is not per- formed Communication test has not been comple- ted. Perform and complete a communication test

    (Com-Test).

    84xx 0003 E-RDS switch is setted OFF E-RDS is not enabled. Set the value of the E-RDS setting (E-RDS) to 1, and perform a communication test

    (Com-Test).

    8600 0002 8600 0003 8600 0101 8600 0201 8600 0305 8600 0306 8600 0401 8600 0403 8600 0414 8600 0415 Event Registration is Failed Processing in the device (event processing) failed. Turn OFF and then ON the power of the de- vice. If the error occurs again after turning OFF and then ON the power, replace the system software of the device (version up- grade).
  • Technical Explanation (System)
  • 88

    Page 97

    Code Character strings Cause Remedy 8700 0306 SRAM version unmatch! An invalid value has been entered at the beginning of the NVMEM area of E-RDS (nonvolatile memory area). Turn OFF and then ON the power of the de- vice. 8700 0306 SRAM AeRDS version unmatch! An invalid value has been entered at the beginning of the NVMEM area of E-RDS (nonvolatile memory area). Turn OFF and then ON the power of the de- vice. 8xxx 0004 Operation is not supported The user tried to execute a method which is not supported by E-RDS. Collect Debug log and contact the Support Dept. of the sales company. 8xxx 0101 Server response error ( NULL ) UGW reply error: Processing of the UGW error code failed. Perform and complete a communication test

    (Com-Test).

    8xxx 0201 8xxx 0202 8xxx 0203 8xxx 0204 8xxx 0206 Server schedule is invalid The schedule specified by UGW is invalid. Report the detailed information at the time of occurrence of the error to the Support Dept. Perform a remedy on the UGW side, and then perform a communication test again. 8xxx 0207 8xxx 0208 Internal Schedule is broken The internal schedule of E-RDS is invalid. Perform and complete a communication test

    (Com-Test).

    8xxx 0221 Server specified list is too big The information the UGW server instructed to send for the alert code/alarm code filter function is invalid. There is a problem with the alarm filter set for UGW. Contact the Support Dept. of the sales company. 8xxx 0222 Server specified list is wrong The information the UGW server instructed to send for the alert code/alarm code filter function is invalid. There is a problem with the alarm filter set for UGW. Contact the Support Dept. of the sales company. 8xxx 0304 Device is busy, try later A semaphore consumption error occurred during a communication test. Wait for a while and then perform a commu- nication test again. 8xxx 0709 Tracking ID is not match When the firmware is updated, the tracking ID in the reply of Updater differs from that specified by UGW. Collect Debug log and send it to the Support Dept. of the sales company. 8xxx 2000 Unknown error Other communication errors Perform and complete a communication test

    (Com-Test).

    8xxx 2003 Network is not ready, try later After the main power of the device is turned OFF and then ON, a communication test was performed with the network not ready. Check the connection status of the network. Perform a communication test (COM-TEST) 60 seconds after turning ON the power of the device. 8xxx 2004 Server response error ([hexadec- imal]) [detailed error information on the server side] UGW reply error: Communication to UGW has succeeded, but an error occurred and UGW returned an error. Wait for a while and then try again. Check the error code (in hex notation) and the details of the error (detailed error information on the server side) from UGW displayed after the message. 8xxx 200A Server connection error UGW connection error:
  • TCP/IP communication failed.
  • The IP address of the device has not
  • been set.
  • Check the connection status of the net-
  • work.
  • If proxy is used, configure the proxy set-
  • tings and check the status of the proxy server. 8xxx 200B Server address resolution error UGW address resolution error
  • Check that Internet connection is avail-
  • able in the environment. 8xxx 2014 Proxy connection error The address is invalid and connection to the proxy server fails. Check the address/port of the proxy server, and configure the settings again. 8xxx 2015 Proxy address resolution error Proxy address name resolution error
  • Check the host name and the DNS set-
  • tings of the proxy server.
  • Set the proxy server using the IP ad-
  • dress. 8xxx 201E Proxy authentication error Proxy authentication error Check the user name and password for log- ging in to the proxy, and configure the set- tings again.
  • Technical Explanation (System)
  • 89

    Page 98

    Code Character strings Cause Remedy 8xxx 2028 Server certificate error

  • The root certificate for the server has
  • not been registered on the device.
  • The user has used another certificate
  • and the correct certificate file has not been registered.
  • The date and time of the device is cor-
  • rect.
  • Install the latest device system software
  • (upgrade the version).
  • Set the correct date and time on the de-
  • vice.
  • Execute CLEAR > CA-KEY, and turn
  • OFF and then ON the power of the de- vice (automatic installation of the CA certificate at the time of shipment). 8xxx 2046 Server certificate expired
  • The root certificate registered on the
  • device has expired.
  • The root certificate registered by the
  • user at first is used and the correct cer- tificate has not been registered.
  • The date of the device is outside the
  • validity period. Set the correct date and time on the device. If the date and time set on the device is cor- rect, upgrade the version to the latest sys- tem. 8xxx 2047 Server response time out UGW reply time-out If this occurs during a communication test, wait for a while and then perform a commu- nication test (COM-TEST) again. 8xxx 2058 Unknown error SOAP Client failed to obtain SOAPRes- ponse. It may be caused by a problem on the server side or a temporary problem in network load, etc. Perform and complete a communication test

    (Com-Test).

    8xxx 2063 SOAP Fault SOAP error (SOAP Fault) Check that the value of the port number of UGW (RGW- PORT) is 443. xxxx xxxx Device internal error Device internal error Turn OFF and then ON the power of the de- vice. Or, replace the system software of the device (version upgrade). xxxx xxxx SUSPEND: Initialize Failure! Internal error at startup of E-RDS Turn OFF and then ON the power of the de- vice.
  • Technical Explanation (System)
  • 90

    Page 99

    Periodical Service 4 Periodically Replaced Parts................ 92 Consumable Parts...............................93 Periodical Service............................... 94 Cleaning..............................................95

    Page 100

    Periodically Replaced Parts No periodically replaced parts is set for this product.

  • Periodical Service
  • 92

    Page 101

    Consumable Parts Parts name Product No. Q'ty Interval Remarks ADF Separation Pad

    Fc7-6297

    1 50,000 sheets

    ADF Separation Roller

    Fl2-6637

    1 50,000 sheets

  • Periodical Service
  • 93

    Page 102

    Periodical Service No periodically service is set for this product.

  • Periodical Service
  • 94

    Page 103

    Cleaning Component Cleaning method Scanning Area Clean with Oil Glass Cleaner (FY9-6020) and lint-free paper. Copy board glass Wipe With a Lint-free Cloth. Cassette Pickup Roller Transfer Guide Unit Media Feed Belt And Media Feed Guide Unit Fixing Inlet Guide

  • Periodical Service
  • 95

    Page 104

    Parts Replacement and Cleaning 5 External Cover.................................... 97 Main Unit...........................................100 Electrical Components Layout Drawing......................................... 101 Connector Layout Drawing............... 105 External Cover.................................. 110 Document Exposure / Delivery System...........................................118 Controller System..............................127 Laser Scanner System......................144 Image Forming System.....................145 Fixing System....................................147 Pickup / Feed System....................... 149

    Page 105

    External Cover MF416dw/ MF415dw/ MF414dw/ MF412dn/ MF411dw

    Hand

    Set

    [1] [3] [4] [5] [6] [11] [12] [9] [7] [13] [14] [15] [16] [18] [17] [19] [20] [21] [22] [8] [2] [10] Key Name Remarks Reference [1]

    Dadf

    “Removing the ADF Unit + Reader Unit” on page 118 [2] Document Feeder Tray

    [3] Document Delivery Tray

    [4] Control Panel

    “Removing the Control Panel” on page 133 [5] Right Cover Unit

    “Removing the Right Cover Unit” on page 112 [6] MP Pickup Tray

    [7] Upper Cover

    “Removing the Upper Cover” on page 116 [8] USB Port 1

    [9] Reader Unit

    “Removing the ADF Unit + Reader Unit” on page 118 [10] Front Cover

    “Removing the Front Cover Unit” on page 114 [11] Main Power Switch

    [12] Paper Cassette

    [13] USB Port 2

    [14] Ethernet Port

    [15] Left Cover Unit

    “Removing the Left Cover Unit” on page 110 [16] Handset Terminal

    [17] External Telephone Terminal

    [18] Telephone Line Terminal

    [19] Left Rear Cover

    “Removing the Left Rear Cover” on page 111 [20] Power Socket

  • Parts Replacement and Cleaning
  • 97

    Page 106

    Key Name Remarks Reference [21] Rear Lower Cover

    [22] Rear Upper Cover

    D1550/ D1520

    [1] [3] [4] [5] [6] [11] [12] [9] [10] [7] [13] [14] [15] [17] [16] [18] [19] [20] [21] [8] [2] Key Name Remarks Reference [1]

    Dadf

    “Removing the ADF Unit + Reader Unit” on page 118 [2] Document Feeder Tray

    [3] Document Delivery Tray

    [4] Control Panel

    “Removing the Control Panel” on page 133 [5] Right Cover Unit

    “Removing the Right Cover Unit” on page 112 [6] MP Pickup Tray

    [7] Upper Cover

    “Removing the Upper Cover” on page 116 [8] USB Port 1

    [9] Reader Unit

    “Removing the ADF Unit + Reader Unit” on page 118 [10] Front Cover

    “Removing the Front Cover Unit” on page 114 [11] Main Power Switch

    [12] Paper Cassette

    [13] USB Port 2

    [14] Ethernet Port

    [15] Left Cover Unit

    “Removing the Left Cover Unit” on page 110 [16] External Telephone Terminal *1

    [17] Telephone Line Terminal *1

    [18] Left Rear Cover

    “Removing the Left Rear Cover” on page 111 [19] Power Socket

    [20] Rear Lower Cover

  • Parts Replacement and Cleaning
  • 98

    Page 107

    Key Name Remarks Reference [21] Rear Upper Cover

    *1: D1550

  • Parts Replacement and Cleaning
  • 99

    Page 108

    Main Unit [3] [4] [1] [2] [5] [6] [7] [8] [9] [10] [11] Key Name Remarks Reference [1] DADF Unit

    “Removing the ADF Unit + Reader Unit” on page 118 [2] Reader Unit

    “Removing the ADF Unit + Reader Unit” on page 118 [3] Fixing Assembly

    “Fixing System” on page 147 [4] Laser Scanner Unit

    “Removing the Laser Scanner Unit” on page 144 [5] Registration Unit

    “Removing the Registration Unit” on page 145 [6] Duplex Drive Unit

    “Removing the Duplex Drive Unit” on page 140 [7] Main Drive Unit

    “Removing the Main Drive Unit ” on page 138 [8] Duplex Feed Unit

    “Removing the Duplex Feed Unit” on page 149 [9] Contact Image Sensor

    “Removing the CIS Unit” on page 125 [10] ADF Pickup Feed Unit

    “Removing the ADF Pickup Feed Unit” on page 122 [11] Control Panel

    “Removing the Control Panel” on page 133

  • Parts Replacement and Cleaning
  • 100

    Page 109

    Electrical Components Layout Drawing Sensor

    Ps201

    Ps206

    Ps205

    Ps204

    Ps202

    Ps203

    Ps915

    Ps1

    Ps2

    Ps3

    Tag

    Symbol Name Remarks Reference

    Ps1

    CIS HP Sensor

    Ps2

    Document End Sensor

    Ps3

    Document Sensor

    Ps201

    Duplex Reverse Sensor

    Ps202

    MP Tray Media Presence Sensor

    Ps203

    Cassette Media Presence Sensor

    Ps204

    Top Sensor

    Ps205

    Media Width Sensor

    Ps206

    FD Tray Media Full Sensor

    Ps915

    Fixing Delivery Sensor

    Tag

    Cartridge Sensor

  • Parts Replacement and Cleaning
  • 101

    Page 110

    Motor/Fan

    Fm3

    M1

    Fm1/Fm2

    M2

    M3

    M4

    Symbol Name Remarks Reference

    Fm2

    Main Fan

    “Removing the Main Fan” on page 136

    Fm3

    Controller Fan

    M1

    Main Motor

    “Removing the Main Motor ” on page 135

    M2

    Laser Scanner Motor

    M3

    Reader Motor

    M4

    ADF Motor

    “Removing the ADF Pickup Motor Unit” on page 123

  • Parts Replacement and Cleaning
  • 102

    Page 111

    Other

    Sl1

    Sl2

    Sl3

    Sw2

    Sw1/Sw11

    Sp1

    Sl4

    Th1

    H1

    Tp1

    Symbol Name Remarks Reference

    Sl1

    Cassette Pickup Sorenoid

    “Removing the Cassette Pickup Solenoid” on page 142

    Sl2

    Duplex Reverse Sorenoid

    “Removing the Duplex Reverse Solenoid” on page 141

    Sl3

    MP Tray Pickup Sorenoid

    Sl4

    ADF Delivery Sorenoid

    “Removing the ADF Delivery Sol- enoid Unit” on page 124

    Sp1

    Speaker Other than D1520/ MF411dw

    H1

    Heater

    Th1

    Thermistor

    Tp1

    Thermoswitch

    Sw1

    Main Switch Other than EUR

    Sw11

    Main Switch Only for EUR

    Sw2

    Door Switch

  • Parts Replacement and Cleaning
  • 103

    Page 112

    Pcb

    Unit2

    Unit3

    Unit4

    Unit5

    Unit17

    Unit16

    Unit21

    Unit6

    Unit19

    Unit18

    Unit14

    Unit22

    Symbol Name Remarks Reference

    Unit2

    Engine Controller PCB

    “Removing the Engine Controller Unit ” on page 131

    Unit3

    High Voltage Power Supply PCB

    Unit4

    Low Voltage Power Supply PCB

    Unit5

    Connecting PCB

    Unit6

    Laser Driver PCB

    Unit14

    Main Controller PCB

    “Removing the Main Controller PCB” on page 127

    Unit16

    Control Panel PCB

    “Removing the Control Panel PCB” on page 134

    Unit17

    Nfc Pcb

    D1550/ MF416dw/ MF415dw “Removing the NFC PCB (D1550/ MF416dw/ MF415dw)” on page 135

    Unit18

    Ncu Pcb

    Other than D1520/ MF411dw “Removing the NCU PCB (Except for D1520/ MF411dw)” on page 128

    Unit19

    OFF Hook PCB Other than D1520/ MF411dw “Removing the OFF Hook PCB (except for D1520/ MF411dw) ” on page 129

    Unit21

    Usb Pcb

    Unit22

    Wireless LAN PCB Other than D1520/ MF411dw “Removing the Wireless LAN PCB (except for D1520/ MF412dn)” on page 127
  • Parts Replacement and Cleaning
  • 104

    Page 113

    Connector Layout Drawing

    J1312

    J1302

    J1303

    J1310

    J1301

    J16

    J1502

    J1501

    J910

    J911

    J928

    J902

    J904

    J927

    J926

    J903 J923

    J1501

    J972

    J801

    J802

    J1103

    J No. Symbol Name Relay Con- nector J No. Symbol Name Remarks

    J926

    Unit14

    Main Controller PCB

    J1301

    M4

    ADF Motor

    J926

    Unit14

    Main Controller PCB

    J1303

    J1303

    Sl4

    ADF Delivery Sorenoid

    J926

    Unit14

    Main Controller PCB

    J1310

    J1312

    Ps2

    Document End Sensor

    J926

    Unit14

    Main Controller PCB

    J1302

    Ps3

    Document Sensor

    J927

    Unit14

    Main Controller PCB

    J1501

    J1501

    M3

    Scanner Motor

    J927

    Unit14

    Main Controller PCB

    J1502

    Ps1

    CIS HP Sensor

    J928

    Unit14

    Main Controller PCB

    J16

    Unit26

    Contact Image Sensor

    J1103

    Unit5

    Connecting PCB

    J802

    M2

    Laser Scanner Motor

    J902

    Unit14

    Main Controller PCB

    J801

    Unit6

    Laser Driver PCB

    J903

    Unit14

    Main Controller PCB

    J903

    Sl3

    MP Tray Pickup Sorenoid

    J923

    Unit14

    Main Controller PCB

    J1501

    J1501

    Fm3

    Controller Fan

    J904

    Unit14

    Main Controller PCB

    J972

    Unit21

    Usb Pcb

    J910

    Unit14

    Main Controller PCB

  • -
  • Usb

  • J911

    Unit14

    Main Controller PCB

  • -
  • Ethernet

  • Parts Replacement and Cleaning
  • 105

    Page 114

    J1

    J908

    J901

    J909

    J945

    J944

    J943

    J941

    J942

    J952

    J201

    J255

    J951

    J257

    J252

    J251

    J271

    J270

    J256

    J930

    J932

    J931

    J915

    J No. Symbol Name Relay Con- nector J No. Symbol Name Remarks

    J251

    Unit2

    Engine Controller PCB

  • Sw2

  • Door Switch

    J252

    Unit2

    Engine Controller PCB

  • Sw2

  • Door Switch

    J271

    Unit2

    Engine Controller PCB

    J257

    Unit4

    Low Voltage Power Supply

    Pcb

    J270

    Unit2

    Engine Controller PCB

    J256

    Unit3

    High Voltage Power Supply

    Pcb

    J915

    Unit14

    Main Controller PCB

    J255

    Unit2

    Engine Controller PCB

    J901

    Unit14

    Main Controller PCB

    J201

    Unit2

    Engine Controller PCB

    J930

    Unit14

    Main Controller PCB

    J941

    Unit18

    Ncu Pcb

    Other than D1520/ MF411dw

    J2001

    Unit19

    OFF Hook PCB

    J942

    Unit18

    Ncu Pcb

    Other than D1520/ MF411dw

    J931

    Unit14

    Main Controller PCB

    J2000

    Unit19

    OFF Hook PCB Other than D1520/ MF411dw

    J932

    Unit14

    Main Controller PCB

    J932

    Sp1

    Speaker Other than D1520/ MF411dw

    J908

    Unit14

    Main Controller PCB

    J1

    Unit22

    Wireless LAN PCB Other than D1520/ MF411dw

    J909

    Unit14

    Main Controller PCB

    J1

    Unit15

    eMMC PCB

    J943

    Unit18

    Ncu Pcb

  • -
  • LINE Other than
  • D1520/ MF411dw

    J944

    Unit18

    Ncu Pcb

  • -
  • TEL Other than
  • D1520/ MF411dw

    J945

    Unit18

    Ncu Pcb

  • -
  • HANDSET Other
  • than D1520/ MF411dw
  • Parts Replacement and Cleaning
  • 106

    Page 115

    J1101

    J407

    J1104

    J2100

    J1102

    J1205

    J1202

    J212

    J205

    J210 J213 J208 J202

    J203

    J850

    J211

    J204

    J206

    J214

    J207

    J No. Symbol Name Relay Con- nector J No. Symbol Name Remarks

    J211

    Unit2

    Engine Controller PCB

    J1205

  • -
  • J214

  • Unit2

    Engine Controller PCB

    J214

    Tag

    Cartridge Sensor

    J2100

    Tag

    Cartridge Sensor

  • -
  • J208

  • Unit2

    Engine Controller PCB

    J208

    Ps201

    Duplex Reverse Sensor

    J205

    Unit2

    Engine Controller PCB

    J205

    Ps202

    MP Tray Media Presence Sen- sor

    J204

    Unit2

    Engine Controller PCB

    J204

    Ps203

    Cassette Media Presence Sen- sor

    J203

    Unit2

    Engine Controller PCB

    J203

    Unit10

    Top Sensor Unit

    Ps204,Ps205

    J213

    Unit2

    Engine Controller PCB

    J213

    Ps206

    FD Tray Media Full Sensor

    J202

    Unit2

    Engine Controller PCB

    J1202

    M1

    Main Motor

    J206

    Unit2

    Engine Controller PCB

    J206

    Ps915

    Fixing Delivery Sensor

    J210

    Unit2

    Engine Controller PCB

    J210

    Th1

    Thermistor

    J212

    Unit2

    Engine Controller PCB

    J407

    H1

    Heater

    J207

    Unit2

    Engine Controller PCB

    J1102

    Unit5

    Connecting PCB

    J1104

    Unit5

    Connecting PCB

    J1104

    Sl1

    Cassette Pickup Sorenoid

    J1101

    Unit5

    Connecting PCB

    J1101

    Sl2

    Duplex Reverse Sorenoid

  • Parts Replacement and Cleaning
  • 107

    Page 116

    Other than EUR

    J1105

    J805

    J925

    J961

    J956

    J954

    J953

    J951

    J905

    J209

    J No. Symbol Name Relay Con- nector J No. Symbol Name Remarks

    J1105

    Unit5

    Connecting PCB

    J805

    J805

    Fm2

    Main Fan

    J209

    Unit2

    Engine Controller PCB

  • Sw1

  • Main Switch

  • Sw1

  • Main Switch

    J905

    J905

    J1

    Inlet

    J925

    Unit14

    Main Controller PCB

    J951

    Unit16

    Control Panel PCB

    J956

    Unit16

    Control Panel PCB

    J961

    Unit17

    Nfc Pcb

    D1550/ MF416dw/ MF415dw

    J953

    Unit16

    Control Panel PCB

    J1

    Dsp1

    Lcd

    J954

    Unit16

    Control Panel PCB

    J1

    Unit27

    Touch Panel

  • Parts Replacement and Cleaning
  • 108

    Page 117

    Only for EUR

    J925

    J961

    J956

    J954

    J953

    J951

    J918

    J850

    J905

    J10

    J209

    J804

    J No. Symbol Name Relay Con- nector J No. Symbol Name Remarks

    J850

    Unit2

    Engine Controller PCB

    J804

    J804

    Fm1

    Main Fan

    J209

    Unit2

    Engine Controller PCB

  • Sw11

  • Main Switch

  • Sw11

  • Main Switch

    J905

    J905

    J1

    Inlet

    J918

    Unit14

    Main Controller PCB

    J10

    Sw11

    Main Switch

    J925

    Unit14

    Main Controller PCB

    J951

    Unit16

    Control Panel PCB

    J956

    Unit16

    Control Panel PCB

    J961

    Unit17

    Nfc Pcb

    D1550/ MF416dw/ MF415dw

    J953

    Unit16

    Control Panel PCB

    J1

    Dsp1

    Lcd

    J954

    Unit16

    Control Panel PCB

    J1

    Unit27

    Touch Panel

  • Parts Replacement and Cleaning
  • 109

    Page 118

    External Cover Removing the Left Cover Unit ■ Procedure

  • Remove the cassette [1].
  • Press the Open button [2], and open the Front Cover
  • Unit [3]. [3] [1] [2]
  • Open the ADF + Reader Unit [1].
  • [1]
  • Place the host machine [1] while shifting its left side
  • approx. 10cm from the working table to release the claw on the lower side of the Left Cover Unit.

    Caution:

    Be careful not to drop the host machine when shifting it. 100 mm [1]
  • Release the claw [1].
  • [1] 1x
  • Parts Replacement and Cleaning
  • 110

    Page 119

  • While opening the Left Cover Unit [1] in the direction
  • of the arrow, release the 2 claws [2] on the lower side. [1] [2] [2] 2x
  • Release the claw [2], and pull the Left Cover Unit [1]
  • in the direction of the arrow. [1] [2] 1x
  • Remove the Left Cover Unit [1] in the direction of the
  • arrow. [1] Removing the Left Rear Cover ■ Preparation
  • Remove the Left Cover Unit.“Removing the Left
  • Cover Unit” on page 110 ■ Procedure
  • Remove the claw [1], and remove the Arm Cover [2].
  • [1] [2]
  • Disconnect the arm [1], and turn it toward the rear.
  • Caution:

    When opening/closing the ADF + Reader Unit after releasing the arm, be sure to perform the work while supporting the ADF + Reader Unit. Be careful not to get your hand caught.
  • Parts Replacement and Cleaning
  • 111

    Page 120

    [1]

  • Open the ADF + Reader Unit [1], and release the 2
  • Claws [2]. [1] [2] [2] 2x
  • Lift the host machine [1], and remove the Left Rear
  • Cover [2].
  • 1 Screw [3]
  • 2 Claws [4]
  • [1] [2] [3] [4] 1x Removing the Right Cover Unit ■ Procedure
  • Remove the cassette [1].
  • Press the Open button [2], and open the Front Cover
  • Unit [3]. [3] [1] [2]
  • Parts Replacement and Cleaning
  • 112

    Page 121

  • Open the ADF + Reader Unit [1].
  • [1]
  • Release the claw [1], and remove the Arm Cover [2].
  • [1] [2]
  • Disconnect the arm [1], and turn it to the rear side.
  • Caution:

    When opening/closing the ADF+Reader Unit after releasing the arm, be sure perform the work while supporting the ADF+Reader Unit. Be careful not to get your hand caught. [1]
  • Place the host machine [1] while shifting its right
  • side approx. 10cm from the working table to release the claw on the lower side of the Right Cover Unit.

    Caution:

    Be careful not to drop the host machine when shifting it. 10 cm [1]
  • Parts Replacement and Cleaning
  • 113

    Page 122

  • Open the ADF + Reader Unit [1], and release the 2
  • claws [3] while pulling the Right Cover Unit [2] in the direction of the arrow. [1] [2] [3] 2x
  • Close the ADF + Reader Unit, and release the 2 claws
  • [2] on the lower side while pulling the Right Cover Unit [1] in the direction of the arrow. 2x [1] [2] [2]
  • Open the ADF + Reader Unit [1], and release the claw
  • [3] while pulling the Right Cover Unit [2] in the direction of the arrow. [1] [2] [3] 1x
  • Remove the Right Cover Unit [1] in the direction of
  • the arrow. [1] Removing the Front Cover Unit ■ Preparation
  • Remove the Left Cover Unit.“Removing the Left
  • Cover Unit” on page 110
  • Remove the Right Cover Unit. “Removing the Right
  • Cover Unit” on page 112
  • Parts Replacement and Cleaning
  • 114

    Page 123

    ■ Procedure

  • Remove the Link Arm [1].
  • [1]
  • Remove the Front Cover Unit [1].
  • 2 Screws [2]
  • [1] [2] 2x Removing the Rear Cover Unit ■ Preparation
  • Remove the Left Cover Unit.“Removing the Left
  • Cover Unit” on page 110
  • Remove the Left Rear Cover.“Removing the Left
  • Rear Cover” on page 111
  • Remove the Right Cover Unit.“Removing the Right
  • Cover Unit” on page 112 ■ Procedure
  • Push down the handle [1] to open the Duplexing
  • Feed Unit [2]. [2] [1]
  • Remove the Rear Cover Unit [1].
  • 5 Screws [2]
  • 3 Claws [3]
  • [1] [2] [2] [2] [3] [3] 5x 3x
  • Parts Replacement and Cleaning
  • 115

    Page 124

  • Remove the Rear Cover Unit [1] from the Duplexing
  • Feed Unit [2].
  • 2 Bosses [3]
  • [1] [2] [3] [3]

    Caution:

    Points to Note at Installation:
  • Hook the 2 upper claws [2] on the Upper Cover [1].
  • Open the Rear Sub Tray [3], and install the Rear
  • Cover Unit while pressing down the Duplex Reverse Sensor Flag [4]. [1] [2] [3] [4] [5] [4]
  • Check that the Sensor Flag [4] runs through the
  • hole [5] on the back side of the Duplex Unit Cover. Removing the Upper Cover ■ Preparation
  • Remove the Right Cover Unit.“Removing the Right
  • Cover Unit” on page 112
  • Remove the Left Cover Unit.“Removing the Left
  • Cover Unit” on page 110
  • Remove the Left Rear Cover.“Removing the Left
  • Rear Cover” on page 111
  • Remove the Controller Cover.“Removing the
  • Controller Cover” on page 127
  • Remove the ADF + Reader Unit.“Removing the ADF
  • Unit + Reader Unit” on page 118
  • Parts Replacement and Cleaning
  • 116

    Page 125

    ■ Procedure

  • Remove the Upper Cover [1].
  • 2 Screws (TP) [2]
  • 1 Screw (Tapping) [3]
  • 1 Screw [4] (to loosen)
  • 2 Claws [5]
  • [5] [2] [2] [1] [3] [4] 4x 2x
  • Parts Replacement and Cleaning
  • 117

    Page 126

    Document Exposure / Delivery System Removing the ADF Unit + Reader Unit ■ Preparation

    Caution:

    Actions after Replacement:
  • “ After Replacing the Reader Unit ” on page 158
  • Remove the Left Cover Unit.“Removing the Left
  • Cover Unit” on page 110
  • Remove the Left Rear Cover.“Removing the Left
  • Rear Cover” on page 111
  • Remove the Controller Cover.“Removing the
  • Controller Cover” on page 127
  • Remove the Wireless LAN PCB (except for D1520/
  • MF412dn).“Removing the Wireless LAN PCB (except for D1520/ MF412dn)” on page 127 ■ Procedure
  • Disconnect the 4 Flat Cables [1] and the 3
  • connectors [2]. 7x [2] [1] [1]
  • Free the harness [1] from the guide [A].
  • 1x
  • Remove the Harness Guide [1].
  • 4 Claws [2]
  • 4x [1] [2] [2] [2]
  • Free the Flat Cable [1] from the guide [A].
  • 1x [1]

    [A]

  • Parts Replacement and Cleaning
  • 118

    Page 127

  • Remove the ADF Harness Guide [1].
  • 2 Screws [2]
  • 1 Hook [3]
  • [2] [2] [1] [3] 2x
  • Lift the ADF + Reader Unit [1] in the direction of the
  • arrow and remove them. [1] Removing the ADF Roller Unit ■ Procedure
  • Open the ADF Upper Cover [1].
  • [1]
  • Remove the gear [1] and the bushing [2].
  • 1 Claw [3]
  • [1] [3] [2] 1x
  • Remove the resin E-ring [1].
  • 1 Bushing [2]
  • [2] [1]
  • Remove the resin E-ring [1] and the bushing [2].
  • Parts Replacement and Cleaning
  • 119

    Page 128

  • Remove the ADF Roller Unit [1].
  • [1]

    Caution:

    When removing the ADF Roller Unit, be careful not to lose the spring [1] on the back side. [1] Removing the ADF Pickup Roller ■ Preparation
  • Remove the ADF Roller Unit.“Removing the ADF
  • Roller Unit” on page 119 ■ Procedure

    Caution:

    Do Not Touch the Surface of the ADF Pickup Roller When Removing or Mounting it.
  • Insert the Precision Flat-screwdriver and Remove
  • the Pickup Roller [1] Together With the Shaft. [1]
  • Remove the Pickup Roller [1].
  • [1] Removing the ADF Separation Roller ■ Preparation
  • Remove the ADF Roller Unit.“Removing the ADF
  • Roller Unit” on page 119 ■ Procedure

    Caution:

    Do not touch the surface of the roller or pad.
  • Remove the bushing [1].
  • [1]
  • Parts Replacement and Cleaning
  • 120

    Page 129

  • Remove the 2 resin E-rings [1].
  • [1]
  • Pull out the Roller Shaft [1] in the direction of the
  • arrow, and remove the Parallel Pin [2] and the bushing [3]. [1] [2] [3]

    Caution:

    Do not lose the Parallel Pin as it is a small part.
  • Rotate the shaft [1] in the direction of the arrow, and
  • pull it out by aligning the hole of the Roller Holder with the protrusion [2]. [1] [2] [2]
  • Remove the ADF Separation Roller [1].
  • [1] Removing the ADF Separation Pad ■ Procedure

    Caution:

    Do not touch the surface of the roller or pad.
  • Open the ADF Upper Cover [1].
  • [1]
  • Remove the Feed Guide [1].
  • 2 Bosses [2]
  • [1] [2] [2]
  • Parts Replacement and Cleaning
  • 121

    Page 130

  • Remove the Retainer Plate [1] from the back side of
  • the Feed Guide.
  • 2 Screws [2]
  • 2 Protrusions [3] of the Separation Pad Holder
  • [1] [2] [3] 2x
  • Remove the Separation Pad Holder [1].
  • [1] Removing the ADF Pickup Feed Unit ■ Procedure
  • Open the ADF Upper Cover [1].
  • [1]
  • Remove the ADF Front Cover [1].
  • 4 Claws [2]
  • [1] [2] 4x
  • Slightly lift the ADF Tray [1], release the claw [2], lift
  • the tray to the angle of 90 degrees, and then remove it. [1] [1] [2] 1x
  • Parts Replacement and Cleaning
  • 122

    Page 131

  • Remove the ADF Rear Cover [1].
  • 1 Boss [2]
  • 4 Claws [3]
  • [1] [2] [3] [3] 4x
  • Disconnect the Grounding Wire [1].
  • 1 Screw [2]
  • [1] [2] 1x
  • Free the harness [1].
  • 4 Connectors [2]
  • 2 Wire Saddles [3]
  • [1] [2] [2] [2] [3] [3] 2x 4x
  • Remove the ADF Pickup Feed Unit [1].
  • 5 Screws [2]
  • [1] 5x [2] [2] [2] [2]
  • Remove the ADF Upper Cover Unit [1].
  • 2 Bosses [2]
  • [1] [2] [2] Removing the ADF Pickup Motor Unit ■ Preparation
  • Remove the ADF Pickup Feed Unit.“Removing the
  • ADF Pickup Feed Unit” on page 122
  • Parts Replacement and Cleaning
  • 123

    Page 132

    ■ Procedure

  • Remove the Harness Guide [1] from the Edge Saddle
  • [2]. [1] [2] 1x
  • Remove the ADF Motor Unit [1].
  • 2 Screws [2]
  • [1] [2] [2] 2x

    Caution:

    The gear [1] of the ADF Motor Unit and the gear [2] on the frame of the Pickup Feed Unit are not secured in place, so be careful not to lose them. [1] [2] Removing the ADF Delivery Solenoid Unit ■ Preparation
  • Remove the ADF Pickup Feed Unit.“Removing the
  • ADF Pickup Feed Unit” on page 122 ■ Procedure
  • Remove the E-ring [1].
  • [1]
  • Remove the ADF Pickup Feed Solenoid Unit [1].
  • 2 Screws [2]
  • [1] [2] [2] 2x Removing the Reader Unit Upper Cover ■ Preparation

    Caution:

    Actions after Replacement:
  • “ After Replacing the Reader Upper Cover Unit ”
  • on page 160
  • Remove the Left Cover Unit.“Removing the Left
  • Cover Unit” on page 110
  • Remove the Left Rear Cover.“Removing the Left
  • Rear Cover” on page 111
  • Parts Replacement and Cleaning
  • 124

    Page 133

  • Remove the Controller Cover.“Removing the
  • Controller Cover” on page 127
  • Remove the ADF + Reader Unit.“Removing the ADF
  • Unit + Reader Unit” on page 118 ■ Procedure
  • Remove the 2 screws [1] from the bottom of the
  • Reader Unit. [1] [1] 2x
  • Remove the Reader Upper Cover Unit [1].
  • 2 Screws [2]
  • 7 Claws [3]
  • [1] [2] [2] [3] [3] [3] [3] 2x 7x Removing the CIS Unit ■ Preparation

    Caution:

    Actions after Replacement:
  • “ After Replacing the Scanner Unit (CIS) ” on page
  • 154
  • Remove the Left Cover Unit.“Removing the Left
  • Cover Unit” on page 110
  • Remove the Left Rear Cover.“Removing the Left
  • Rear Cover” on page 111
  • Remove the ADF + Reader Unit.“Removing the ADF
  • Unit + Reader Unit” on page 118
  • Separate the ADF from the Reader Unit.
  • Remove the Reader Upper Cover Unit.“Removing
  • the Reader Unit Upper Cover” on page 124 ■ Procedure
  • Remove the Drive Pulley [1].
  • 1 Claw [2]
  • [1] [2]
  • Parts Replacement and Cleaning
  • 125

    Page 134

  • Remove the CIS Mount [1] in the direction of the
  • arrow, and disconnect the Flat Cable [2]. [1] [2]

    Caution:

    When removing the CIS Mount, be careful not to lose the CIS Spacers [1]. [1]
  • Lift the CIS Unit [1], and remove it in the direction of
  • the arrow. [1]
  • Parts Replacement and Cleaning
  • 126

    Page 135

    Controller System Removing the Controller Cover ■ Preparation

  • Remove the Left Cover Unit.“Removing the Left
  • Cover Unit” on page 110 ■ Procedure
  • Remove the Controller Cover [1].
  • 6 Screws [2]
  • 2 Hooks [3]
  • [1] [2] [2] [3] [2] [3] [2] 6x Removing the Wireless LAN PCB (except for D1520/ MF412dn) ■ Preparation
  • Remove the Left Cover Unit.“Removing the Left
  • Cover Unit” on page 110
  • Remove the Controller Cover.“Removing the
  • Controller Cover” on page 127 ■ Procedure
  • Remove the Wireless LAN PCB [1].
  • 1 Screw [2]
  • 1 Hook [3]
  • 1 Flat Cable [4]
  • 1x 1x [3] [2] [4] [1] Removing the Main Controller

    Pcb

    ■ Preparation

    Caution:

    Actions before Replacement:
  • “Actions before Replacement” on page 166
  • Actions after Replacement:
  • “After replacing main controller PCB” on page
  • 167
  • Remove the Left Cover Unit.“Removing the Left
  • Cover Unit” on page 110
  • Remove the Controller Cover.“Removing the
  • Controller Cover” on page 127
  • Remove the Wireless LAN PCB. (except for D1520/
  • MF412dn) “Removing the Wireless LAN PCB (except for D1520/ MF412dn)” on page 127
  • Parts Replacement and Cleaning
  • 127

    Page 136

    ■ Procedure

  • Disconnect the 4 Flat Cables [1] and the 6
  • connectors [2] from the Main Controller PCB.
  • 3 Connectors [A] (except for D1520/ MF411dw)
  • 1 Connector [B] (EUR only)
  • [A]

    [B]

    [2] [2] [1] 14x
  • Remove the Main Controller PCB [1].
  • 7 Screws [2]
  • 6x 1x [1] [2] [2] [2]

    Caution:

    Do not remove the eMMC PCB. Removing the NCU PCB (Except for D1520/ MF411dw) ■ Preparation
  • Remove the Left Cover Unit.“Removing the Left
  • Cover Unit” on page 110
  • Remove the Controller Cover.“Removing the
  • Controller Cover” on page 127
  • Parts Replacement and Cleaning
  • 128

    Page 137

    ■ Procedure

  • Remove the Harness Guide [1] (EUR only).
  • 1 Connector [2]
  • 2 Claws [3]
  • 1 Hook [4]
  • 2x 1x [1] [3] [3] [4] [2]
  • Disconnect the cables.
  • 1 Flat Cable [1]
  • 1 Connector [2]
  • 1 Wire Saddle [3]
  • 1 Connector [A] (JP only)
  • 1x 3x [1] [2]

    [A]

    [3]
  • Remove the NCU PCB [1].
  • 4 Screws [2]
  • 4x [1] [2] [2] Removing the OFF Hook PCB (except for D1520/ MF411dw) ■ Preparation
  • Remove the Left Cover Unit.“Removing the Left
  • Cover Unit” on page 110
  • Remove the Controller Cover.“Removing the
  • Controller Cover” on page 127 ■ Procedure
  • Remove the OFF Hook PCB [1].
  • 1 Wire Saddle [2]
  • 2 Connectors [3]
  • 2 Screws [4]
  • 2x 2x 1x [1] [2] [3] [4] Removing the Controller Box ■ Preparation
  • Remove the Right Cover Unit.“Removing the Right
  • Cover Unit” on page 112
  • Parts Replacement and Cleaning
  • 129

    Page 138

  • Remove the Left Cover Unit.“Removing the Left
  • Cover Unit” on page 110
  • Remove the Left Rear Cover.“Removing the Left
  • Rear Cover” on page 111
  • Remove the Controller Cover.“Removing the
  • Controller Cover” on page 127
  • Remove the Wireless LAN PCB. (except for D1520/
  • MF412dn)“Removing the Wireless LAN PCB (except for D1520/ MF412dn)” on page 127
  • Remove the NCU PCB. (except for D1520/ MF411dw)
  • “Removing the NCU PCB (Except for D1520/ MF411dw)” on page 128
  • Remove the Main Controller PCB. “Removing the
  • Main Controller PCB” on page 127 ■ Procedure
  • Free the harness [1] from the guide [A].
  • [A]

    [1] 1x
  • Remove the Harness Guide [1].
  • 4 Claws [2]
  • [1] [2] [2] [2] [2] 4x
  • Free the Flat Cable [1] from the guide [A].
  • [1]

    [A]

    1x
  • Open the Wire Saddle [1] and the Edge Saddle [2],
  • and free the harnesses [3] and [4] from the guide [A]. [1] [4] [3]

    [A]

    [3] [4] [2] 3x
  • Parts Replacement and Cleaning
  • 130

    Page 139

  • Remove the Controller Box [1].
  • 6 Screws [2]
  • [1] [2] [2] [2] [2] [2] 6x Removing the Engine Controller Unit ■ Preparation
  • Remove the Right Cover Unit.“Removing the Right
  • Cover Unit” on page 112
  • Remove the Left Cover Unit.“Removing the Left
  • Cover Unit” on page 110
  • Remove the Left Rear Cover.“Removing the Left
  • Rear Cover” on page 111
  • Remove the Controller Cover.“Removing the
  • Controller Cover” on page 127
  • Remove the Wireless LAN PCB. (except for D1520/
  • MF412dn)“Removing the Wireless LAN PCB (except for D1520/ MF412dn)” on page 127
  • Remove the NCU PCB. (except for D1520/ MF411dw)
  • “Removing the NCU PCB (Except for D1520/ MF411dw)” on page 128
  • Remove the Main Controller PCB.“Removing the
  • Main Controller PCB” on page 127
  • Remove the Controller Box.“Removing the
  • Controller Box” on page 129
  • Remove the Rear Cover Unit.“Removing the Rear
  • Cover Unit” on page 115 ■ Procedure

    Caution:

  • Remove the Duplex Reverse Sensor Unit [1].
  • 1 Connector [2]
  • 1 Wire Saddle [3]
  • 1 Harness Guide [4]
  • 1 Screw [5]
  • [1] [5] [3] [4] [2] 1x 2x 1x
  • Free the harness [1].
  • 5 Connectors [2]
  • 1 Wire Saddle [3]
  • 2 Harness Guides [4]
  • 1 Connector [A] (EUR only)
  • [4] [1] 3x 6x [2] [2] [2] [3]

    [A]

  • Parts Replacement and Cleaning
  • 131

    Page 140

  • Remove the Feed Guide [1].
  • 1 Screw [2]
  • [1] [2] 1x
  • Disconnect the 7 connectors [1] and remove the
  • terminal [2]. [1] [1] [1] [2] 2x 6x
  • Remove the Controller Fan Unit [1].
  • 1 Screw [2]
  • [2] [1] 1x
  • Free the harness [1] from the guide [A].
  • 2 Terminals [2]
  • 1 Wire Saddle [3]
  • Free the Flat Cable [4] from the guide [B].
  • 1 Ferrite Core [5]
  • [3] [1]

    [B]

    [5] [4] [2]

    [A]

    3x 2x
  • Remove the 3 Fixation Screws [1] of the Engine
  • Controller. [1] 3x [1]
  • Parts Replacement and Cleaning
  • 132

    Page 141

  • Release the 2 claws [1], and move the Engine
  • Controller Unit [2]. [2] 2x [1] [1]
  • Free the Flat Cable [1] and the harness [2] from the
  • holes [A] and [B] on the Side Plate, and remove the Engine Controller Unit [3].
  • 1 Wire Saddle [4]
  • Caution:

    Be sure to perform the work while holding the Engine Controller Unit due to the load being applied to the harness. [3] [2]

    [B]

    [4]

    [A]

    [1] 1x Removing the Control Panel ■ Procedure
  • Remove the 2 Face Seals [1] and the 4 screws [2]
  • from the lower side of the Reader Unit. [1] [2] [2] [2] 4x
  • Parts Replacement and Cleaning
  • 133

    Page 142

    Note:

    When removing the screws on the lower side of the Reader Unit, release the claw [1], and remove the Arm Cover [2]. Disconnecting the arm can make the work easier. [4] [1] [2] [3]
  • Remove the Control Panel [1].
  • 9 Claws [2]
  • 1 Flat Cable [3]
  • 1 Terminal [4]
  • 9x 2x [2] [2] [2] [4] [1] [3] Removing the Control Panel

    Pcb

    ■ Preparation
  • Remove the Control Panel.“Removing the Control
  • Panel” on page 133
  • Parts Replacement and Cleaning
  • 134

    Page 143

    ■ Procedure

  • Remove the Control Panel PCB [1].
  • 7 Screws [2]
  • 2 Flat Cables [3]
  • 7x 2x [3] [1] [3] [2] [2] [2] Removing the NFC PCB (D1550/ MF416dw/ MF415dw) ■ Preparation
  • Remove the Control Panel.“Removing the Control
  • Panel” on page 133 ■ Procedure
  • Remove the NFC PCB [1].
  • 1 Screw [2]
  • 1 Connector [3]
  • 1x 1x [1] [2] [3] Removing the Main Motor ■ Preparation
  • Remove the Right Cover Unit.“Removing the Right
  • Cover Unit” on page 112
  • Remove the Left Cover Unit.“Removing the Left
  • Cover Unit” on page 110
  • Remove the Left Rear Cover.“Removing the Left
  • Rear Cover” on page 111
  • Remove the Controller Cover.“Removing the
  • Controller Cover” on page 127
  • Remove the ADF + Reader Unit.“Removing the ADF
  • Unit + Reader Unit” on page 118
  • Remove the Upper Cover.“Removing the Upper
  • Cover” on page 116
  • Remove the Wireless LAN PCB. (except for D1520/
  • MF412dn)“Removing the Wireless LAN PCB (except for D1520/ MF412dn)” on page 127
  • Remove the NCU PCB. (except for D1520/ MF411dw)
  • “Removing the NCU PCB (Except for D1520/ MF411dw)” on page 128
  • Remove the Main Controller PCB.“Removing the
  • Main Controller PCB” on page 127
  • Remove the Controller Box.“Removing the
  • Controller Box” on page 129
  • Remove the Rear Cover Unit.“Removing the Rear
  • Cover Unit” on page 115
  • Remove the Fixing Assembly.“Fixing System” on
  • page 147
  • Parts Replacement and Cleaning
  • 135

    Page 144

    ■ Procedure

  • Remove the Main Switch Mounting Base [1].
  • 2 Claws [2]
  • [1] [2] 2x
  • Move the Harness Guide [1] to the left.
  • 2 Screws [2]
  • 2 Bosses [3]
  • [1] [2] 1x [3]

    Caution:

    At installation, place the Harness Guide [1] to the rear side of the hook [3] of the Harness Guide [2]. [1] [3] [2]
  • Remove the Harness Guide [1].
  • 2 Claws [2]
  • [1] [2] 2x
  • Remove the Main Motor [1] and the Harness Guide
  • [2].
  • 3 Screws [3]
  • [3] [2] [1] [3] 3x Removing the Main Fan ■ Preparation
  • Remove the Right Cover Unit.“Removing the Right
  • Cover Unit” on page 112
  • Parts Replacement and Cleaning
  • 136

    Page 145

    ■ Procedure

  • Remove the Main Fan [1].
  • 2 Claws [2]
  • 1 Connector [A] (except for EUR)
  • 1 Connector [B] (EUR only)
  • [A]

    [B]

    [2] 2x 1x [1] Removing the Main Fan Relay Cable ■ Preparation In the case of host machines for EUR and host machines of serial number USF10001 or later for Japan
  • Remove the Left Cover Unit. “Removing the Left
  • Cover Unit” on page 110
  • Remove the Right Cover Unit.“Removing the Right
  • Cover Unit” on page 112
  • Remove the Left Rear Cover.“Removing the Left
  • Rear Cover” on page 111
  • Remove the Rear Cover Unit.“Removing the Rear
  • Cover Unit” on page 115 ■ Procedure
  • Remove the Duplex Reverse Sensor Unit [1].
  • 1 Connector [2]
  • 1 Wire Saddle [3]
  • 1 Harness Guide [4]
  • 1 Screw [5]
  • [1] [5] [3] [4] [2] 1x 2x 1x
  • Parts Replacement and Cleaning
  • 137

    Page 146

  • Disconnect the Relay Cable [1].
  • 2 Connectors [2]
  • 9 Harness Guides [3]
  • 1 Wire Saddle [4]
  • [4] [3] 1x [2] [1] [3] [3] 10x [3] 1x [2] Removing the Main Drive Unit ■ Preparation
  • Remove the Right Cover Unit.“Removing the Right
  • Cover Unit” on page 112
  • Remove the Left Cover Unit.“Removing the Left
  • Cover Unit” on page 110
  • Remove the Controller Cover.“Removing the
  • Controller Cover” on page 127
  • Remove the Left Rear Cover.“Removing the Left
  • Rear Cover” on page 111
  • Remove the ADF + Reader Unit.“Removing the ADF
  • Unit + Reader Unit” on page 118
  • Remove the Upper Cover.“Removing the Upper
  • Cover” on page 116
  • Remove the Rear Cover Unit.“Removing the Rear
  • Cover Unit” on page 115 ■ Procedure
  • Remove the Duplex Reverse Sensor Unit [1].
  • 1 Connector [2]
  • 1 Wire Saddle [3]
  • 1 Harness Guide [4]
  • 1 Screw [5]
  • [1] [5] [3] [4] [2] 1x 2x 1x
  • Parts Replacement and Cleaning
  • 138

    Page 147

  • Remove the harness [1].
  • 3 Connectors [2]
  • 1 Wire Saddle [3]
  • 2 Harness Guides [4]
  • 1 Connector [A] (EUR only)
  • [4] [1] 3x 4x [2] [3]

    [A]

    [2]
  • Remove the harness [1].
  • 6 Harness Guides [2]
  • 3 Connectors [3]
  • 1 Connector [A] (except for EUR)
  • [1] [2] [3] [2] [1] [2] 1x 4x

    [A]

  • Remove the Main Fan [1].
  • 2 Screws [2]
  • [1] [2] 2x
  • Remove the link [1], and free the harness [2] from the
  • Harness Guide [3].
  • 2 Bosses [4]
  • [1] [2] [3] [3] [4] [4] 1x
  • Remove the 2 Harness Guides [1].
  • 2 Bosses [2]
  • [1] [2]
  • Parts Replacement and Cleaning
  • 139

    Page 148

  • Remove the plate [1], and disengage the gear [2] of
  • the Fixing Assembly and the Link Arm [3].
  • 2 Screws [4]
  • [1] [3] [4] [4] [2] 2x

    Caution:

    When removing the Main Drive Unit, perform carefully so that the gears do not get disengaged.
  • Remove the Main Drive Unit [1].
  • 4 Screws [2]
  • [1] [2] [2] 4x Removing the Duplex Drive Unit ■ Preparation
  • Remove the Right Cover Unit.“Removing the Right
  • Cover Unit” on page 112
  • Remove the Left Cover Unit.“Removing the Left
  • Cover Unit” on page 110
  • Remove the Left Rear Cover.“Removing the Left
  • Rear Cover” on page 111
  • Remove the Controller Cover.“Removing the
  • Controller Cover” on page 127
  • Remove the ADF + Reader Unit.“Removing the ADF
  • Unit + Reader Unit” on page 118
  • Remove the Upper Cover.“Removing the Upper
  • Cover” on page 116 ■ Procedure
  • Free the harnesses [1] and [2] from the 4 guides [3].
  • 3 Connectors [4]
  • 1 Connector [A] (EUR only)
  • 1 Connector [B] (except for EUR)
  • [4] [3]

    [A]

    4x 4x [3] [2] [1]

    [B]

  • Free the harness from the guide [A], and remove the
  • Main Fan Unit [1].
  • 2 Screws [2]
  • [2]

    [A]

    [1] 2x 1x
  • Parts Replacement and Cleaning
  • 140

    Page 149

  • Remove the Duplexing Drive Unit [1].
  • 3 Screws [2]
  • [2] [1] [2] 3x

    Caution:

    If the gears of the Duplexing Drive Unit have come off, return the black gear [2] to the side with an arrow mark [1]. [1] [2]

    Caution:

    Secure the unit with screws while the stopper [1] is lowered and engaged with the gear. When they are not engaged, the Duplexing Drive Unit is not installed properly. [1] Removing the Duplex Reverse Solenoid ■ Preparation
  • Remove the Right Cover Unit.“Removing the Right
  • Cover Unit” on page 112
  • Remove the Left Cover Unit.“Removing the Left
  • Cover Unit” on page 110
  • Remove the Controller Cover.“Removing the
  • Controller Cover” on page 127
  • Remove the Left Rear Cover.“Removing the Left
  • Rear Cover” on page 111
  • Remove the ADF + Reader Unit.“Removing the ADF
  • Unit + Reader Unit” on page 118
  • Remove the Upper Cover.“Removing the Upper
  • Cover” on page 116
  • Remove the Duplexing Drive Unit.“Removing the
  • Duplex Drive Unit” on page 140
  • Parts Replacement and Cleaning
  • 141

    Page 150

    ■ Procedure

  • Remove the Duplex Reverse Solenoid [1].
  • 1 Screw [2]
  • [1] [2] 1x Removing the Cassette Pickup Solenoid ■ Preparation
  • Remove the Right Cover Unit.“Removing the Right
  • Cover Unit” on page 112 ■ Procedure
  • Free the harness [1] from the guides [2], and remove
  • the Cassette Pickup Solenoid [3].
  • 1 Connector [4]
  • 1 Screw [5]
  • [1] [3] [5] [2] [2] [2] 1x 1x 1x [4] Removing the Connecting

    Pcb

    ■ Preparation
  • Remove the Left Cover Unit. “Removing the Left
  • Cover Unit” on page 110
  • Remove the Right Cover Unit.“Removing the Right
  • Cover Unit” on page 112
  • Remove the Rear Rear Cover.“Removing the Left
  • Rear Cover” on page 111
  • Remove the Rear Cover Unit.“Removing the Rear
  • Cover Unit” on page 115 ■ Procedure
  • Remove the Duplex Reverse Sensor Unit [1].
  • 1 Connector [2]
  • 1 Wire Saddle [3]
  • 1 Harness Guide [4]
  • 1 Screw [5]
  • [1] [5] [3] [4] [2] 1x 2x 1x
  • Parts Replacement and Cleaning
  • 142

    Page 151

  • Remove the harness [4] and the Connecting PCB [1]
  • (except for EUR)
  • 5 Connectors [2]
  • 1 Screw [3]
  • 11 Harness Guides [5]
  • 1 Wire Saddle [6]
  • 1x [2] 1x 4x [3] [2] [1] [2] [4] [6] [5] [5] [5] [5] 12x
  • Remove the harness [4] and the Relay PCB [1]. (EUR
  • only)
  • 4 Connectors [2]
  • 1 Screw [3]
  • 11 Harness Guides [5]
  • 1 Wire Saddle [6]
  • 1x 3x [3] [2] [1] [2] [4] [5] [5] [5] 12x 1x [2] [6] [5]
  • Parts Replacement and Cleaning
  • 143

    Page 152

    Laser Scanner System Removing the Laser Scanner Unit ■ Preparation

  • Remove the Right Cover Unit.“Removing the Right
  • Cover Unit” on page 112
  • Remove the Left Cover Unit.“Removing the Left
  • Cover Unit” on page 110
  • Remove the Left Rear Cover.“Removing the Left
  • Rear Cover” on page 111
  • Remove the Controller Cover.“Removing the
  • Controller Cover” on page 127
  • Remove the ADF + Reader Unit.“Removing the ADF
  • Unit + Reader Unit” on page 118
  • Remove the Upper Cover.“Removing the Upper
  • Cover” on page 116 ■ Procedure
  • Remove the Laser Scanner Unit [1].
  • 1 Sponge [2]
  • 1 Connector [3]
  • 1 Flat Cable [4]
  • 4 Screws [5]
  • [1] [2] [4] [5] [5] [5] [3] 4x 2x

    Caution:

    Do not disassemble the Laser Scanner Unit because it requires adjustment.
  • Parts Replacement and Cleaning
  • 144

    Page 153

    Image Forming System Removing the Transfer Roller ■ Procedure

  • Open the Cartridge Cover [1].
  • Hold the holder [1], and remove it in the direction of
  • the arrow. [1]
  • Remove the Transfer Roller [1] in the direction of the
  • arrow. [1]

    Caution:

    When installing the Transfer Roller, be sure to hold its shaft [1], and do not touch its surface [2]. [1] [2] [1] Removing the Registration Unit ■ Preparation
  • Remove the Right Cover Unit.“Removing the Right
  • Cover Unit” on page 112
  • Remove the Left Cover Unit.“Removing the Left
  • Cover Unit” on page 110
  • Remove the Left Rear Cover.“Removing the Left
  • Rear Cover” on page 111
  • Remove the ADF + Reader Unit.“Removing the ADF
  • Unit + Reader Unit” on page 118
  • Remove the Upper Cover.“Removing the Upper
  • Cover” on page 116 ■ Procedure
  • Remove the gear [1].
  • 1 Claw [2]
  • [2] [1] 1x
  • Parts Replacement and Cleaning
  • 145

    Page 154

  • Remove the guide [1].
  • 2 Claws [2]
  • [2] [1] [2] 2x
  • Remove the Registration Unit [1].
  • 5 Screws [2]
  • 1 Gear Cover [3]
  • [1] [2] [2] [2] [2] [2] [3] 5x
  • Parts Replacement and Cleaning
  • 146

    Page 155

    Fixing System Removing the Fixing Assembly ■ Preparation

  • Remove the Left Cover Unit.“Removing the Left
  • Cover Unit” on page 110
  • Remove the Left Rear Cover.“Removing the Left
  • Rear Cover” on page 111
  • Remove the Right Cover Unit.“Removing the Right
  • Cover Unit” on page 112
  • Remove the Rear Cover Unit.“Removing the Rear
  • Cover Unit” on page 115 ■ Procedure

    Caution:

    Be careful when removing the Fixing Assembly because it is hot immediately after the power is turned

    Off.

  • Close the Front Cover, and move the gears to the
  • position where the Fixing Assembly can be removed.
  • Remove the 3 gears [1].
  • [1] [1]

    Caution:

    Points to Note at Installation:
  • The Front Cover should be closed.
  • Be sure that the protrusion of the gear [1] is aligned
  • with the cut-off of the gear [3].
  • Be sure to align the gear [1] with the cut-off of the
  • gear [5]. [1] [1] [2] [5] [3] [4]
  • Parts Replacement and Cleaning
  • 147

    Page 156

  • Remove the Duplex Reverse Sensor Unit [1].
  • 1 Connector [2]
  • 1 Wire Saddle [3]
  • 1 Harness Guide [4]
  • 1 Screw [5]
  • [1] [5] [3] [4] [2] 1x 2x 1x
  • Free the harness [1].
  • 5 Connectors [2]
  • 1 Wire Saddle [3]
  • 2 Harness Guides [4]
  • 1 Connector [A] (EUR only)
  • [4] [1] 3x 6x [2] [2] [2] [3]

    [A]

  • Remove the Feed Guide [1].
  • 1 Screw [2]
  • [1] [2] 1x
  • Remove the Fixing Assembly [1].
  • 3 Connectors [2]
  • 1 Terminal [3]
  • 2 Screws [4]
  • [1] [2] [4] [4] 2x 4x [2] [3]

    Caution:

    Do not disassemble the Fixing Assembly because it requires adjustment.
  • Parts Replacement and Cleaning
  • 148

    Page 157

    Pickup / Feed System Removing the Duplex Feed Unit ■ Preparation

  • Remove the Left Cover Unit.“Removing the Left
  • Cover Unit” on page 110
  • Remove the Left Rear Cover.“Removing the Left
  • Rear Cover” on page 111
  • Remove the Right Cover Unit.“Removing the Right
  • Cover Unit” on page 112 ■ Procedure

    Caution:

    Do not touch the surface of the roller or pad.
  • Push down the handle [1] to open the Duplexing
  • Feed Unit [2]. [2] [1]
  • Remove the Rear Cover Unit [1].
  • 5 Screws [2]
  • 3 Claws [3]
  • [1] [2] [2] [2] [3] [3] 5x 3x
  • Remove the Duplexing Feed Unit [2] from the Rear
  • Cover Unit [1].
  • 2 Bosses [3]
  • [1] [2] [3] [3] Removing the Cassette Pickup Roller ■ Procedure

    Caution:

    Do not touch the surface of the roller or pad.
  • Remove the cassette [1].
  • [1]
  • Parts Replacement and Cleaning
  • 149

    Page 158

  • Remove the stopper [1] of the Shaft Support [2] with
  • a flat-blade screwdriver, and rotate the Shaft Support [2]. [1] [2]
  • Remove the Cassette Pickup Roller Unit [1] in the
  • direction of the arrow. [1]
  • Remove the Rubber Rollers [1] from both ends, and
  • remove the Pickup Roller [2] from the shaft. [1] [1] [2] Removing the Cassette Separation Pad ■ Procedure

    Caution:

    Do not touch the surface of the roller or pad.
  • Remove the cassette [1].
  • [1]
  • Remove the Separation Pad [1].
  • 2 Screws [2]
  • [1] [2] 2x Removing the Multi-purpose Tray Pickup Roller ■ Procedure

    Caution:

    Do not touch the surface of the roller or pad.
  • Open the Front Cover [1].
  • [1]
  • Open the Multi-purpose Tray Pickup Roller Cover
  • [1], move the Roller Holder [2] in the direction of the
  • Parts Replacement and Cleaning
  • 150

    Page 159

    arrow, and remove the Multi-purpose Tray Pickup Roller [3]. [2] [3] [2] [1] Removing the Multi-purpose Tray Separation Pad ■ Procedure

    Caution:

    Do not touch the surface of the roller or pad.
  • Open the Multi-purpose Tray Pickup Cover [1].
  • [1]
  • Lower the Multi-purpose Tray pickup Guide [1], and
  • remove the Multi-purpose Tray Separation Pad with a flat-blade screwdriver. [2] [1]
  • Open the Front Cover [1], and remove the Multi-
  • purpose Tray Separation Pad [2]. [1] [2]
  • Parts Replacement and Cleaning
  • 151

    Page 160

    Adjustment 6 Overview........................................... 153 Actions after Replacement Parts...... 154

    Page 161

    Overview Adjustment required in the field service works when following parts are replaced. The parts are classified by 2 function blocks. Category Parts Reference Document Exposure / Feed System Scanner Unit (CIS) “ After Replacing the Scanner Unit (CIS) ” on page 154 Reader Unit “ After Replacing the Reader Unit ” on page 158 Reader Upper Cover Unit “ After Replacing the Reader Upper Cover Unit ” on page 160 Scoopup Sheet Holder “ After Replacing the Scoopup Sheet Hold- er ” on page 165 Controller System Main Controller PCB “After Replacing the Main Controller PCB” on page 166

  • Adjustment
  • 153

    Page 162

    Actions after Replacement Parts Document Exposure / Delivery System ■ After Replacing the Scanner Unit (CIS)

  • CIS light intensity adjustment
  • Enter a provisional value.
  • Change all the adjustment values of the LED lighting time for RGB colors to "0".

    • Copier > Adjust > Ccd > Led-Bw-R

    • Copier > Adjust > Ccd > Led-Bw-G

    • Copier > Adjust > Ccd > Led-Bw-B

    • Copier > Adjust > Ccd > Led-Cl-R

    • Copier > Adjust > Ccd > Led-Cl-G

    • Copier > Adjust > Ccd > Led-Cl-B

  • Execute light intensity adjustment for the Scanner Unit (CIS) at ADF reading. (Be sure to close the ADF)
  • • Copier > Function > Ccd > Bw-Agc

    • Copier > Function > Ccd > Cl-Agc

  • Check the adjustment result.
  • Whether the operation was successful or failed is not shown on the UI, so perform the following procedure to judge if the operation was successful or failed. If the values entered in step 1 have been changed, the operation result is judged to be "successful" (end of adjustment). If all the values entered in step 1 remain "0", turn OFF and then ON the power and perform step 2 again.
  • Automatic adjustment of the stream reading position
  • Enter a provisional value.
  • Change the adjustment value of the reading position at ADF stream reading to "-20".

    • Copier > Adjust> Adj-Xy > Strd-Pos

  • Execute automatic detection of CIS reading position at ADF stream reading.
  • • Copier > Function > Install > Strd-Pos

  • Check the adjustment result.
  • Whether the operation was successful or failed is not shown on the UI, so perform the following procedure to judge if the operation was successful or failed. If the value entered in step 1 has been changed, the operation result is judged to be "successful" (end of adjustment). Write the new adjustment value on the service label. If the value entered in step 1 remains "-20", turn OFF and then ON the power and perform step 2 again.
  • Adjustment of the white level
  • Enter a provisional value.
  • Change all the shading target values at ADF reading to "0".

    • Copier > Adjust > Ccd > Dftar-R

    • Copier > Adjust > Ccd > Dftar-G

    • Copier > Adjust > Ccd > Dftar-B

    • Copier > Adjust > Ccd > Dftar-Bw

  • Place a sheet of A4 or LTR blank paper on the Copyboard Glass of the reader, and execute white level adjustment
  • (color) at copyboard reading

    • Copier > Function > Ccd > Df-Wlvl1

  • Place the same blank paper on the ADF, and execute white level adjustment (color) at ADF reading.
  • • Copier > Function > Ccd > Df-Wlvl2

  • Place a sheet of A4 or LTR blank paper on the Copyboard Glass of the reader again, and execute white level adjustment
  • (B&W) at copyboard reading.

    • Copier > Function > Ccd > Df-Wlvl3

  • Place the same blank paper on the ADF again, and execute white level adjustment (B&W) at ADF reading.
  • • Copier > Function > Ccd > Df-Wlvl4

  • Check the adjustment result.
  • Whether the operation was successful or failed is not shown on the UI, so perform the following procedure to judge if the operation was successful or failed. If the values entered in step 1 have been changed, the operation result is judged to be "successful" (end of adjustment). Write the new adjustment values on the service label. If the values entered in step 1 remain "0", turn OFF and then ON the power and perform steps 2 to 5 again.
  • Adjustment
  • 154

    Page 163

  • Adjustment of the image position (horizontal scanning direction) at ADF reading
  • Place a test chart on the ADF, and make one single-sided copy.
  • Compare the side registration of the test chart with that of the copied paper, and perform adjustment if necessary.
  • Copy of the test chart Feed direction Execute the following service mode.

    • Copier > Adjust > Adj-Xy > Adj-Y-Df

    Enter the value and adjust the image position. (Adjustment value: in increments of 0.1 mm)
  • If the image is displaced toward the rear side => Decrease the value.
  • If the image is displaced toward the front side => Increase the value.
  • A

    A

    < When a copied image moves to the rear > < When a copied image moves to the front > Copy of the test chart Copy of the test chart Test chart Test chart Feed direction Feed direction
  • Write the new adjustment value on the service label.
  • Adjustment of the image position (horizontal scanning direction) at copyboard reading
  • Place a test chart on the Copyboard Glass, and make one single-sided copy.
  • Adjustment
  • 155

    Page 164

  • Compare the side registration of the test chart with that of the copied paper, and perform adjustment if necessary.
  • Copy of the test chart Feed direction Execute the following service mode.

    • Copier > Adjust > Adj-Xy > Adj-Y

    Enter the value and adjust the image position. (Adjustment value: in increments of 0.1 mm)
  • If the image is displaced toward the rear side => Decrease the value.
  • If the image is displaced toward the front side => Increase the value.
  • A

    A

    < When a copied image moves to the rear > < When a copied image moves to the front > Copy of the test chart Copy of the test chart Test chart Test chart Feed direction Feed direction

  • Write the new adjustment value on the service label.
  • Adjustment of the image position (vertical scanning direction) at copyboard reading
  • Place a test chart on the Copyboard Glass, and make one single-sided copy.
  • Adjustment
  • 156

    Page 165

  • Compare the image leading edge of the test chart with that of the copied paper, and perform adjustment if necessary.
  • Copy of the test chart Feed direction Execute the following service mode.

    • Copier > Adjust > Adj-Xy > Adj-X

    Enter the value and adjust the image position. (Adjustment value: in increments of 0.1 mm)
  • If the image is displaced toward the trailing edge => Decrease the value.
  • If the image is displaced toward the leading edge => Increase the value.
  • A

    A

    < When a copied image moves to the trailing edge > < When a copied image moves to the leading edge > Copy of the test chart Test chart Feed direction Feed direction Copy of the test chart Test chart
  • Write the new adjustment value on the service label.
  • Fine adjustment of image magnification ratio (vertical scanning direction) at copyboard reading
  • Place a test chart on the Copyboard Glass with the front side facing upward, and make one single-sided copy.
  • Adjustment
  • 157

    Page 166

  • Compare the length of the image in the feed direction of the test chart with that of the copied paper, and perform
  • adjustment if necessary. Execute the following service mode.

    • Copier > Adjust > Adj-Xy > Adj-X-Mg

    Enter the value and adjust the image position. (Adjustment value: in increments of 0.01%)
  • To enlarge the copied image => Increase the value.
  • To reduce the copied image => Decrease the value.
  • A

    < When a copied image is long > < When a copied image is short >

    A

    Copy of the test chart Test chart Feed direction Copy of the test chart Test chart Feed direction
  • Write the new adjustment value on the service label.
  • Make one copy of the image, and check the copied image.
  • ■ After Replacing the Reader Unit
  • Enter the values of the Standard White Plate signal data (X, Y, Z) written on the label affixed at the upper left of the
  • Copyboard Glass, and write the entered values on the service label.

    Xxxx

    Yyyy

    Zzzz

    • Copier > Adjust > Ccd > W-Plt-X

    • Copier > Adjust > Ccd > W-Plt-Y

    • Copier > Adjust > Ccd > W-Plt-Z

  • Adjustment
  • 158

    Page 167

  • CIS light intensity adjustment
  • Enter a provisional value.
  • Change all the adjustment values of the LED lighting time for RGB colors to "0".

    • Copier > Adjust > Ccd > Led-Bw-R

    • Copier > Adjust > Ccd > Led-Bw-G

    • Copier > Adjust > Ccd > Led-Bw-B

    • Copier > Adjust > Ccd > Led-Cl-R

    • Copier > Adjust > Ccd > Led-Cl-G

    • Copier > Adjust > Ccd > Led-Cl-B

  • Execute light intensity adjustment for the Scanner Unit (CIS) at ADF reading. (Be sure to close the ADF.)
  • • Copier > Function > Ccd > Bw-Agc

    • Copier > Function > Ccd > Cl-Agc

  • Check the adjustment result.
  • Whether the operation was successful or failed is not shown on the UI, so perform the following procedure to judge if the operation was successful or failed. If the values entered in step 1 have been changed, the operation result is judged to be "successful" (end of adjustment). If all the values entered in step 1 remain "0", turn OFF and then ON the power and perform step 2 again.
  • Automatic adjustment of the stream reading position
  • Enter a provisional value.
  • Change the adjustment value of the reading position at ADF stream reading to "-20".

    • Copier > Adjust> Adj-Xy > Strd-Pos

  • Execute automatic detection of CIS reading position at ADF stream reading.
  • • Copier > Function > Install > Strd-Pos

  • Check the adjustment result.
  • Whether the operation was successful or failed is not shown on the UI, so perform the following procedure to judge if the operation was successful or failed. If the value entered in step 1 has been changed, the operation result is judged to be "successful" (end of adjustment). Write the new adjustment value on the service label. If the value entered in step 1 remains "-20", turn OFF and then ON the power and perform step 2 again.
  • Adjustment of the white level
  • Enter a provisional value.
  • Change all the shading target values at ADF reading to "0".

    • Copier > Adjust > Ccd > Dftar-R

    • Copier > Adjust > Ccd > Dftar-G

    • Copier > Adjust > Ccd > Dftar-B

    • Copier > Adjust > Ccd > Dftar-Bw

  • Place a sheet of A4 or LTR blank paper on the Copyboard Glass of the reader, and execute white level adjustment
  • (color) at copyboard reading.

    • Copier > Function > Ccd > Df-Wlvl1

  • Place the same blank paper on the ADF, and execute white level adjustment (color) at ADF reading.
  • • Copier > Function > Ccd > Df-Wlvl2

  • Place a sheet of A4 or LTR blank paper on the Copyboard Glass of the reader again, and execute white level adjustment
  • (B&W) at copyboard reading.

    • Copier > Function > Ccd > Df-Wlvl3

  • Place the same blank paper on the ADF again, and execute white level adjustment (B&W) at ADF reading.
  • • Copier > Function > Ccd > Df-Wlvl4

  • Check the adjustment result.
  • Whether the operation was successful or failed is not shown on the UI, so perform the following procedure to judge if the operation was successful or failed. If the values entered in step 1 have been changed, the operation result is judged to be "successful" (end of adjustment). Write the new adjustment values on the service label. If the values entered in step 1 remain "0", turn OFF and then ON the power and perform steps 2 to 5 again.
  • Adjustment
  • 159

    Page 168

  • Enter the parameter values written on the "D15xx/MF41x/MF51x Reader Adjustment Sheet" included with the Reader
  • Unitinservice mode, and write the entered values on the service label.

    • Copier > Adjust > Adj-Xy > Adj-X

    • Copier > Adjust > Adj-Xy > Adj-Y

    • Copier > Adjust > Adj-Xy > Adf-X-Mg

    • Copier > Adjust > Ccd > 50-Rg

    • Copier > Adjust > Ccd > 50-Gb

    • Copier > Adjust > Ccd > 100-Rg

    • Copier > Adjust > Ccd > 100-Gb

    • Copier > Adjust > Pascal > Ofst-P-K

    ■ After Replacing the Reader Upper Cover Unit
  • Enter the values of the Standard White Plate signal data (X, Y, Z) written on the label affixed at the upper left of the
  • Copyboard Glass, and write the entered values on the service label.

    Xxxx

    Yyyy

    Zzzz

    • Copier > Adjust > Ccd > W-Plt-X

    • Copier > Adjust > Ccd > W-Plt-Y

    • Copier > Adjust > Ccd > W-Plt-Z

  • CIS light intensity adjustment
  • Enter a provisional value.
  • Change all the adjustment values of the LED lighting time for RGB colors to "0".

    • Copier > Adjust > Ccd > Led-Bw-R

    • Copier > Adjust > Ccd > Led-Bw-G

    • Copier > Adjust > Ccd > Led-Bw-B

    • Copier > Adjust > Ccd > Led-Cl-R

    • Copier > Adjust > Ccd > Led-Cl-G

    • Copier > Adjust > Ccd > Led-Cl-B

  • Adjustment
  • 160

    Page 169

  • Execute light intensity adjustment for the Scanner Unit (CIS) at ADF reading. (Be sure to close the ADF.)
  • • Copier > Function > Ccd > Bw-Agc

    • Copier > Function > Ccd > Cl-Agc

  • Check the adjustment result.
  • Whether the operation was successful or failed is not shown on the UI, so perform the following procedure to judge if the operation was successful or failed. If the values entered in step 1 have been changed, the operation result is judged to be "successful" (end of adjustment). If all the values entered in step 1 remain "0", turn OFF and then ON the power and perform step 2 again.
  • Automatic adjustment of the stream reading position
  • Enter a provisional value.
  • Change the adjustment value of the reading position at ADF stream reading to "-20".

    • Copier > Adjust> Adj-Xy > Strd-Pos

  • Execute automatic detection of CIS reading position at ADF stream reading.
  • • Copier > Function > Install > Strd-Pos

  • Check the adjustment result.
  • Whether the operation was successful or failed is not shown on the UI, so perform the following procedure to judge if the operation was successful or failed. If the value entered in step 1 has been changed, the operation result is judged to be "successful" (end of adjustment). Write the new adjustment value on the service label. If the value entered in step 1 remains "-20", turn OFF and then ON the power and perform step 2 again.
  • Adjustment of the white level
  • Enter a provisional value.
  • Change all the shading target values at ADF reading to "0".

    • Copier > Adjust > Ccd > Dftar-R

    • Copier > Adjust > Ccd > Dftar-G

    • Copier > Adjust > Ccd > Dftar-B

    • Copier > Adjust > Ccd > Dftar-Bw

  • Place a sheet of A4 or LTR blank paper on the Copyboard Glass of the reader, and execute white level adjustment
  • (color) at copyboard reading.

    • Copier > Function > Ccd > Df-Wlvl1

  • A Place the same blank paper on the ADF, and execute white level adjustment (color) at ADF reading.
  • • Copier > Function > Ccd > Df-Wlvl2

  • Place a sheet of A4 or LTR blank paper on the Copyboard Glass of the reader again, and execute white level adjustment
  • (B&W) at copyboard reading.

    • Copier > Function > Ccd > Df-Wlvl3

  • Place the same blank paper on the ADF again, and execute white level adjustment (B&W) at ADF reading.
  • • Copier > Function > Ccd > Df-Wlvl4

  • Check the adjustment result.
  • Whether the operation was successful or failed is not shown on the UI, so perform the following procedure to judge if the operation was successful or failed. If the values entered in step 1 have been changed, the operation result is judged to be "successful" (end of adjustment). Write the new adjustment values on the service label. If the values entered in step 1 remain "0", turn OFF and then ON the power and perform steps 2 to 5 again.
  • Adjustment of the image position (horizontal scanning direction) at ADF reading
  • Place a test chart on the ADF, and make one single-sided copy.
  • Adjustment
  • 161

    Page 170

  • Compare the side registration of the test chart with that of the copied paper, and perform adjustment if necessary.
  • Copy of the test chart Feed direction Execute the following service mode.

    • Copier > Adjust > Adj-Xy > Adj-Y-Df

    Enter the value and adjust the image position. (Adjustment value: in increments of 0.1 mm)
  • If the image is displaced toward the rear side => Decrease the value.
  • If the image is displaced toward the front side => Increase the value.
  • A

    A

    < When a copied image moves to the rear > < When a copied image moves to the front > Copy of the test chart Copy of the test chart Test chart Test chart Feed direction Feed direction
  • Write the new adjustment value on the service label.
  • Adjustment of the image position (horizontal scanning direction) at copyboard reading
  • Place a test chart on the Copyboard Glass, and make one single-sided copy.
  • Adjustment
  • 162

    Page 171

  • Compare the side registration of the test chart with that of the copied paper, and perform adjustment if necessary.
  • Copy of the test chart Feed direction Execute the following service mode.

    • Copier > Adjust > Adj-Xy > Adj-Y

    Enter the value and adjust the image position. (Adjustment value: in increments of 0.1 mm)
  • If the image is displaced toward the rear side => Decrease the value.
  • If the image is displaced toward the front side => Increase the value.
  • A

    A

    < When a copied image moves to the rear > < When a copied image moves to the front > Copy of the test chart Copy of the test chart Test chart Test chart Feed direction Feed direction

  • Write the new adjustment value on the service label.
  • Adjustment of the image position (vertical scanning direction) at copyboard reading
  • Place a test chart on the Copyboard Glass, and make one single-sided copy.
  • Adjustment
  • 163

    Page 172

  • Compare the image leading edge of the test chart with that of the copied paper, and perform adjustment if necessary.
  • Copy of the test chart Feed direction Execute the following service mode.

    • Copier > Adjust > Adj-Xy > Adj-X

    Enter the value and adjust the image position. (Adjustment value: in increments of 0.1 mm)
  • If the image is displaced toward the trailing edge => Decrease the value.
  • If the image is displaced toward the leading edge => Increase the value.
  • A

    A

    < When a copied image moves to the trailing edge > < When a copied image moves to the leading edge > Copy of the test chart Test chart Feed direction Feed direction Copy of the test chart Test chart
  • Write the new adjustment value on the service label.
  • Fine adjustment of image magnification ratio (vertical scanning direction) at copyboard reading
  • Place a test chart on the Copyboard Glass with the front side facing upward, and make one single-sided copy.
  • Adjustment
  • 164

    Page 173

  • Compare the length of the image in the feed direction of the test chart with that of the copied paper, and perform
  • adjustment if necessary. Execute the following service mode.

    • Copier > Adjust > Adj-Xy > Adj-X-Mg

    Enter the value and adjust the image position. (Adjustment value: in increments of 0.01%)
  • To enlarge the copied image => Increase the value.
  • To reduce the copied image => Decrease the value.
  • A

    < When a copied image is long > < When a copied image is short >

    A

    Copy of the test chart Test chart Feed direction Copy of the test chart Test chart Feed direction
  • Write the new adjustment value on the service label.
  • Make one copy of the image, and check the copied image.
  • ■ After Replacing the Scoopup Sheet Holder [1] [1]: Scoopup Sheet Holder
  • Automatic adjustment of the stream reading position
  • Enter a provisional value.
  • Change the adjustment value of the reading position at ADF stream reading to "-20".

    • Copier > Adjust> Adj-Xy > Strd-Pos

  • Execute automatic detection of CIS reading position at ADF stream reading.
  • • Copier > Function > Install > Strd-Pos

  • Check the adjustment result.
  • Whether the operation was successful or failed is not shown on the UI, so perform the following procedure to judge if the operation was successful or failed. If the value entered in step 1 has been changed, the operation result is judged to be "successful" (end of adjustment). Write the new adjustment value on the service label. If the value entered in step 1 remains "-20", turn OFF and then ON the power and perform step 2 again.
  • Adjustment
  • 165

    Page 174

  • Adjustment of the white level
  • Enter a provisional value.
  • Change all the shading target values at ADF reading to "0".

    • Copier > Adjust > Ccd > Dftar-R

    • Copier > Adjust > Ccd > Dftar-G

    • Copier > Adjust > Ccd > Dftar-B

    • Copier > Adjust > Ccd > Dftar-Bw

  • Place a sheet of A4 or LTR blank paper on the Copyboard Glass of the reader, and execute white level adjustment
  • (color) at copyboard reading.

    • Copier > Function > Ccd > Df-Wlvl1

  • Place the same blank paper on the ADF, and execute white level adjustment (color) at ADF reading.
  • • Copier > Function > Ccd > Df-Wlvl2

  • Place a sheet of A4 or LTR blank paper on the Copyboard Glass of the reader again, and execute white level adjustment
  • (B&W) at copyboard reading.

    • Copier > Function > Ccd > Df-Wlvl3

  • Place the same blank paper on the ADF again, and execute white level adjustment (B&W) at ADF reading.
  • • Copier > Function > Ccd > Df-Wlvl4

  • Check the adjustment result.
  • Whether the operation was successful or failed is not shown on the UI, so perform the following procedure to judge if the operation was successful or failed. If the values entered in step 1 have been changed, the operation result is judged to be "successful" (end of adjustment). Write the new adjustment values on the service label. If the values entered in step 1 remain "0", turn OFF and then ON the power and perform steps 2 to 5 again. Controller System ■ After Replacing the Main Controller PCB ● Actions before Replacement

    Caution:

  • Write down the serial number of the host machine.
  • [Status Monitor] key > Device Status > Serial Number
  • Back up user data (settings, registered data, etc.) and service mode data for setting and registration after PCB
  • replacement. *Take notes if data is unable to back up. Backup Procedure Perform backup of user data (such as Settings/Registration data) and service mode data in preparation to set/register them again after replacing the PCB. Write down the data which cannot be backed up.
  • Write down the data of Menu > System Settings > Device Information> Location.
  • Export user data using remote UI.
  • Insert the USB memory into the host machine, and execute COPIER > FUNCTION > SYSTEM > EXPORT to write the setting
  • values of the service mode to the USB memory.
  • Write down the serial number of the host machine.
  • Write down the each factory adjustment value written on the service label. (Enter them after replacement.)
  • Reference: The data recorded on the Main Controller can be backed up and restored by the following procedure. Storage desti- nation Backup target Backup procedure USB flash drive Settings of [Menu] Connect the USB flash drive . (The USB port on the rear side of the host machine cannot be used.)
  • Home key > Menu > System Management Settings > Import/Export of Settings >
  • Export Remove the USB flash drive.
  • [Status Monitor] key > Device Status > Remove Memory Media
  • Adjustment
  • 166

    Page 175

    Storage desti- nation Backup target Backup procedure USB flash drive Service mode setting values Connect the USB flash drive . (The USB port on the rear side of the host machine cannot be used.)

    • Copier > Function > System > Export

    Remove the USB flash drive.
  • [Status Monitor] key > Device Status > Remove Memory Media
  • Pc

    Settings of [Menu] , Service mode setting values

    • Copier > Option > User > Smd-Expt > 1

    Save the backup file to any location.
  • Remote UI: Menu > Import/Export > Export > Start Exporting
  • ● After replacing main controller PCB
  • Setting of destination/paper size group
  • Copier > Option > Body > Locale

  • [Settings] 1: Japan, 2: North America, 3: Korea, 4: China, 5: Taiwan, 6: Europe, 7: Asia, 8: Oceania
  • Copier > Option > Body > Size-Lc

  • [Settings] 1: AB series, 2: Inch series, 3: A series, 4: AB/Inch series
  • Clearing Setting/Registration data
  • Copier > Function > Clear > All

    Once executed, the following data are cleared according to the values of LOCALE and SIZE-LC set in step 1
  • Setting/Registration data (Change the settings back to the initial settings)
  • Service Mode data. (Change the settings back to the initial settings)
  • Job IDs
  • Log data
  • Dates
  • Following data is not cleared.
  • Service counter
  • Reader/ADF Adjustment data
  • Turn OFF and then ON the main power.
  • Operate according to the instruction on the screen since the initial installation mode is activated. (Setting the date/
  • time)
  • Enter the serial number (8-digit alphanumeric) in Menu > System Settings > Device Information > Location.
  • After selecting COPIER > OPTION > SERIAL > SN-MAIN, press Apply key to write the serial number entered in step
  • 5 in the Main Controller PCB. After writing, the serial number entered in "Location" in step 5 is deleted.
  • Turn OFF and then ON the main power.
  • Execute COPIER > FUNCTION > MISC-P > SPEC to output the spec report to check the serial number (Body.No.).
  • Enter the data backed up earlier in Menu > System Settings > Device Information > Location.
  • Import the service mode data backed up before replacement.
  • Insert the USB flash drive into the host machine, and execute COPIER > FUNCTION > SYSTEM > IMPORT.
  • Import user data using remote UI.
  • Uninstall the drivers on the user's PC.
  • *For the procedure, refer to the MF Driver Installation Guide.
  • Reinstall the drivers which were uninstalled.
  • *For the procedure, refer to the MF Driver Installation Guide.
  • Execute COPIER > FUNCTION > CLEAR > COUNTER to clear the service counter.
  • Correction of coordinate position of Touch Panel in the following service mode.
  • Copier > Adjust > Panel > Touchchk

  • Adjustment
  • 167

    Page 176

    Troubleshooting 7 Test Print...........................................169 Cartridge Log Report.........................170 Trouble Shooting Items.....................172 Debug Log.........................................175

    Page 177

    Test Print Test Pages Printing test pages helps determine if the printer is functioning.

    Caution:

    There are two types of test pages: engine-test page and formatter-test page. Print a test page to make sure the printer engine and the formatter are functioning. ■ Engine-test Page There are two types of engine-test pages simplex print and duplex print. a. Simplex print Open and close the cartridge door three times continuously within 2 seconds during the standby period. The engine-test page should have a test print pattern on one side of media as shown below. b. Duplex print Open and close the cartridge door five times continuously within 2 seconds during the standby period. The engine-test page should have a test print pattern on both sides of media as shown below. ■ Controller Test Print This product provides the following 8 test chart types to determine causes of faulty images. The data for test charts are created in the main controller. If no problem is found on the output test charts, the cause may lie in the PDL input or the reader. TYPE No. can be selected in TESTMODE > PRINT > PG-TYPE. TYPE No. pattern image check item 0 Grid chart Right angle accuracy Straight line accuracy 1 Halftone Transfer failure, Black line, White line, Mar- gin 2 Solid black Transfer failure, White line, Margin 3 Solid white Fogging 4 17 gradations Gradation, Black line, White line 5 Thin horizontal line Black line, White line, Parallelism 6 PASCAL correction chart
  • 7
  • Chart 128
  • Troubleshooting
  • 169

    Page 178

    Cartridge Log Report Logs such as history of cartridge replacement are output as a report. There are two types of cartridge log reports; one for users and one for service technicians.

    Caution:

    Do not provide users with the cartridge log report for service technicians because it contains detailed information that is not disclosed to end users.

    [1] [2] [3] Cartridge Log Report (For service technicians) No. Description [1] Replacement logs [2] Cartridge type: The number of times a non-genuine cartridge has been detected [3] Non-genuine cartridge page count

    Note:

    In addition to output as a report, cartridge logs can also be displayed on the remote UI service mode screen (for service technicians) or remote UI screen (for users).
  • To display cartridge logs (for service technicians):
  • Service Report > Crg-Log

  • To display cartridge logs (for users):
  • Status Monitor/Cancel > Cartridge Log Output method Execute the following service mode to output a cartridge log report for service technicians.
  • To output a report on cartridge replacement history:
  • Copier > Function > Misc-P > Crg-Log

    Note:

  • To output a cartridge log report (for users):
  • Menu > Output Reports > Print List > Cartridge Log Report Replacement logs The record of replacement and usage of cartridges will be printed.
  • Troubleshooting
  • 170

    Page 179

    Caution:

    Just after the cartridge has been replaced with a genuine cartridge or when a non-genuine cartridge is used, accurate information cannot be obtained and a random or approximate value may be printed. Item Description Remarks (1) Serial No. Serial number of the cartridge

    (2) Type Cartridge type

  • C1: Genuine
  • C2 to C8: Non-genuine
  • C0: Unknown
  • (3) Cpcty. Cartridge capacity Displayed in accordance with the toner fillup amount (4/6) First/Last Used The date and time it was installed / last used

    (S1/S5) Pg. Count * Cartridge page count (when it was installed/last used) 00000000 to 99999999 (5/7) Left The amount remaining in the cartridge (when it was instal- led/ last used) 0 to 100% (New: 100%, Non-genuine: -) (S2/S6) Toner * The remaining life of the toner (when it was installed/last used) -128 to 100% (New: 100%, Indefinite: -%) (S3/S7) Drum * The remaining life of the drum (when it was installed/last used) -128 to 100% (New: 100%, Indefinite: -%) (S4/S8) Parts * Not used

    *: S1 to S8 are printed only on reports for service technicians. Number of detections of non-genuine cartridge / Page count of non-genuine cartridge When a non-genuine cartridge is installed, it is classified as a cartridge type C2 to C8 according to the reason for judging it nongenuine, and the number of detections of each type and the number of pages printed with the cartridge installed are recorded. Reason for judg- ing it non-genuine Cartridge type Description Report for users* Report for service

    Oem

    C3

    C5

    The number of detections of an OEM cartridge, and the number of pages printed Communication error C2

    C4

    The number of detections of a cartridge without memory and the number of pages printed Refill

    C3

    C6

    The number of detections of a cartridge prepared by refilling toner into a genuine cartridge, and the number of pages printed Copied memory

    C3

    C7

    The number of detections of a cartridge prepared by refilling toner into a genuine cartridge and copying the contents of a normal memory, and the number of pages printed Authentication failed

    C2

    C8

    The number of detections of a cartridge that cannot be authenticated, and the number of pages printed *: Only C2 and C3 are displayed. The total count of the values of the reasons for judging the cartridge non-genuine is displayed.
  • Troubleshooting
  • 171

    Page 180

    Trouble Shooting Items Special Mode This product has settings called Special Mode to solve print quality troubles. This function can be executed in the following user mode.

  • Menu> Adjust / Maintenance > Special mode
  • Special mode Options Details Special Mode A

    Off

    Mode 1 Mode 2 Mode 3 Mode 4 Streaks may appear on printouts depending on the paper type or the environmental condi- tions. In this case, setting this item may solve the problem. The improvement effect is increased in the following order. (Effect: Weak) -> -> -> -> (Effect: Strong)
  • When printing from the computer, the setting in the printer driver takes precedence.
  • When the setting of [Graphics Mode] in the printer driver is changed to [UFR II Mode], the setting in the operation panel takes precedence.
  • This item cannot be set when is set to one of
  • to .
  • Print density will be lighter when you select stronger improvement. It may also result in
  • less sharp edges and rougher details.
  • If the problem cannot be solved in spite of this item having been set, set Mode D> to . Special Mode U

    Off

    On

    Toner smudges and splatters may appear around printed characters, graphics, etc. depend- ing on the paper type or the environmental conditions (more specifically when you print on heavy paper or use the machine in an environment with low humidity). In this case, setting this item to may solve the problem. When you set this item to , print quality may be lower depending on the paper type or the operating environment (more specifically when you print on thin paper or use the machine in an environment with high humidity). Special Mode V

    Off

    Mode 1 Mode 2 If the printed paper curls when you are using paper having absorbed moisture, set this item. The improvement effect is increased in the following order. (Effect: Weak) -> -> (Effect: Strong)
  • Paper curls and creases can be minimized by changing the paper type and usage con-
  • ditions, without needing to change the setting.
  • Printing speed becomes slower when you select stronger improvement.
  • Special Mode Z (only for copying)

    Off

    Mode 1 Mode 2 Mode 3 Blurred smudges may appear on copied paper depending on the paper type or the environ- mental conditions. In this case, setting this item may solve the problem. The improvement effect is increased in the following order. (Effect: Weak) -> -> -> (Effect: Strong)
  • Streaks can be minimized by changing the paper type or usage conditions, without
  • needing to change the setting.
  • Print density will be lighter when you select stronger improvement. It may also result in
  • less sharp edges and rougher details.
  • If the problem cannot be solved in spite of this item having been set, set Mode D> to . Special Mode B

    Off

    Mode 1 Mode 2 Mode 3 Streaks may appear on printouts immediately after you replace the toner cartridge or when you print for the first time after a long time. In this case, setting this item may solve the problem. The improvement effect is increased in the following order. (Effect: Weak) -> -> -> (Effect: Strong)
  • If you change the paper type or the printing environment, liner stains may not appear
  • on the printed paper without any setting.
  • Printing speed becomes slower when you select stronger improvement.
  • Special Mode C

    Off

    On

    When printing received fax documents or reports or lists, blurred smudges may appear on printouts depending on the paper type or the environmental conditions. In this case, setting this item to may solve the problem.
  • This item is only effective for printing received fax documents or reports or lists.
  • If you set this item to , the printing speed becomes slower.
  • If the problem cannot be solved in spite of this item having been set, set Mode D> to .
  • Troubleshooting
  • 172

    Page 181

    Special mode Options Details Special Mode D

    Off

    On

    Streaks may appear on printouts depending on the paper type or the environmental condi- tions. Setting this item to may solve the problem. Also, setting this item to will reduce the operating noise during printing.
  • Streaks can be minimized by changing the paper type or usage conditions, without
  • needing to change the setting.
  • If you set this item to , the printing speed becomes slower.
  • Trailing edge image soiling [Cause] The image is extended when the paper feed speed is increased due to the temperature rising in the machine. This causes the trailing edge margin to become narrow, resulting in the occurrence of image soiling (transfer toner scattering).

    Note:

    Because paper slightly shrinks due to its passing through the Fixing Assembly once when printing the 1st side, this symptom is likely to occur on the 2nd side. [Field Remedy] Remedy (1): Set the Special Mode U to ON. Effect: Image soiling is controlled by changing the settings of transfer high voltage current. Remedy (2): Change the paper type mode from "Plain" to "Plain L". Effect: Fixing control temperature is reduced => Temperature rising in the machine is controlled => Reduction of trailing edge margin is controlled. When the effect is not enough with remedy (1), perform the remedies (1) + (2). Repetitive Image Defects Ruler Foreign matters or scraches on rollers may cause image failures on the regular intervals in the vertical scanning direction of the image. Field remedy Clean or replace the corresponding parts according to the following table. Component Outer circumference (mm) Registration roller About 43 Primary charging roller About 38 Photosensitive drum About 75 Developing roller About 42 Transfer roller About 39 Fixing film unit About 57 Pressure roller About 63

    Caution:

    The outer circumference may be different from the width of the image failure depending on the factors including processing speed and/or amount of image shrink/expansion. Nip-width Specifications The nip-width of the fixing unit is not adjustable in this printer, however the improper nip-width may cause the poor fixing.
  • Select TESTMODE > PRINT > PG-TYPE, and set the value to "2". (Solid black is printed.)
  • Select TESTMODE > PRINT > START, and press the Apply key.
  • Turn the printed side of the solid black printed paper down, and place it in the cassette of the machine.
  • Troubleshooting
  • 173

    Page 182

  • Select TESTMODE > PRINT > PG-TYPE, and set the value to "3". (Blank image is printed.)
  • Select TESTMODE > PRINT > START, and press the Apply key.
  • Open the Front Door immediately before the paper is delivered (when the paper is fed through the Fixing Assembly),
  • and take out the printed paper after leaving it for 10 seconds or longer.
  • Measure the glossy part on the printed sheet as shown in the figure below to confirm if the width is in the tolerable
  • ranges.
  • Center (a): 7.1±1.0 mm
  • Edge (b) , (c): 7.1±1.0 mm
  • c b a Media feed direction Center of A4 sized paper
  • Troubleshooting
  • 174

    Page 183

    Debug Log Function Overview The debug log is a log that analyzes the program behavior of the machine to enable developers to identify problems. This machine is embedded with a function that compiles the log of the behavior of each software module as debug log and outputs it as integrated log for analyzing problems. Be sure to collect the debug log when the Support Dept. of sales company so instructs. Note that there is no need for service technicians to check the content of collected debug log. Cases in which collection of debug log is effective Collection of debug log is effective in the following cases:

  • Neither the Support Dept. of sales company nor CINC can reproduce the trouble that occurred at the customer site
  • When the error frequency is low
  • When the failure is suspected to be due to firmware rather than a mechanical/electrical failure.
  • Caution:

    If the procedure for reproducing the failure is clear and the Support Dept. of sales company and CINC can reproduce it, collection of debug log is not necessary. Conditions for collecting logs Conditions for not being able to collect logs In the following cases, the procedure for obtaining logs is not required because logs cannot be obtained.
  • Service mode screen cannot be accessed
  • The machine cannot recognize a USB flash drive
  • No USB port is installed in the machine (when the model has only a copy function)
  • What is necessary to collect logs A USB flash drive that satisfies the following conditions is required to obtain the debug logs of the machine:
  • Formatted in FAT 16/FAT32
  • There is a free space of approx. 100MB.
  • Can be recognized by the machine
  • ■ Conditions for not being able to collect logs In the following cases, the procedure for obtaining logs is not required because logs cannot be obtained.
  • Service mode screen cannot be accessed
  • The machine cannot recognize a USB flash drive
  • No USB port is installed in the machine (when the model has only a copy function)
  • ■ What is necessary to collect logs A USB flash drive that satisfies the following conditions is required to obtain the debug logs of the machine:
  • Formatted in FAT 16/FAT32
  • There is a free space of approx. 100MB.
  • Can be recognized by the machine
  • Collection procedure The following shows the procedure for collecting the debug log from the Control Panel.
  • Troubleshooting
  • 175

    Page 184

  • Connect a USB flash drive to the machine. In the case of a model having a USB connector on a side of the Control
  • Panel, be sure to connect the USB flash drive to the Control Panel. In the case of a model having a USB connector only on the rear side, connect the USB flash drive to the USB connector on the rear side.

    Caution:

    In the case of a model having a USB connector on the Control Panel, if the USB flash drive is connected to the USB connector on the rear side, debug logs are not transferred to the USB flash drive.
  • Execute the following service mode from the Control Panel or Remote UI.
  • • Copier > Function > System > Logwrite

    Service Mode

    Copier

    Feeder

    Fax

    Testmode

    Display

    Io

    Adjust

    Function

    Option

    Counter

    Ccd

    Clear

    Misc-R

    Misc-P

    System

    Viffnc

    Splman

    Panel-Up

    Logwrite

    Import

    Export

    Save-Sm

    Rstr-Sm

    Log2Usb

    Logwrite ?

    Yes No Executing... "Executing..." is displayed while log collection is executed. When it is completed, the screen shows the service mode screen again.
  • Execute the following service mode from the Control Panel or Remote UI.
  • • Copier > Function > System > Log2Usb

    Service Mode

    Copier

    Feeder

    Fax

    Testmode

    Display

    Io

    Adjust

    Function

    Option

    Counter

    Ccd

    Clear

    Misc-R

    Misc-P

    System

    Viffnc

    Splman

    Panel-Up

    Logwrite

    Import

    Export

    Save-Sm

    Rstr-Sm

    Log2Usb

    Log2Usb ?

    Yes No Executing... "Executing..." is displayed while log collection is executed. When it is completed, the screen shows the service mode screen again.
  • Remove the USB flash drive by the correct procedure.
  • Connect the USB flash drive to the PC, and check that the log file shown below has been saved.
  • Output by LOGWRITE : SUBLOG.TXT
  • Output by LOG2USB : SUBLOG_yyyymmdd.HHMMSS_xxx.gz (the file may be divided into multiple files)
  • Troubleshooting
  • 176

    Page 185

    Error/Jam/Alarm 8 Overview........................................... 178 Error codes........................................181 Jam code...........................................184 Alarm Code....................................... 186

    Page 186

    Overview This section describes codes shown in case any problem is occurred. Since this product does not collect logs for alarms, no alarm code is shown. Code type Explanation Reference Error code This code is displayed when an error occurs on the machine. “Error codes” on page 181 Jam code This code is displayed when a jam occurs inside the machine. “Jam code” on page 184 Alarm code None

  • Error/Jam Log indication
  • Error log

    Service Mode > Copier > Display > Err

    090831 1624 㻱㻝㻜㻜㻙㻜㻞㻜㻜 Year/Month/Day Time/Minute Error Code Indication example

    090831 1624 E100-0200

    ------ ---- ------ ---- ------ ---- ------ ---- ------ ----

    Err

    Jam log

    Service Mode > Copier > Display > Jam

    090831 1624 0-1234-1-02

    7Lph0Lqxwh

    -Dp&Rgh

    3Dshu6L]H&Rgh

    /RfdwlrqFrgh

    3DshuIhhgSrvlwlrq

    Indication example

    Jam

    090831 1624 0-1234-1-02 ------ ---- ------ ---- ------ ---- ------ ---- ------ ----

    Jam

    Alarm log

    Service Mode > Copier > Display > Alarm-2

    Service Mode > Copier > Display > Alarm-3

  • Error/Jam/Alarm
  • 178

    Page 187

    090831䕧1624䕧3-1234567-123456 Year/Month/Day Time/Minute Alarm Code For R&D use Alarm details code Indication example

    Alarm-2

    090831 1624 3-1234567-123456 ------ ---- ------ ---- ------ ---- ------ ---- ------ ----

    Jam/Err Log Report

    Output procedure of the JAM/ERR LOG REPORT. Service Mode > COPIER> FUNCTION> MISC-P > ERR-LOG [1] [2] [3] [4] [5] [6] [7] [8] [9] [10] [11] [12] [13] [14] [15] [16] [17] No. Item 1 Jam occurrence number (the larger the number, the newer the jam) 2 Date of jam occurrence (month/day) 3 Time of jam occurrence 4 Time of jam recovery 5 Position summary code (3: Host machine (including the Pickup Assembly), 4: Feeder) 6 Not Used (For R&D) 7 Jam code 8 Total number of printed copies at the time of occurrence 9 Pickup position code (0: ADF or Multi-purpose Tray, 1: Cassette 1, 2: Cassette 2, 7: 2-sided) 10 Paper size 11 Error occurrence number (the larger the number, the newer the error) 12 Date of error occurrence (month/day) 13 Time of error occurrence 14 Position summary code (3: Host machine (including the Pickup Assembly)) 15 Error code 16 Error details code 17 Total number of printed copies at the time of occurrence
  • Error/Jam/Alarm
  • 179

    Page 188

    Position Summary Code The position summary information is displayed in a single digit and has the meaning shown below. Device Position summary code Host machine 3

    Adf *1

    4 *1: Printed only on Jam history. Position code When jam occurs, pickup location is indicated wuth the following pickup position code. Device position code

    Adf

    0 MP Tray 0 Cassette 1 1 Option Cassette 2 Duplex 7 Paper Size Code Paper size is coded and indicated with the size codes as shown below when a paper jam occurs. Paper size Paper size code Control Panel (UI) Jam/Err Log Report *1
  • 00 *2
  • 00000 *2

    A4

    02 00002

    B5

    07 00007

    A5

    03 00003

    Lgl

    0C

    00012

    Ltr

    0D

    00013

    Stmt

    3C

    00060

    Exec

    0A

    00010 Oficio

    3E

    00062 Oficio (Brazil)

    Cc

    00204 Oficio (Mexico)

    D2

    00210 LTR (Government)

    D0

    00208 LGL (Government)

    D1

    00209 Foolscap/Folio

    3D

    00061 Foolscap (Australia)

    Ca

    00202 LGL (India)

    D7

    00215 3 x 5 inch 40 00064 Envelope No.10 (COM10) 16 00022 Envelope Monarch 17 00023 Envelope C5 15 00021 Envelope DL 18 00024 *1: Size code on the JAM/ERR LOG REPORT. *2: This code is displayed when an ADF jam occurs.
  • Error/Jam/Alarm
  • 180

    Page 189

    Error codes If an error occurs, turn OFF and then ON the power first to check whether the same error occurs. (In the case of controller-related errors, the machine may recover by turning OFF and then ON the power.) *: Supported by model with FAX only E Code Title Detection description Remedy

    E000 - 0000

    Error in temperature rising of Fixing As- sembly Temperature of the Fix- ing Assembly did not reach a certain tempera- ture within the specified period of time.
  • Check the connector connection between the Fixing Assembly and
  • the Engine Controller PCB.
  • Replace the Fixing Assembly.
  • Replace the Engine Controller PCB.
  • E001 - 0000

    Abnormal high tem- perature of Fixing As- sembly It was detected that the temperature of the Fixing Assembly was abnor- mally high.
  • Check the connector connection between the Fixing Assembly and
  • the Engine Controller PCB.
  • Replace the Fixing Assembly.
  • Replace the Engine Controller PCB.
  • E003 - 0000

    Abnormal low tem- perature of Fixing As- sembly It was detected that the temperature of the Fixing Assembly was abnor- mally low.
  • Check the connector connection between the Fixing Assembly and
  • the Engine Controller PCB.
  • Replace the Fixing Assembly.
  • Replace the Engine Controller PCB.
  • E004 - 0000

    Error in fixing power supply drive circuit The zero cross signal was not detected for the specified period of time or more.
  • Check the connector connection between the Fixing Assembly and
  • the Engine Controller PCB.
  • Replace the Fixing Assembly.
  • Replace the Engine Controller PCB.
  • E014 - 0000

    Error in startup of the Main Motor Revolution of the Main Motor did not reach the specified value.
  • Check the connector connection between the Main Motor and the
  • Engine Controller PCB.
  • Replace the Main Motor.
  • Replace the Engine Controller PCB.
  • E100 - 0000

    Laser Scanner As- sembly error BD cycle of the Laser Scanner Unit was not within the specified range.
  • Check the connector connection between the Main Controller PCB
  • and the Laser Scanner Unit.
  • Check the connector connection between the Relay PCB and the
  • Laser Scanner Unit.
  • Replace the Laser Scanner Unit.
  • E196 - 0000

    Error in the Engine Controller PCB ROM ROM version upgrade of the Engine Controller PCB has not been exe- cuted properly.
  • Replace the Engine Controller PCB.
  • An error was detected in the signal of the J211 (4pin) on the Engine Controller PCB at power- on.
  • Check the contact point of the option drawer connector for con-
  • necting the Paper Cassette and clean it if any foreign matter is present.

    E196 - 2000

    Main Controller PCB writing/reading error Error in writing/reading of the setting values stor- age area in the Main Controller PCB
  • Install the set of the controller firmware.
  • Replace the Main Controller PCB.
  • E196 - 3000

    ROM writing/reading error (eMMC) An error occurred when writing/reading data to/ from the ROM.
  • Install the set of the controller firmware.
  • Replace the Main Controller PCB.
  • E196 - 3001

    ROM-ID mismatch (eMMC) An error occurred when writing/reading data to/ from the ROM.
  • Install the set of the controller firmware.
  • Replace the Main Controller PCB.
  • E202 - 0001

    CIS Unit HP error (outward) The CIS Unit did not move to HP even it moved backward. Read- er HP Sensor error, Reader Motor error, CIS Unit error
  • Replace the Reader HP Sensor.
  • Replace the Reader Motor.
  • Replace the CIS Unit.
  • Replace the Reader Unit.
  • Error/Jam/Alarm
  • 181

    Page 190

    E Code Title Detection description Remedy

    E202 - 0002

    CIS Unit HP error (homeward) The CIS Unit did not move to HP even it moved forward. Reader HP Sensor error, Reader Motor error, CIS Unit er- ror
  • Replace the Reader HP Sensor.
  • Replace the Reader Motor.
  • Replace the CIS Unit.
  • Replace the Reader Unit.
  • E302 - 0001

    Light intensity of the CIS Unit below the reference level When the light intensity is below the reference level at shading
  • Disconnect and then connect the Flexible Cable.
  • Replace the Flexible Cable.
  • Replace the CIS Unit.
  • Replace the Main Controller PCB.
  • E732 - 0000

    Scanner communi- cation error Scanner communication error
  • Install the set of the controller firmware.
  • Replace the Main Controller PCB.
  • E733 - 0000

    Printer communica- tion error Communication error be- tween the Engine Con- troller PCB and the Main Controller PCB occur- red.
  • Check the connector connection between the Engine Controller
  • PCB and the Main Controller PCB.
  • Install the set of the controller firmware.
  • Replace the Main Controller PCB.
  • Replace the Engine Controller PCB.
  • E733-0001

    Received message parity error Communication error oc- curred after successful startup.
  • Turn OFF and then ON the main power.
  • Replace the Main Controller PCB.
  • E733-0004

    Invalid message re- ception error Communication error oc- curred after successful startup.
  • Turn OFF and then ON the main power.
  • Replace the Main Controller PCB.
  • E733-0005

    Message timeout er- ror Communication error oc- curred between the En- gine Controller PCB and the Main Controller PCB.
  • Check the harness/connector connection between the Engine
  • Controller PCB and the Main Controller PCB.
  • Install the set of the controller firmware.
  • Replace the Main Controller PCB.
  • Replace the Engine Controller PCB.
  • E736* - 0000 Communication error with CCU/modem Communication error with CCU/modem, NCU PCB type error
  • Install the set of the controller firmware.
  • Replace the NCU PCB.
  • Replace the Main Controller PCB.
  • E736* - 0001 Error in ROM for backing up fax data An error occurred in ROM for backing up fax data
  • Install the set of the controller firmware.
  • Replace the NCU PCB.
  • Replace the Main Controller PCB.
  • E743 - 0000

    Communication error Communication error of the reader control signal inside the Main Control- ler
  • Check the harness between the Main Controller PCB and the
  • Reader Assembly.
  • Replace the Main Controller PCB.
  • Collect debug log and contact the sales company.
  • E744 - 4000

    Engine ID error Invalid engine connec- tion was detected.
  • Turn OFF and then ON the main power.
  • Check the Engine Controller PCB.
  • Install the Engine Controller PCB.
  • Install the set of the controller firmware.
  • Check the model code. (When the model code and the engine code
  • are mismatched, E744-4000 occurs.)

    E744 - 5000

    Error in the Control Panel PCB Error in the Control Panel PCB (microcomputer)
  • Check the Control Panel PCB, and install the firmware (PANEL).
  • Install the set of the controller firmware.
  • Replace the Main Controller PCB.
  • E744 - 6000

    Communication error with Wireless LAN

    Pcb

    Communication with the Wireless LAN PCB could not be established.
  • Turn OFF and then ON the main power.
  • Check the connection of the Wireless LAN PCB.
  • Install the set of the controller firmware.
  • Replace the Wireless LAN PCB.
  • Replace the Main Controller PCB.
  • E804 - 0004

    Controller Fan error Since the startup of the Controller Fan, the Fan was locked for a speci- fied consecutive period of time.
  • Check power supply to the Controller Fan.
  • Replace the Controller Fan.
  • E805 - 0000

    Main Fan error The Main Fan was locked for a specified consecutive period of time.
  • Check the connection of the Main Fan.
  • Replace the Main Fan.
  • Error/Jam/Alarm
  • 182

    Page 191

    E Code Title Detection description Remedy

    E808 - 0000

    Low-voltage power supply failure detec- tion Printer detected low-volt- age power supply failure.
  • Replace the Engine Controller PCB.
  • Error/Jam/Alarm
  • 183

    Page 192

    Jam code

    Ps2

    Ps3

    Ps204

    Ps205

    Ps201

    Ps915

    Position Summary Code Jam code Types of jam Sensor name/Detection description Sensor number 4 0001 Delay Jam Document End Sensor

    Ps2

    4 0002 Stationary Jam Document End Sensor

    Ps2

    4 0004 Delay Jam Document End Sensor (2nd side)

    Ps2

    4 0005 Stationary Jam Document End Sensor (2nd side)

    Ps2

    4 0071 Sequence jam Timing error
  • 4
  • 0094 Power-on jam Document End Sensor

    Ps2

    4 0096 Other (*1)
  • -
  • 3 0040 Size error The mismatch of the paper size
  • 3
  • 0104 Pickup Delay Jam 1 Top Sensor

    Ps204

    3

    010C

    Fixing Delivery Delay Jam 1 Fixing Delivery Sensor

    Ps915

    3 0144 Pickup Delay Jam 1 Top Sensor

    Ps204

    3

    014C

    Fixing Delivery Delay Jam 1 Fixing Delivery Sensor

    Ps915

    3 0184 Pickup Delay Jam 1 Top Sensor

    Ps204

    3

    018C

    Fixing Delivery Delay Jam 1 Fixing Delivery Sensor

    Ps915

    3

    01C4

    Pickup Delay Jam 1 Top Sensor

    Ps204

    3

    01Cc

    Fixing Delivery Delay Jam 1 Fixing Delivery Sensor

    Ps915

    3 0208 Pickup Stationary Jam 1 Top Sensor

    Ps204

    3 0210 Fixing Delivery Station- ary Jam 1 Fixing Delivery Sensor

    Ps915

  • Error/Jam/Alarm
  • 184

    Page 193

    Position Summary Code Jam code Types of jam Sensor name/Detection description Sensor number 3

    021C

    Paper Wrap Jam 1 Fixing Delivery Sensor

    Ps915

    3 0220 Reverse area Jam Duplex Reverse Sensor

    Ps201

    3 0221 Reverse area Jam 2 Duplex Reverse Sensor

    Ps201

    3 0248 Pickup Stationary Jam 1 Top Sensor/ Media Width Sensor/ Fixing Delivery Sensor

    Ps204/Ps205/

    Ps915

    3 0250 Fixing Delivery Station- ary Jam 1 Fixing Delivery Sensor

    Ps915

    3

    025C

    Paper Wrap Jam 1 Fixing Delivery Sensor

    Ps915

    3 0260 Reverse area Jam Duplex Reverse Sensor

    Ps201

    3 0261 Reverse area Jam 2 Duplex Reverse Sensor

    Ps201

    3 0288 Pickup Stationary Jam 1 Top Sensor/ Media Width Sensor/ Fixing Delivery Sensor

    Ps204/Ps205/

    Ps915

    3 0290 Fixing Delivery Station- ary Jam 1 Fixing Delivery Sensor

    Ps915

    3

    029C

    Paper Wrap Jam 1 Fixing Delivery Sensor

    Ps915

    3

    02A0

    Reverse area Jam Duplex Reverse Sensor

    Ps201

    3

    02A1

    Reverse area Jam 2 Duplex Reverse Sensor

    Ps201

    3

    02C8

    Pickup Stationary Jam 1 Top Sensor/ Media Width Sensor/ Fixing Delivery Sensor

    Ps204/Ps205/

    Ps915

    3

    02Dc

    Paper Wrap Jam 1 Fixing Delivery Sensor

    Ps915

    3

    02D0

    Fixing Delivery Station- ary Jam 1 Fixing Delivery Sensor

    Ps915

    3

    02E0

    Reverse area Jam Duplex Reverse Sensor

    Ps201

    3

    02E1

    Reverse area Jam 2 Duplex Reverse Sensor

    Ps201

    3 1014 Internal Residual Jam 1 Top Sensor/ Media Width Sensor/ Fixing Delivery Sensor/ Duplex Reverse Sensor

    Ps204/Ps205/

    Ps915/ Ps201

    3 1054 Internal Residual Jam 1 Top Sensor/ Media Width Sensor/ Fixing Delivery Sensor/ Duplex Reverse Sensor

    Ps204/Ps205/

    Ps915/ Ps201

    3 1094 Internal Residual Jam 1 Top Sensor/ Media Width Sensor/ Fixing Delivery Sensor/ Duplex Reverse Sensor

    Ps204/Ps205/

    Ps915/ Ps201

    3

    10D4

    Internal Residual Jam 1 Top Sensor/ Media Width Sensor/ Fixing Delivery Sensor/ Duplex Reverse Sensor

    Ps204/Ps205/

    Ps915/ Ps201

    3 1118 Door Open Jam 1 Top Sensor/ Media Width Sensor/ Fixing Delivery Sensor/ Duplex Reverse Sensor

    Ps204/Ps205/

    Ps915/ Ps201

    3 1158 Door Open Jam 1 Top Sensor/ Media Width Sensor/ Fixing Delivery Sensor/ Duplex Reverse Sensor

    Ps204/Ps205/

    Ps915/ Ps201

    3 1198 Door Open Jam 1 Top Sensor/ Media Width Sensor/ Fixing Delivery Sensor/ Duplex Reverse Sensor

    Ps204/Ps205/

    Ps915/ Ps201

    3

    11D8

    Door Open Jam 1 Top Sensor/ Media Width Sensor/ Fixing Delivery Sensor/ Duplex Reverse Sensor

    Ps204/Ps205/

    Ps915/ Ps201

    *1: It does not indicate that a delay in paper feed or a stationary jam was directly detected by the sensor. It is triggered by a trouble in paper feed caused by another error. It can be solved by checking "JAM/ERR LOG REPORT" and performing the remedy for the error that occurred around the same time.
  • Error/Jam/Alarm
  • 185

    Page 194

    Alarm Code There is no alarm code displayed in the control panel. Alarm Codes Generated by UGW Alarm Codes generated by UGW are not shown in the alarm log of the host machine. Alarm Code Detail Code Description 010001 00000000 Counter reading irretrievable for a period of time 010002

    Ffffffff

    Post-error status notification (status retrieval error) 010002

    0Fffffff

    Post-error status notification (error occurring but code unknown) 010002

    00000Fff

    Post-error status notification (normal) 010002 00000xxx Post-error status notification (XXX: code of error occurred) 010004 00000000 Notification of IP address change 040010 00000000 Jam left unsolved 100001 00000000 Toner level low (Bk) 100002 00000000 Toner level low (C) 100003 00000000 Toner level low (M) 100004 00000000 Toner level low (Y)
  • Error/Jam/Alarm
  • 186

    Page 195

    Service Mode 9 Overview........................................... 188 COPIER (Service mode for printer)...192 FEEDER (ADF service mode)...........228

    Fax................................................... 231

    TESTMODE (Service mode for test print, operation check, etc.)........... 237

    Page 196

    Overview Service Mode Menu 㻿㼑㼞㼢㼕㼏㼑㻌㼙㼛㼐㼑 㻯㻻㻼㻵㻱㻾 㻲㻱㻱㻰㻱㻾 㻲㻭㼄 㼀㻱㻿㼀㻹㻻㻰㻱 㻰㻵㻿㻼㻸㻭㼅 㻵㻛㻻 㻭㻰㻶㼁㻿㼀 㻲㼁㻺㻯㼀㻵㻻㻺 㻻㻼㼀㻵㻻㻺 㻯㻻㼁㻺㼀㻱㻾 㻿㻿㻿㼃 㻹㻱㻺㼁 㻺㼁㻹 㻺㻯㼁 㻼㻾㻵㻺㼀 㻲㻭㼄 㻭㻰㻶㼁㻿㼀 㻲㼁㻺㻯㼀㻵㻻㻺 㻿㼑㼞㼢㼕㼏㼑㻌㼙㼛㼐㼑㻌㼒㼛㼞㻌㼏㼛㼜㼕㼑㼞 㻿㼠㼍㼠㼑㻌㼐㼕㼟㼜㼘㼍㼥㻌㼙㼛㼐㼑 㻭㼐㼖㼡㼟㼠㼙㼑㼚㼠㻌㼙㼛㼐㼑 㻻㼜㼑㼞㼍㼠㼕㼛㼚㻌㻛㻌㼕㼚㼟㼜㼑㼏㼠㼕㼛㼚㻌㼙㼛㼐㼑 㻵㻛㻻㻌㼐㼕㼟㼜㼘㼍㼥㻌㼙㼛㼐㼑 㻯㼛㼡㼚㼠㼑㼞㻌㼙㼛㼐㼑 㻿㼜㼑㼏㼕㼒㼕㼏㼍㼠㼕㼛㼚㻌㼟㼑㼠㼠㼕㼚㼓㻌㼙㼛㼐㼑 㻭㼐㼖㼡㼟㼠㼙㼑㼚㼠㻌㼙㼛㼐㼑 㻻㼜㼑㼞㼍㼠㼕㼛㼚㻌㻛㻌㼕㼚㼟㼜㼑㼏㼠㼕㼛㼚㻌㼙㼛㼐㼑 㻭㻰㻲㻌㼟㼑㼞㼢㼕㼏㼑㻌㼙㼛㼐㼑 㻲㻭㼄㻌㼟㼑㼞㼢㼕㼏㼑㻌㼙㼛㼐㼑 㻿㼑㼞㼢㼕㼏㼑㻌㼙㼛㼐㼑㻌㼒㼛㼞㻌㼠㼑㼟㼠㻌㼜㼞㼕㼚㼠㻘㻌㼛㼜㼑㼞㼍㼠㼕㼛㼚㻌㼏㼔㼑㼏㼗㻘㻌㼑㼠㼏㻚 㻮㼕㼠㻌㼟㼣㼕㼠㼏㼔㻌㼞㼑㼓㼕㼟㼠㼞㼍㼠㼕㼛㼚㻌㼙㼛㼐㼑 㻹㼑㼚㼡㻌㼟㼣㼕㼠㼏㼔㻌㼞㼑㼓㼕㼟㼠㼞㼍㼠㼕㼛㼚㻌㼙㼛㼐㼑 㻺㼡㼙㼑㼞㼕㼏㻌㼜㼍㼞㼍㼙㼑㼠㼑㼞㻌㼟㼑㼠㼠㼕㼚㼓㻌㼙㼛㼐㼑 㻺㻯㼁㻌㼜㼍㼞㼍㼙㼑㼠㼑㼞㻌㼟㼑㼠㼠㼕㼚㼓㻌㼙㼛㼐㼑 㻔㻿㼑㼞㼢㼕㼏㼑㻌㼍㼐㼖㼡㼟㼠㼙㼑㼚㼠㻌㼕㼟㻌㼚㼛㼠㻌㼍㼢㼍㼕㼘㼍㼎㼘㼑䠅 㻼㼞㼕㼚㼠㻌㼠㼑㼟㼠㻌㼙㼛㼐㼑 㻲㻭㼄㻌㼠㼑㼟㼠㻌㼙㼛㼐㼑 Backing up Service Mode Each device is tuned at the time of shipment and the tuned values are written on the service label. Because setting values and management data of the host machine are stored in the eMMC of the Main Controller PCB, they need to be backed up before replacing the Main Controller PCB.(Do not remove the eMMC PCB form Main Controller PCB.) Also, restoration of the backup data is necessary after replacing the Main Controller PCB.

  • Backup: Connect a USB memory device to the USB memory port.
  • Function > System > Export

  • Restore: Restore backup data of the USB memory
  • Function > System > Import

    Reference: Saving Registered Data: Remote UI > Settings/Registration > Import/Export > Export Loading Registered Data: Remote UI > Settings/Registration > Import/Export > Import
  • Service Mode
  • 188

    Page 197

    Screen flow of Service mode

  • Initial screen
  • Scroll the screen. : Flick the screen.

    Copier

    Service Mode

    Feeder

    Fax

    Testmode

    Go to Category / Sub category selection screen : Tap the screen. Go to Up category screen : Return key
  • Category / Sub category selection screen
  • Scroll the screen. : Flick the screen. ',63/$< ,2 $'-867 )81&7,21 237,21 Go to Item selection screen : Tap the screen. Go to Initial screen : Return key
  • Item selection screen
  • Select the item : Flick the screen. $'-;< &&' 3$6&$/ 9,)$'- 6&15 Go to Numeric value entry screen : Tap the screen. Go to Category / Sub category selection screen : Return key
  • Numeric value entry screen
  • Enter the setting value. : numeric keypad $'-;<  

    $Sso\

    Switch the sign (+/-) of the value : [*] Key Increment the setting value one by one : [▲] (Tap the screen ) Decrease the setting value one by one : [▼] (Tap the screen ) Change the setting : [Apply] Key (Tap the screen ) Change no settings : Return key
  • Method to display the setting value of switch
  • On decimal display format, display is left aligned. (Comma is put every 3 digits.)
  • On binary display format, the most significant bit is placed at the leftmost position and the least significant bit is placed
  • at the rightmost position. Remote UI Service Mode ■ Function Overview It is possible to display, configure, and execute various service mode modes as well as restart the host machine by using remote

    Ui.

  • Service Mode
  • 189

    Page 198

    ■ Operating conditions In order to operate service mode using Remote UI, the following conditions must be met.

  • Service mode is not used on the Control Panel.
  • If service mode is accessed from the Control Panel of the host machine, "Log-in user exists already." is displayed when service mode is accessed from Remote UI.
  • When Remote UI service mode (this function) is not being logged in by other users
  • When service mode is being accessed from Remote UI, "Remote service mode" is displayed on the UI of the host machine. Remote service mode
  • When Remote UI is enabled in the setting on the Control Panel
  • [Settings/Registration] > [System Settings] > [Remote UI Settings] > [Use Remote UI] > [ON]
  • When the following setting (Remote UI service mode function) is enabled (setting value: 1) in service mode
  • Copier > Option > Body > Rmt-Sw

    0:OFF(default), 1:ON ■ How to Use
  • Activate the Web browser, and access the following URL:
  • http:///servicemode.html
  • Service Mode
  • 190

    Page 199

  • Enter the password, and click [LOGIN].
  • Password required for authentication differs depending on the following service mode setting: COPIER > OPTION > BODY

    > Pswd-Sw

    Combinations of service mode settings and required passwords

    Pswd-Sw

    setting value Password required for authentica- tion Authentication screen 0
  • Password of remote UI service mode
  • 1
  • Password of remote UI service mode
  • Service mode password
  • 2
  • Password of RUI service mode
  • User's system administrator ID
  • Password of system administrator
  • Service mode password
  • Note:

  • If you do not know the password of remote UI service mode, contact the Support Dept. of the sales company.
  • ServiceMode_Password of service mode can be changed in COPIER > OPTION > BODY > SM-PSWD.
  • If you do not know the password of remote UI service mode, contact the Support Dept. of the sales company. When
  • finishing the operation, click [REBOOT] or [Log Out].

    Note:

    If the user logged in and then closed the browser without logging out, connection status remains as "LOGIN". If the user attempts to log in to service mode under "LOGIN" status, exclusive control is executed so that the user cannot access service mode. In that case, wait for a fixed time (3 minutes) from the last access to let the user be automatically logged out, or turn OFF/ON the power of the machine to be forcibly logged out.
  • Service Mode
  • 191

    Page 200

    COPIER (Service mode for printer) DISPLAY (State display mode)

    ■ Version

    COPIER (Service mode for printer) > DISPLAY (State display mode) > VERSION

    Main

    Display of MAIN (main program) version Detail To display the firmware version of Main Controller PCB. Use Case When upgrading the firmware Adj/Set/Operate Method N/A (Display only) Display/Adj/Set Range 00.00 to 99.99

    Boot

    Boot ROM version Detail To display the version of Boot ROM (BOOT program). Use Case When upgrading the firmware Adj/Set/Operate Method N/A (Display only) Display/Adj/Set Range 00.01 to 99.99

    Lang

    Language pack version Detail To display the version of language pack. Use Case When upgrading the firmware Adj/Set/Operate Method N/A (Display only) Display/Adj/Set Range 00.00 to 99.99

    Demodata

    Demo print data version Detail To display the version of demo print data. Since this machine does not have demo print function, "FF.FF"is displayed. Use Case When upgrading the firmware Adj/Set/Operate Method N/A (Display only) Display/Adj/Set Range 00.01 to 99.99

    Econt

    ECONT version Detail To display the version of Engine Controller PCB. Use Case When upgrading the firmware Adj/Set/Operate Method N/A (Display only) Display/Adj/Set Range 00.01 to 99.99

    Panel

    Dspl of Control Panel CPU PCB ROM ver Detail To display the ROM version of Control Panel CPU PCB. Use Case When upgrading the firmware Adj/Set/Operate Method N/A (Display only) Display/Adj/Set Range 00.00 to 99.99 Related Service Mode

    Copier > Function > System > Panel-Up

  • Service Mode
  • 192

    Page 201

    ■ Ccd

    COPIER (Service mode for printer) > DISPLAY (State display mode) > CCD

    Target-B

    Shading target value (B) Detail To display the shading target value of Blue. Continuous display of 0 (minimum) or 2048 (maximum) is considered a failure of the CIS Unit. Use Case At scanned image failure Adj/Set/Operate Method N/A (Display only) Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 2048 Default Value 1202 Related Service Mode

    Copier > Adjust > Ccd > Dftar-B

    Target-G

    Shading target value (G) Detail To display the shading target value of Green. Continuous display of 0 (minimum) or 2048 (maximum) is considered a failure of the CIS Unit. Use Case At scanned image failure Adj/Set/Operate Method N/A (Display only) Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 2048 Default Value 1163 Related Service Mode

    Copier > Adjust > Ccd > Dftar-G

    Target-R

    Shading target value (R) Detail To display the shading target value of Red. Continuous display of 0 (minimum) or 2048 (maximum) is considered a failure of the CIS Unit. Use Case At scanned image failure Adj/Set/Operate Method N/A (Display only) Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 2048 Default Value 1135 Related Service Mode

    Copier > Adjust > Ccd > Dftar-R

    Targetbw

    Shading target value (BW) Detail To display the shading target value at B&W jobs. Continuous display of 0 (minimum) or 2048 (maximum) is considered a failure of the Main Controller PCB. Use Case At scanned image failure Adj/Set/Operate Method N/A (Display only) Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 2048 Default Value 1072 Related Service Mode

    Copier > Adjust > Ccd > Dftar-Bw

    ■ Err

    Error code display screen Up to 20 E codes and detailed codes for system errors can be shown.

    ■ Jam

    Jam code display screen Up to 20 Jam codes and detailed codes for system errors can be shown.
  • Service Mode
  • 193

    Page 202

    ADJUST (Adjustment mode)

    ■ Adj-Xy

    COPIER (Service mode for printer) > ADJUST (Adjustment mode) > ADJ-XY

    Adj-X

    Adj of img pstn in book mode: vert scan Detail To adjust the image reading start position (image leading edge position) in the vertical scanning direction at copyboard reading. When replacing the Main Controller PCB, enter the value of service label. When the non-image width is larger than the standard value, set the smaller value. When out of original area is copied, set the larger value. As the value is incremented by 1, the image position moves to the trailing edge side by 0.1mm. Use Case
  • When replacing the Reader Unit
  • When replacing the CIS Unit (Scanner Unit)
  • When replacing the Main Controller PCB
  • Adj/Set/Operate Method Enter the setting value (switch negative / positive by * key) and press Apply key. Caution After the setting value is changed, write the changed value in the service label. Display/Adj/Set Range -30 to 30 Unit 0.1 mm Default Value 0

    Adj-Y

    Adjustment of image position at copyboard reading (horizontal scanning direction) Detail To adjust the image reading start position in the horizontal scanning direction at copyboard reading. When replacing the Main Controller PCB, enter the value of service label. When the non-image width is larger than the standard value, set the smaller value. When out of original area is copied, set the larger value. As the value is incremented by 1, the image position moves to the front by 0.1mm. Use Case
  • When replacing the Reader Unit
  • When replacing the CIS Unit (Scanner Unit)
  • When replacing the Main Controller PCB
  • Adj/Set/Operate Method Enter the setting value (switch negative / positive by * key) and press Apply key. Caution After the setting value is changed, write the changed value in the service label. Display/Adj/Set Range -15 to 15 Unit 0.1 mm Default Value 0

    Adj-Y-Df

    Adj img pstn in ADF mode:horz scan Detail To adjust the image reading start position in the horizontal scanning direction at ADF reading. When replacing the Main Controller PCB, enter the value of service label. As the value is incremented by 1, the image position moves to the front by 0.1mm. Use Case
  • When replacing the ADF
  • When replacing the CIS Unit (Scanner Unit)
  • When replacing the Main Controller PCB
  • Adj/Set/Operate Method Enter the setting value (switch negative / positive by * key) and press Apply key. Caution After the setting value is changed, write the changed value in the service label. Display/Adj/Set Range -15 to 15 Unit 0.1 mm Default Value 0
  • Service Mode
  • 194

    Page 203

    COPIER (Service mode for printer) > ADJUST (Adjustment mode) > ADJ-XY

    Adj-X-Mg

    Fine adj image ratio: vertical scanning Detail To make a fine adjustment of image magnification ratio in the vertical scanning direction by changing the reading cycle of CIS When replacing the Engine Controller PCB / clearing the RAM data, enter the value of service label. As the value is changed by 1, the image magnification ratio is changed by 0.01%. +: Reduce -: Enlarge Use Case Enter the setting value (switch negative / positive by * key) and press Apply key. Adj/Set/Operate Method After the setting value is changed, write the changed value in the service label. Caution -200 to 200 Display/Adj/Set Range 0.01% Appropriate Target Value 0

    Strd-Pos

    Adjustment of reading position at ADF stream reading Detail To adjust the reading position at ADF stream reading. When replacing the Main Controller PCB, enter the value of service label. Use Case
  • When replacing the ADF
  • When replacing the CIS Unit (Scanner Unit)
  • When replacing the Main Controller PCB
  • Adj/Set/Operate Method Enter the setting value (switch negative / positive by * key) and press Apply key. Caution After the setting value is changed, write the changed value in the service label. Display/Adj/Set Range -20 to 20 Unit 0.1 mm Default Value 0 Related Service Mode

    Copier > Function > Install > Strd-Pos

    Adj-S

    Adj image read start position: horz scan Detail To adjust the image reading start position in horizontal scanning direction when black line/white line occurs. When replacing the CCD Unit/clearing the RAM data of the Reader Unit, enter the value of service label. As the value is incremented by 1, the image position moves to the trailing edge side by 0.1 mm. Use Case When clearing the Reader-related RAM data Adj/Set/Operate Method Enter the setting value (switch negative / positive by * key) and press Apply key. Caution When COPIER> FUNCTION> INSTALL> RDSHDPOS is executed, the value of this item may change. If the value is changed, write the value in the service label. Display/Adj/Set Range -20 to 20 Unit 0.1 mm Default Value 0 Related Service Mode

    Copier> Function> Install> Rdshdpos

    Supplement/Memo The shading position can be adjusted automatically by COPIER>

    Function> Install> Rdshdpos.

  • Service Mode
  • 195

    Page 204

    ■ Ccd

    COPIER (Service mode for printer) > ADJUST (Adjustment mode) > CCD

    W-Plt-X

    White level data (X) entry of white plate Detail To enter the white level data (X) for the Standard White Plate. Enter the value (XXXXYYYYZZZZ) shown on the Barcode Label affixed at the upper left of the Copyboard Glass when replacing the ADF / Reader Unit, Reader Upper Cover Unit, and Main Controller PCB. Use Case
  • When replacing the ADF / Reader Unit
  • When replacing the Reader Upper Cover Unit
  • When replacing the Main Controller PCB
  • Adj/Set/Operate Method Enter the setting value, and then press Apply key. Caution After the setting value is changed, write the changed value in the service label. Display/Adj/Set Range 7000 to 9999 Default Value 8273 Related Service Mode

    Copier. > Adjust > Ccd > W-Plt-Y, W-Plt-Z

    W-Plt-Y

    White level data (Y) entry of white plate Detail To enter the white level data (Y) for the Standard White Plate. When replacing the Main Controller PCB / clearing RAM data, enter the value of service label. When replacing the Copyboard Glass, enter the value of barcode label which is affixed on the glass. Use Case
  • When replacing the ADF / Reader Unit
  • When replacing the Reader Upper Cover Unit
  • When replacing the Main Controller PCB
  • Adj/Set/Operate Method Enter the setting value, and then press Apply key. Caution After the setting value is changed, write the changed value in the service label. Display/Adj/Set Range 7000 to 9999 Default Value 8737 Related Service Mode

    Copier.> Adjust > Ccd > W-Plt-X, W-Plt-Z

    W-Plt-Z

    White level data (Z) entry of white plate Detail To enter the white level data (Z) for the Standard White Plate. When replacing the Main Controller PCB / clearing RAM data, enter the value of service label. When replacing the Copyboard Glass, enter the value of barcode label which is affixed on the glass. Use Case
  • When replacing the ADF / Reader Unit
  • When replacing the Reader Upper Cover Unit
  • When replacing the Main Controller PCB
  • Adj/Set/Operate Method Enter the setting value, and then press Apply key. Caution After the setting value is changed, write the changed value in the service label. Display/Adj/Set Range 7000 to 9999 Default Value 9427 Related Service Mode

    Copier.> Adjust > Ccd > W-Plt-X, W-Plt-Y

  • Service Mode
  • 196

    Page 205

    COPIER (Service mode for printer) > ADJUST (Adjustment mode) > CCD

    Dftar-R

    Adjustment of shading target value (R) at ADF reading Detail To adjust the shading target value of Red at ADF reading. When replacing the Main Controller PCB / clearing the RAM data, enter the value of service label. When replacing the Copyboard Glass / Scanner Unit (for front side), execute COPIER > FUNCTION > CCD > DF-WLVL1, DF-WLVL2 and write the value which is automatically set in the service label. Use Case
  • When replacing the ADF / Reader Unit
  • When replacing the Scanner (CIS) Unit
  • When replacing the Reader Upper Cover Unit
  • When replacing the Main Controller PCB
  • Adj/Set/Operate Method Enter the setting value, and then press Apply key. Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 2048 Default Value 1105 Related Service Mode

    Copier > Display > Ccd > Target-R

    Copier > Function > Ccd > Df-Wlvl1, Df-Wlvl2

    Dftar-G

    Adjustment of shading target value (G) at ADF reading Detail To adjust the shading target value of Green at ADF reading. When replacing the Main Controller PCB / clearing the RAM data, enter the value of service label. When replacing the Copyboard Glass / Scanner Unit (for front side), execute COPIER > FUNCTION > CCD > DF-WLVL1, DF-WLVL2 and write the value which is automatically set in the service label. Use Case
  • When replacing the ADF / Reader Unit
  • When replacing the Scanner (CIS) Unit
  • When replacing the Reader Upper Cover Unit
  • When replacing the Main Controller PCB
  • Adj/Set/Operate Method Enter the setting value, and then press Apply key. Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 2048 Default Value 1129 Related Service Mode

    Copier > Display > Ccd > Target-G

    Copier > Function > Ccd > Df-Wlvl1, Df-Wlvl2

    Dftar-B

    Adjustment of shading target value (B) at ADF reading Detail To adjust the shading target value of Blue at ADF reading. When replacing the Main Controller PCB / clearing the RAM data, enter the value of service label. When replacing the Copyboard Glass / Scanner Unit (for front side), execute COPIER > FUNCTION > CCD > DF-WLVL1, DF-WLVL2 and write the value which is automatically set in the service label. Use Case
  • When replacing the ADF / Reader Unit
  • When replacing the Scanner (CIS) Unit
  • When replacing the Reader Upper Cover Unit
  • When replacing the Main Controller PCB
  • Adj/Set/Operate Method Enter the setting value, and then press Apply key. Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 2048 Default Value 1151 Related Service Mode

    Copier > Display > Ccd > Target-B

    Copier > Function > Ccd > Df-Wlvl1, Df-Wlvl2

  • Service Mode
  • 197

    Page 206

    COPIER (Service mode for printer) > ADJUST (Adjustment mode) > CCD

    Dftar-Bw

    Adjustment of shading target value (B&W) at ADF reading Detail When replacing the Main Controller PCB / clearing the RAM data, enter the value of service label. When replacing the Copyboard Glass / Scanner Unit (for front side), execute COPIER > FUNCTION > CCD > DF-WLVL3, DF-WLVL4 and write the value which is automatically set in the service label. Use Case
  • When replacing the ADF / Reader Unit
  • When replacing the Scanner (CIS) Unit
  • When replacing the Reader Upper Cover Unit
  • When replacing the Main Controller PCB
  • Adj/Set/Operate Method Enter the setting value, and then press Apply key. Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 2048 Default Value 1072 Related Service Mode

    Copier > Display > Ccd > Targetbw

    Copier > Function > Ccd > Df-Wlvl3, Df-Wlvl4

    50-Rg

    Color displacement (R and G lines) correction value in the vertical scanning direction (50%) Detail To correct the color displacement between R and G lines in vertical scanning direction at 50% copyboard reading When replacing the Main Controller PCB / clearing the RAM data, enter the value of service label. Use Case When replacing the Main Controller PCB / clearing RAM data Adj/Set/Operate Method Enter the setting value (switch negative / positive by * key) and press Apply key. Caution After the setting value is changed, write the changed value in the service label. Display/Adj/Set Range -512 to 512 Unit 0.001 line Default Value -333 Supplement/Memo 50% reading: 300 dpi in horizontal scanning direction x 600 dpi in vertical scanning direction reading mode.

    50-Gb

    Color displacement (G and B lines) correction value in the vertical scanning direction (50%) Detail To correct the color displacement between G and R lines in vertical scanning direction at 50% copyboard reading When replacing the Main Controller PCB / clearing the RAM data, enter the value of service label. Use Case When replacing the Main Controller PCB / clearing RAM data Adj/Set/Operate Method Enter the setting value (switch negative / positive by * key) and press Apply key. Caution After the setting value is changed, write the changed value in the service label. Display/Adj/Set Range -512 to 512 Unit 0.001 line Default Value 333 Supplement/Memo 50% reading: 300 dpi in horizontal scanning direction x 600 dpi in vertical scanning direction reading mode.
  • Service Mode
  • 198

    Page 207

    COPIER (Service mode for printer) > ADJUST (Adjustment mode) > CCD

    100-Rg

    Color displacement (R and G lines) correction value in the vertical scanning direction (100%) Detail To correct the color displacement between R and G lines in vertical scanning direction at 100% copyboard reading When replacing the Main Controller PCB / clearing the RAM data, enter the value of service label. Use Case When replacing the Main Controller PCB / clearing RAM data Adj/Set/Operate Method Enter the setting value (switch negative / positive by * key) and press Apply key. Caution After the setting value is changed, write the changed value in the service label. Display/Adj/Set Range -512 to 512 Unit 0.001 line Default Value -333 Supplement/Memo 100% reading: 600 dpi in horizontal scanning direction x 600 dpi in vertical scanning direction reading mode.

    100-Gb

    Color displacement (G and B lines) correction value in the vertical scanning direction (100%) Detail To correct the color displacement between G and B lines in vertical scanning direction at 100% copyboard reading When replacing the Main Controller PCB / clearing the RAM data, enter the value of service label. Use Case When replacing the Main Controller PCB / clearing RAM data Adj/Set/Operate Method Enter the setting value (switch negative / positive by * key) and press Apply key. Caution After the setting value is changed, write the changed value in the service label. Display/Adj/Set Range -512 to 512 Unit 0.001 line Default Value 333 Supplement/Memo 100% reading: 600 dpi in horizontal scanning direction x 600 dpi in vertical scanning direction reading mode.

    50Df-Rg

    Color displacement (R and G lines) correction value in the vertical scanning direction at ADF reading (50%) Detail To correct the color displacement between R and G lines in vertical scanning direction at 50% ADF reading When replacing the Main Controller PCB / clearing the RAM data, enter the value of service label. Use Case When replacing the Main Controller PCB / clearing RAM data Adj/Set/Operate Method Enter the setting value (switch negative / positive by * key) and press Apply key. Caution After the setting value is changed, write the changed value in the service label. Display/Adj/Set Range -512 to 512 Unit 0.001 line Default Value -333 Supplement/Memo 50% reading: 300 dpi in horizontal scanning direction x 600 dpi in vertical scanning direction reading mode.
  • Service Mode
  • 199

    Page 208

    COPIER (Service mode for printer) > ADJUST (Adjustment mode) > CCD

    50Df-Gb

    Color displacement (G and B lines) correction value in the vertical scanning direction at ADF reading (50%) Detail To correct the color displacement between G and B lines in vertical scanning direction at 50% ADF reading When replacing the Main Controller PCB / clearing the RAM data, enter the value of service label. Use Case When replacing the Main Controller PCB / clearing RAM data Adj/Set/Operate Method Enter the setting value (switch negative / positive by * key) and press Apply key. Caution After the setting value is changed, write the changed value in the service label. Display/Adj/Set Range -512 to 512 Unit 0.001 line Default Value 333 Supplement/Memo 50% reading: 300 dpi in horizontal scanning direction x 600 dpi in vertical scanning direction reading mode.

    100Df-Rg

    Color displacement (R and G lines) correction value in the vertical scanning direction at ADF reading (100%) Detail To correct the color displacement between R and G lines in vertical scanning direction at 100% ADF reading When replacing the Main Controller PCB / clearing the RAM data, enter the value of service label. Use Case When replacing the Main Controller PCB / clearing RAM data Adj/Set/Operate Method Enter the setting value (switch negative / positive by * key) and press Apply key. Caution After the setting value is changed, write the changed value in the service label. Display/Adj/Set Range -512 to 512 Unit 0.001 line Default Value -333 Supplement/Memo 100% reading: 600 dpi in horizontal scanning direction x 600 dpi in vertical scanning direction reading mode.

    100Df-Gb

    Color displacement (G and B lines) correction value in the vertical scanning direction at ADF reading (100%) Detail To correct the color displacement between G and B lines in vertical scanning direction at 100% ADF reading When replacing the Main Controller PCB / clearing the RAM data, enter the value of service label. Use Case When replacing the Main Controller PCB / clearing RAM data Adj/Set/Operate Method Enter the setting value (switch negative / positive by * key) and press Apply key. Caution After the setting value is changed, write the changed value in the service label. Display/Adj/Set Range -512 to 512 Unit 0.001 line Default Value 333 Supplement/Memo 100% reading: 600 dpi in horizontal scanning direction x 600 dpi in vertical scanning direction reading mode.

    Ofst-Bw0

    Adjustment of CIS (Rear) at B&W reading Detail To adjust the offset of the CIS (Rear) when reading B&W original. When replacing the Main Controller PCB / clearing the RAM data, enter the value of service label. Use Case When replacing the Main Controller PCB / clearing RAM data Adj/Set/Operate Method Enter the setting value, and then press Apply key. Display/Adj/Set Range -128 to 127 Default Value 0 Related Service Mode

    Copier > Function > Ccd > Bw-Agc

  • Service Mode
  • 200

    Page 209

    COPIER (Service mode for printer) > ADJUST (Adjustment mode) > CCD

    Ofst-Bw1

    Adjustment of CIS (Center) at B&W reading Detail To adjust the offset of the CIS (Center) when reading B&W original. When replacing the Main Controller PCB / clearing the RAM data, enter the value of service label. Use Case When replacing the Main Controller PCB / clearing RAM data Adj/Set/Operate Method Enter the setting value, and then press Apply key. Display/Adj/Set Range -128 to 127 Default Value 0 Related Service Mode

    Copier > Function > Ccd > Bw-Agc

    Ofst-Bw2

    Adjustment of CIS (Front) at B&W reading Detail To adjust the offset of the CIS (Front) when reading B&W original. When replacing the Main Controller PCB / clearing the RAM data, enter the value of service label. Use Case When replacing the Main Controller PCB / clearing RAM data Adj/Set/Operate Method Enter the setting value, and then press Apply key. Display/Adj/Set Range -128 to 127 Default Value 0 Related Service Mode

    Copier > Function > Ccd > Bw-Agc

    Ofst-Cl0

    Adjustment of CIS (Rear) at color reading Detail To adjust the offset of the CIS (Rear) when reading color original. When replacing the Main Controller PCB / clearing the RAM data, enter the value of service label. Use Case When replacing the Main Controller PCB / clearing RAM data Adj/Set/Operate Method Enter the setting value, and then press Apply key. Display/Adj/Set Range -128 to 127 Default Value 0 Related Service Mode

    Copier > Function > Ccd > Cl-Agc

    Ofst-Cl1

    Adjustment of CIS (Center) at color reading Detail To adjust the offset of the CIS (Center) when reading color original. When replacing the Main Controller PCB / clearing the RAM data, enter the value of service label. Use Case When replacing the Main Controller PCB / clearing RAM data Adj/Set/Operate Method Enter the setting value, and then press Apply key. Display/Adj/Set Range -128 to 127 Default Value 0 Related Service Mode

    Copier > Function > Ccd > Cl-Agc

    Ofst-Cl2

    Adjustment of CIS (Front) at color reading Detail To adjust the offset of the CIS (Front) when reading color original. When replacing the Main Controller PCB / clearing the RAM data, enter the value of service label. Use Case When replacing the Main Controller PCB / clearing RAM data Adj/Set/Operate Method Enter the setting value, and then press Apply key. Display/Adj/Set Range -128 to 127 Default Value 0 Related Service Mode

    Copier > Function > Ccd > Cl-Agc

  • Service Mode
  • 201

    Page 210

    COPIER (Service mode for printer) > ADJUST (Adjustment mode) > CCD

    Ofst2Cl0

    Adj CIS-ch0 offset: color mode, 600 dpi Detail To adjust the offset (black level) of the Scanner Unit on channel 0 in color mode with 600 dpi. Use Case When replacing the Main Controller PCB / clearing RAM data Adj/Set/Operate Method Enter the setting value, and then press Apply key. Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 255 Default Value 0 Related Service Mode

    Copier > Function > Ccd > Cl-Agc

    Supplement/Memo It is updated automatically when the value of CL-AGC is changed.

    Ofst2Cl1

    Adj CIS-ch1 offset: color mode, 600 dpi Detail To adjust the offset (black level) of the Scanner Unit on channel 1 in color mode with 600 dpi. Use Case When replacing the Main Controller PCB / clearing RAM data Adj/Set/Operate Method Enter the setting value, and then press Apply key. Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 255 Default Value 0 Related Service Mode

    Copier > Function > Ccd > Cl-Agc

    Supplement/Memo It is updated automatically when the value of CL-AGC is changed.

    Ofst2Cl2

    Adj CIS-ch2 offset: color mode, 600 dpi Detail To adjust the offset (black level) of the Scanner Unit on channel 2 in color mode with 600 dpi. Use Case When replacing the Main Controller PCB / clearing RAM data Adj/Set/Operate Method Enter the setting value, and then press Apply key. Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 255 Default Value 0 Related Service Mode

    Copier > Function > Ccd > Cl-Agc

    Supplement/Memo It is updated automatically when the value of CL-AGC is changed.

    Gain-Bw0

    Adjustment of gain at B&W 300 dpi reading Detail To adjust the gain when reading B&W 300 dpi original. When replacing the Main Controller PCB / clearing the RAM data, enter the value of service label. Use Case When replacing the Main Controller PCB / clearing RAM data Adj/Set/Operate Method Enter the setting value, and then press Apply key. Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 255 Default Value 0 Related Service Mode

    Copier > Function > Ccd > Bw-Agc

    Gain2Bw0

    Adjustment of gain at B&W 600 dpi reading Detail To adjust the gain when reading B&W 600 dpi original. When replacing the Main Controller PCB / clearing the RAM data, enter the value of service label. Use Case When replacing the Main Controller PCB / clearing RAM data Adj/Set/Operate Method Enter the setting value, and then press Apply key. Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 255 Default Value 0 Related Service Mode

    Copier > Function > Ccd > Bw-Agc

  • Service Mode
  • 202

    Page 211

    COPIER (Service mode for printer) > ADJUST (Adjustment mode) > CCD

    Gain-Cl0

    Adjustment of gain at color 300 dpi reading Detail To adjust the gain when reading color 300 dpi original. When replacing the Main Controller PCB / clearing the RAM data, enter the value of service label. Use Case When replacing the Main Controller PCB / clearing RAM data Adj/Set/Operate Method Enter the setting value, and then press Apply key. Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 255 Default Value 0 Related Service Mode

    Copier > Function > Ccd > Cl-Agc

    Gain2Cl0

    Adjustment of gain at color 600 dpi reading Detail To adjust the gain when reading color 600 dpi original. When replacing the Main Controller PCB / clearing the RAM data, enter the value of service label. Use Case When replacing the Main Controller PCB / clearing RAM data Adj/Set/Operate Method Enter the setting value, and then press Apply key. Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 255 Default Value 0 Related Service Mode

    Copier > Function > Ccd > Cl-Agc

    Led-Bw-R

    Adjustment of LED light-up time (R) at B&W reading Detail To adjust the red color LED lighting time when reading B&W original. When replacing the Main Controller PCB / clearing the RAM data, enter the value of service label. Use Case When replacing the Main Controller PCB / clearing RAM data Adj/Set/Operate Method Enter the setting value, and then press Apply key. Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 2432 Default Value 1000 Related Service Mode

    Copier > Function > Ccd > Cl-Agc

    Led-Bw-G

    Adjustment of LED light-up time (G) at B&W reading Detail To adjust the green color LED lighting time when reading B&W original. When replacing the Main Controller PCB / clearing the RAM data, enter the value of service label. Use Case When replacing the Main Controller PCB / clearing RAM data Adj/Set/Operate Method Enter the setting value, and then press Apply key. Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 2432 Default Value 1000 Related Service Mode

    Copier > Function >Ccd > Bw-Agc

    Led-Bw-B

    Adjustment of LED light-up time (B) at B&W reading Detail To adjust the blue color LED lighting time when reading B&W original. When replacing the Main Controller PCB / clearing the RAM data, enter the value of service label. Use Case When replacing the Main Controller PCB / clearing RAM data Adj/Set/Operate Method Enter the setting value, and then press Apply key. Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 2432 Default Value 1000 Related Service Mode

    Copier > Function > Ccd > Bw-Agc

  • Service Mode
  • 203

    Page 212

    COPIER (Service mode for printer) > ADJUST (Adjustment mode) > CCD

    Led-Cl-R

    Adjustment of R color LED lighting time at reading color 300 dpi (primary light source) Detail To adjust the lighting time of the red color LED which is a primary light source of the Scanner Unit in color mode with 300 dpi. Use Case When replacing the Main Controller PCB / clearing RAM data Adj/Set/Operate Method Enter the setting value, and then press Apply key. Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 8192 Default Value 2818 Related Service Mode

    Copier> Function> Ccd> Cl-Agc

    Led-Cl-G

    Adjustment of G color LED lighting time at reading color 300 dpi (primary light source) Detail To adjust the lighting time of the green color LED which is a primary light source of the Scanner Unit in color mode with 300 dpi. Use Case When replacing the Main Controller PCB / clearing RAM data Adj/Set/Operate Method Enter the setting value, and then press Apply key. Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 8192 Default Value 896 Related Service Mode

    Copier> Function> Ccd> Cl-Agc

    Led-Cl-B

    Adjustment of B color LED lighting time at reading color 300 dpi (primary light source) Detail To adjust the lighting time of the blue color LED which is a primary light source of the Scanner Unit in color mode with 300 dpi. Use Case When replacing the Main Controller PCB / clearing RAM data Adj/Set/Operate Method Enter the setting value, and then press Apply key. Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 8192 Default Value 1721 Related Service Mode

    Copier> Function> Ccd> Cl-Agc

    Led2Cl-R

    Adjustment of R color LED lighting time at reading color 600 dpi (primary light source) Detail To adjust the lighting time of the red color LED which is a primary light source of the Scanner Unit in color mode with 600 dpi. Use Case When replacing the Main Controller PCB / clearing RAM data Adj/Set/Operate Method Enter the setting value, and then press Apply key. Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 8192 Default Value 3826 Related Service Mode

    Copier> Function> Ccd> Cl-Agc

    Led2Cl-G

    Adjustment of G color LED lighting time at reading color 600 dpi (primary light source) Detail To adjust the lighting time of the green color LED which is a primary light source of the Scanner Unit in color mode with 600 dpi. Use Case When replacing the Main Controller PCB / clearing RAM data Adj/Set/Operate Method Enter the setting value, and then press Apply key. Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 8192 Default Value 1792 Related Service Mode

    Copier> Function> Ccd> Cl-Agc

  • Service Mode
  • 204

    Page 213

    COPIER (Service mode for printer) > ADJUST (Adjustment mode) > CCD

    Led2Cl-B

    Adjustment of B color LED lighting time at reading color 600 dpi (primary light source) Detail To adjust the lighting time of the blue color LED which is a primary light source of the Scanner Unit in color mode with 600 dpi. Use Case When replacing the Main Controller PCB / clearing RAM data Adj/Set/Operate Method Enter the setting value, and then press Apply key. Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 8192 Default Value 5924 Related Service Mode

    Copier> Function> Ccd> Cl-Agc

    ■ Pascal

    COPIER (Service mode for printer) > ADJUST (Adjustment mode) > PASCAL

    Ofst-P-K

    Bk density adj at test print reading Detail To adjust the offset of Bk color test print reading signal at Auto Adjust Gradation (Full Adjust). When replacing the Main Controller PCB / clearing the RAM data, enter the value of service label. As the greater value is set, the image after adjustment gets darker. Use Case When replacing the Main Controller PCB / clearing RAM data Adj/Set/Operate Method Enter the setting value (switch negative / positive by * key) and press Apply key. Caution After the setting value is changed, write the changed value in the service label. Display/Adj/Set Range -32 to 32 Default Value 0

    ■ Feed-Adj

    COPIER (Service mode for printer) > ADJUST (Adjustment mode) > FEED-ADJ

    Adj-C1

    Adjustment of the image write start position in the horizontal scanning direction at pickup from the standard cassette Detail To adjust the image write start position in the horizontal scanning direction when picking up paper from the standard cassette. Adj/Set/Operate Method Enter the setting value (switch negative / positive by * key) and press Apply key. Display/Adj/Set Range -12 to 12 Default Value 0 (According to the setting at shipment)

    Adj-C2

    Adjustment of the image write start position in the horizontal scanning direction at pickup from the option cassette Detail To adjust the image write start position in the horizontal scanning direction when picking up paper from the option cassette. Adj/Set/Operate Method Enter the setting value (switch negative / positive by * key) and press Apply key. Display/Adj/Set Range -12 to 12 Default Value 0 (According to the setting at shipment)

    Adj-Mf

    Adjustment of the image write start position in the horizontal scanning direction at pickup from the Multi-purpose Tray Detail To adjust the image write start position in the horizontal scanning direction when picking up paper from the Multi-purpose Tray. Adj/Set/Operate Method Enter the setting value (switch negative / positive by * key) and press Apply key. Display/Adj/Set Range -12 to 12 Default Value 0 (According to the setting at shipment)
  • Service Mode
  • 205

    Page 214

    COPIER (Service mode for printer) > ADJUST (Adjustment mode) > FEED-ADJ

    Adj-Refe

    Adjustment of the image write start position in the horizontal scanning direction at 2-sided pickup Detail To adjust the image write start position in the horizontal scanning direction at 2-sided pickup. Adj/Set/Operate Method Enter the setting value (switch negative / positive by * key) and press Apply key. Display/Adj/Set Range -12 to 12 Default Value 0 (According to the setting at shipment)

    ■ Panel

    COPIER (Service mode for printer) > ADJUST (Adjustment mode) > PANEL

    Touchchk

    Correction of coordinate position of Touch Panel Detail To correct the coordinate on the Touch Panel. Use Case When a problem occurs to the coordinate position in such a way that a position different from the one that was touched reacts. Adj/Set/Operate Method Touch the "+ (plus)" mark displayed on the Touch Panel with something with a sharp tip such as a pen.

    Touch_R

    Flag to check whether the correction of coordinates on the Touch Panel was properly executed Detail To check whether the correction of coordinates on the Touch Panel was properly executed. 1 is displayed when the correction of coordinates is properly executed. 0 is displayed when it fails. Use Case When executing the correction of coordinates after replacing the Touch Panel with a new one Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 1 0: Not executed 1: Executed Default Value 0 FUNCTION (Operation / inspection mode)

    ■ Ccd

    COPIER (Service mode for printer) > FUNCTION (Operation / inspection mode) > CCD

    Df-Wlvl1

    White level adj in book mode: color Detail To adjust the white level for copyboard scanning automatically by setting the paper which is usually used by the user on the Copyboard Glass. Use Case
  • When replacing the Copyboard Glass
  • When replacing the CIS Unit
  • When replacing the ADF / Reader Unit
  • Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Set paper on the Copyboard Glass. 2) Select the item, and then press Yes key. Caution Be sure to execute DF-WLVL2 in a row. Related Service Mode

    Copier > Adjust > Ccd > Dftar-R, Dftar-G, Dftar-B

    Copier > Function > Ccd > Df-Wlvl2

  • Service Mode
  • 206

    Page 215

    COPIER (Service mode for printer) > FUNCTION (Operation / inspection mode) > CCD

    Df-Wlvl2

    White level adj in ADF mode: color Detail To adjust the white level for ADF scanning automatically by setting the paper which is usually used by the user on the ADF. Use Case
  • When replacing the Copyboard Glass
  • When replacing the CIS Unit
  • When replacing the ADF / Reader Unit
  • Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Set paper on the ADF. 2) Select the item, and then press Yes key. Caution Be sure to execute this item after DF-WLVL1. Related Service Mode

    Copier > Adjust > Ccd > Dftar-R, Dftar-G, Dftar-B

    Copier > Function > Ccd > Df-Wlvl1

    Df-Wlvl3

    White level adj in book mode (B&W) Detail To adjust the white level for copyboard scanning automatically by setting the paper which is usually used by the user on the Copyboard Glass. Use Case
  • When replacing the Copyboard Glass
  • When replacing the CIS Unit
  • When replacing the ADF / Reader Unit
  • Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Set paper on the Copyboard Glass. 2) Select the item, and then press Yes key. Caution Be sure to execute DF-WLVL4 in a row. Related Service Mode

    Copier > Adjust > Ccd > Dftar-Bw

    Copier > Function > Ccd > Df-Wlvl4

    Df-Wlvl4

    White level adj in ADF mode (B&W) Detail To adjust the white level for ADF scanning automatically by setting the paper which is usually used by the user on the DADF. Use Case
  • When replacing the Copyboard Glass
  • When replacing the CIS Unit
  • When replacing the ADF / Reader Unit
  • Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Set paper on the ADF. 2) Select the item, and then press Yes key. Caution Be sure to execute this item after DF-WLVL3. Related Service Mode

    Copier > Adjust > Ccd > Dftar-Bw

    Copier > Function > Ccd > Df-Wlvl3

    Cl-Agc

    CIS intensity adjustment in ADF (color) Detail To adjust the black/white level of the CIS for ADF scanning automatically by setting the paper which is usually used by the user on the ADF. (For color scanning) Use Case
  • When replacing the Reader Unit
  • When replacing the CIS Unit
  • Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Set paper on the ADF. 2) Select the item, and then press Yes key. Related Service Mode

    Copier > Function > Ccd > Bw-Agc

  • Service Mode
  • 207

    Page 216

    COPIER (Service mode for printer) > FUNCTION (Operation / inspection mode) > CCD

    Bw-Agc

    CIS intensity adjustment in ADF (B&W) Detail To adjust the black/white level of the CIS for ADF scanning automatically by setting the paper which is usually used by the user on the ADF. (For B&W scanning) Setting values of the following service modes are automatically calculated: COPIER > ADJUST >

    Ccd > Ofst-Bw0/1/2, Gain-Bw0, Led-Bw-R/G/B.

    Use Case
  • When replacing the Reader Unit
  • When replacing the CIS Unit
  • Related Service Mode

    Copier > Function > Ccd > Cl-Agc

    Copier > Adjust > Ccd > Ofst-Bw0

    Copier > Adjust > Ccd > Ofst-Bw1

    Copier > Adjust > Ccd > Ofst-Bw2

    Copier > Adjust > Ccd > Gain-Bw0

    Copier > Adjust > Ccd > Led-Bw-R

    Copier > Adjust > Ccd > Led-Bw-G

    Copier > Adjust > Ccd > Led-Bw-B

    ■ Clear

    COPIER (Service mode for printer) > FUNCTION (Operation / inspection mode) > CLEAR

    R-Con

    Initialization of Reader / ADF Detail To initialize the factory adjustment values of the Reader / ADF. Use Case When clearing RAM data of the Main Controller PCB Adj/Set/Operate Method Press Yes key.

    Srvc-Dat

    Clearing of service mode setting values Detail To clear the service mode setting values. The user mode setting values are not cleared. The factory adjustment values of the Reader / ADF are not initialized. Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Press Yes key. 2) Turn OFF / ON the main power switch.

    Counter

    Clearing of service counter Detail To clear the counter by maintenance / part/mode. The numerator printed on a system dump list becomes 0. Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Press Yes key. 2) Turn OFF / ON the main power switch.

    Hist

    Clear of logs Detail To clear the communication management / print / jam / error log. Use Case When clearing logs Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Press Yes key. 2) Turn OFF / ON the main power switch.

    All

    Clearing of setting information Detail Clear/initialize the following setting information according to the location set in COPIER > OPTION

    > Body > Locale, Size-Lc:

  • User mode setting values
  • Service mode setting values (excluding service counter)
  • ID and password of the system administrator
  • Communication management / printing / jam / error history
  • The following is not initialized:
  • Service counter
  • Factory adjustment values of the Reader / ADF
  • Use Case At installation Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Press Yes key. 2) Turn OFF / ON the main power switch. Related Service Mode

    Copier > Option > Body > Locale, Size-Lc

  • Service Mode
  • 208

    Page 217

    COPIER (Service mode for printer) > FUNCTION (Operation / inspection mode) > CLEAR

    Erds-Dat

    Initialization of Embedded-RDS setting value Detail To initialize the Embedded-RDS setting values. ON / OFF of Embedded-RDS, UGW (remote monitoring service system) port number, and communication error log set in service mode are initialized. Use Case When upgrading the version of Bootable in the Embedded-RDS environment Adj/Set/Operate Method Select the item, and then press Yes key. Caution Use of the SRAM in Embedded-RDS differs depending on the Bootable version. Therefore, unless initialization is executed at the time of version upgrade, data inconsistency occurs. Related Service Mode

    Copier > Function > Install > E-Rds, Rgw-Port, Com-Log

    Supplement/Memo Embedded-RDS: Function to send device information such as the device counter, failure, and consumables to UGW via SOAP protocol UGW (Universal Gate Way): Remote monitoring service system

    ■ Misc-R

    COPIER (Service mode for printer) > FUNCTION (Operation / inspection mode) > MISC-R

    Scanlamp

    Lighting check of CIS Unit LED Detail To light up CIS Unit LED for 3 seconds. It lights up in the order of R, G, B, R, G and B. Use Case When replacing the CIS Unit LED Adj/Set/Operate Method Select the item, and then press Yes key. Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 1 Default Value 0 Required Time 3 seconds

    Scan-On

    Execution of copyboard reading Detail To execute reading of the original on the Copyboard Glass. Adj/Set/Operate Method
  • Place paper on the Copyboard Glass.
  • Select the item, and then press Yes key.
  • Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 1 Default Value 0

    ■ Misc-P

    COPIER (Service mode for printer) > FUNCTION (Operation / inspection mode) > MISC-P

    Srvc-Dat

    Output of system data list/system dump list Detail To execute report output of the system data list and the system dump list. System data list: The service software switches and parameters used in FAX function System dump list: The number of sends/receives, the number of pages sent/received, the number of sheets printed / read, the number of errors, etc. Adj/Set/Operate Method Select the item, and then press Yes key. Supplement/Memo FAX model only

    Sys-Dat

    Output of system data list Detail To execute report output of the system data list. The service software switches and parameters used in FAX function are output. Adj/Set/Operate Method Select the item, and then press Yes key. Supplement/Memo FAX model only
  • Service Mode
  • 209

    Page 218

    COPIER (Service mode for printer) > FUNCTION (Operation / inspection mode) > MISC-P

    Sys-Dmp

    Output of system dump list Detail To execute report output of the system dump list. The number of sends/receives, the number of pages sent/received, the number of sheets printed/ read, the number of errors, etc. are output. Adj/Set/Operate Method Select the item, and then press Yes key. Supplement/Memo FAX model only

    Cntr

    Output of counter report Detail To output the counter report. The usage of functions (reading, recording, communication and copy) is output. Adj/Set/Operate Method Select the item, and then press Yes key.

    Err-Log

    Output of error log report Detail To output the error log report. Adj/Set/Operate Method Select the item, and then press Yes key.

    Spec

    Output of spec report Detail To output the spec report. The current device specifications such as the location, model information, and ROM version are output. Adj/Set/Operate Method Select the item, and then press Yes key.

    Erds-Log

    Output of Embedded-RDS log Detail To execute report output of the log relating to Embedded-RDS. The date, time, code, and details (up to 130 characters) of each error that occurred are output. Use Case When using Embedded-RDS Adj/Set/Operate Method Select the item, and then press Yes key. Related Service Mode

    Copier> Function> Install> Com-Log

    Supplement/Memo Embedded-RDS: Function to send device information such as the device counter, failure, and consumables to UGW via SOAP protocol UGW (Universal Gate Way): Remote monitoring service system

    Key-Hist

    Output of key log report Detail To output the key log report. The key log up to the time the FAX transmission task was input (the [START] key was pressed) is output. Adj/Set/Operate Method Select the item, and then press Yes key. Supplement/Memo FAX model only

    Crg-Log

    Output cartridge replacement log report Detail To output the cartridge replacement log in the form of a report. Use Case When checking the cartridge replacement log Adj/Set/Operate Method Select the item, and then press Yes key.
  • Service Mode
  • 210

    Page 219

    ■ System

    COPIER (Service mode for printer) > FUNCTION (Operation / inspection mode) > SYSTEM

    Panel-Up

    Download from USB memory (PANEL) Detail To perform downloading when PANEL exists in the root directory of the USB memory. Use Case At upgrade Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Install the USB memory. 2) Select the item, and then select Yes. 3) Turn OFF and the ON the main power. Caution Do not turn OFF / ON the power before "Executing..." disappears. Display/Adj/Set Range Yes / No Related Service Mode

    Copier > Function > System > Download, Bkup-Up

    Logwrite

    Writing sublog to USB memory Detail To write sublog that includes the following information to the USB memory.
  • Job list (job name, user name, address book)
  • Communications log (address book, user name)
  • Job log (user name, job name)
  • Use Case When analyzing the cause of a problem Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Install the USB memory. 2) Select the item, and then select Yes. 3) Turn OFF and the ON the main power. Caution Do not turn OFF / ON the power before "Executing..." disappears. Display/Adj/Set Range Yes / No

    Import

    Reading of service mode setting value from USB memory Detail To write the service mode setting values (excluding those related to Reader / ADF) to the USB memory. Use Case After replacing the Main Controller PCB Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Install the USB memory. 2) Select the item, and then press Yes. 3) Turn OFF and the ON the main power. Caution Do not turn OFF / ON the power before "Executing..." disappears.

    Export

    Writing of service mode setting value to USB memory Detail To write the service mode setting values (excluding those related to Reader/ADF) to the USB memory. Use Case When replacing the Main Controller PCB as a measure against failures Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Install the USB memory. 2) Select the item, and then press Yes. Caution "Executing..." disappears when writing is completed.

    Save-Sm

    Backup of service mode Detail To record the backup of service mode in the device using DCM. Use Case When saving the state of the device before changing the service mode setting values.

    Rstr-Sm

    Restoration of service mode Detail To restore the backup data in the device. Use Case When returning the state of the device to a previous one after having changed the service mode setting values.

    Log2Usb

    Output of log saved in eMMC to a USB Detail Output of log saved in eMMC to a USB Use Case When collecting debug log. Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Install the USB memory. 2) Select the item, and then press Yes.
  • Service Mode
  • 211

    Page 220

    COPIER (Service mode for printer) > FUNCTION (Operation / inspection mode) > SYSTEM

    Log-Del

    Deletion of log saved in eMMC Detail Deletion of log saved in eMMC Use Case When deleting log that has become unnecessary

    ■ Splman

    COPIER (Service mode for printer) > FUNCTION (Operation / inspection mode) > SPLMAN

    Spl14159

    Fixing of USB device ID Detail To fix the USB device ID to "000000000000". Driver for each machine is installed to a PC. However, by fixing the serial number, the PC considers that any connected machine to be the same machine; thus, there will be no need to install the drivers many times. Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Enter the value, and then press Apply key. 2) Turn OFF / ON the main power switch. Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 1

    0 : Off

    1 : On

    Default Value 0

    Spl65677

    Increase of paper leading edge margin Detail To increase the margin on the leading edge of paper. As the value is incremented by 1, the margin is increased by 0.1 mm. The value obtained by adding this value and SPL68676 (decrease of the margin) is applied. Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press Apply key. 2) Turn OFF / ON the main power switch. Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 20 Unit 0.1 mm Default Value 0 Related Service Mode

    Copier > Function > Splman > Spl68676

    Spl68676

    Decrease of paper leading edge margin Detail To decrease the margin on the leading edge of paper. As the value is incremented by 1, the margin is decreased by 0.1 mm. The value obtained by adding this value and SPL65677 (increase of the margin) is applied. Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press Apply key. 2) Turn OFF / ON the main power switch. Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 20 Unit 0.1 mm Default Value 0 Related Service Mode

    Copier > Function > Splman > Spl65677

    Spl68677

    Increase of paper right and left margins Detail To increase the margin on the right and left of paper. As the value is incremented by 1, the margin is increased by 0.1 mm. The value obtained by adding this value and SPL25607 (decrease of the margin) is applied. Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press Apply key. 2) Turn OFF / ON the main power switch. Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 20 Unit 0.1 mm Default Value 0 Related Service Mode

    Copier > Function > Splman > Spl25607

  • Service Mode
  • 212

    Page 221

    COPIER (Service mode for printer) > FUNCTION (Operation / inspection mode) > SPLMAN

    Spl25607

    Decrease of paper right and left margins Detail To decrease the margin on the right and left of paper. As the value is incremented by 1, the margin is decreased by 0.1 mm. The value obtained by adding this value and SPL68677 (increase of the margin) is applied. Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press Apply key. 2) Turn OFF / ON the main power switch. Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 20 Unit 0.1 mm Default Value 0 Related Service Mode

    Copier > Function > Splman > Spl68677

    Spl93822

    Setting of department ID count all clear Detail To set whether to disable clearing of all department ID counts. Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press Apply key. 2) Turn OFF / ON the main power switch. Caution Be sure to perform this mode after consulting with the system administrator at user's site. Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 1 0: Disabled, 1: Enabled Default Value 0 Related Service Mode

    Copier > Function > Splman > Spl78788

    Spl78788

    Setting of department ID count clear Detail To set whether to disable clearing of department ID count. Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press Apply key. 2) Turn OFF / ON the main power switch. Caution Be sure to perform this mode after consulting with the system administrator at user's site. Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 1 0: Disabled, 1: Enabled Default Value 0 Related Service Mode

    Copier > Function > Splman > Spl93822

    Spl71100

    Setting of the duty of Off-hook PCB Detail This is the mode to make handsets of particular manufacturers to ring when fax reception mode is set to "Fax / Tel (Auto Switch)". Use Case When fax reception mode is set to FAX/TEL switching Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press Apply key. 2) Turn OFF / ON the main power switch. Display/Adj/Set Range 1 to 99 Default Value 50 Supplement/Memo FAX model only

    Spl00171

    To change the maximum auto sleep shift time. Detail To change the maximum value of auto sleep shift time in Settings/Registration> Timer Settings> Auto Sleep Time. Use Case When changing the setting time to shift to auto sleep mode Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press Apply key. 2) Turn OFF / ON the main power switch. Display/Adj/Set Range From 0 (Default for Europe) to 60 min From 1 (Default for locations other than Europe) to Maximum value for each model Default Value 1
  • Service Mode
  • 213

    Page 222

    COPIER (Service mode for printer) > FUNCTION (Operation / inspection mode) > SPLMAN

    Spl80100

    Mask setting at copyboard scanning Detail To cancel the image mask occurs on the left edge at copyboard scanning. Use Case Upon request from user who does not satisfy with the mask on the left edge Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press Apply key. 2) Turn OFF / ON the main power switch. Display/Adj/Set Range 0: Mask value according to the specifications of each job 1: No mask (0 mm) Default Value 0

    Spl27354

    PC-less update, RMDS environment setting Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press Apply key. 2) Turn OFF / ON the main power switch. Display/Adj/Set Range 0: Production environment / Release environment 1: Production environment / Staging environment 2: Maintenance environment 1 / Release environment 3: Maintenance environment 1 / Staging environment 4: Maintenance environment 2 / Release environment 5: Maintenance environment 2 / Staging environment Default Value 0

    Spl84194

    ON / OFF of E-RDS function Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press Apply key. 2) Turn OFF / ON the main power switch. Caution Com-TEST needs to be executed to reflect the settings. Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 1

    0 : Off

    1 : On

    Default Value 0 (China), 1 (Except China)

    Spl32620

    Switching to enable / disable PC-less update Detail To switch whether to enable the PC-less update function. Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press Apply key. 2) Turn OFF / ON the main power switch. Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 1 0: Disabled 1: Enabled (default) Default Value 1

    Spl60061

    Switching to display the connection destination URL setting of GoogleCloudPrint on the remote UI Detail To display the connection destination URL setting of GoogleCloudPrint on the remote UI. Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press Apply key. 2) Turn OFF / ON the main power switch. Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 1 0: Do not display 1: Display Default Value 0

    Spl71700

    Saving of Sublog stored in eMMC to a USB memory Detail To save Sublog stored in eMMC to a USB memory. Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 1 Default Value 0
  • Service Mode
  • 214

    Page 223

    COPIER (Service mode for printer) > FUNCTION (Operation / inspection mode) > SPLMAN

    Spl01734

    ON/OFF of RUI service mode function Detail To turn ON/OFF the RUI service mode function. (linked with OPTION>BODY>RMT-SW)

    0: Off*

    1: On

    This should be supported together with OPTION>BODY>RMT-SW as a set. Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 1 Default Value 0

    ■ Install

    COPIER (Service mode for printer) > FUNCTION (Operation / inspection mode) > INSTALL

    Strd-Pos

    Scan position auto adj in ADF mode Detail To adjust the ADF scanning position automatically. Use Case At ADF installation/uninstallation Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Set a paper for stream reading position adjustment, and then close the ADF. 2) Select the item, and then press Yes key. The operation automatically stops after the adjustment. 3) Write the value displayed by COPIER > ADJUST > ADJ-XY > STRD-POS in the service label. Caution Write the adjusted value in the service label. Related Service Mode

    Copier > Adjust > Adj-Xy > Strd-Pos

    E-Rds

    ON / OFF of Embedded-RDS Detail To set ON / OFF of Embedded-RDS function. Use Case When using Embedded-RDS Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Enter the value, and then press Apply key. 2) Turn OFF / ON the main power switch. Caution Be sure to use ERDS, RGW-PORT, COM-TEST, COM-RSLT, and COM-LOG as a set. Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 1

    0 : Off

    1 : On

    Default Value 0 (China), 1 (Except China) Related Service Mode

    Copier > Function > Install > Rgw-Port, Com-Test, Com-Rslt, Com-Log

    Supplement/Memo Embedded-RDS: Function to send device information such as the device counter, failure, and consumables to UGW via SOAP protocol UGW (Universal Gate Way): Remote monitoring service system

    Rgw-Port

    Setting of UGW port number when using Embedded-RDS Detail To set the port number of UGW to be used for Embedded-RDS. Use Case When using Embedded-RDS Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Enter the value, and then press Apply key. 2) Turn OFF / ON the main power switch. Caution Be sure to use ERDS, RGW-PORT, COM-TEST, COM-RSLT, and COM-LOG as a set. Display/Adj/Set Range 1 to 65535 Default Value 443 Related Service Mode

    Copier > Function > Install > Erds, Com-Test, Com-Rslt, Com-Log

    Supplement/Memo Embedded-RDS: Function to send device information such as the device counter, failure, and consumables to UGW via SOAP protocol UGW (Universal Gate Way): Remote monitoring service system
  • Service Mode
  • 215

    Page 224

    COPIER (Service mode for printer) > FUNCTION (Operation / inspection mode) > INSTALL

    Com-Test

    Execution of Embedded-RDS communication test Detail To execute Embedded-RDS communication test. If the connection fails, the information is added to the communication error log. Use Case When using E-RDS Adj/Set/Operate Method Select the item, and then press Yes key. Caution Be sure to use ERDS, RGW-PORT, COM-TEST, COM-RSLT, and COM-LOG as a set. Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 1 Default Value 0 Related Service Mode

    Copier > Function > Install > Erds, Rgw-Port, Com-Rslt, Com-Log

    Supplement/Memo Embedded-RDS: Function to send device information such as the device counter, failure, and consumables to UGW via SOAP protocol UGW (Universal Gate Way): Remote monitoring service system

    Com-Rslt

    Embedded-RDS communication test result Detail To display the Embedded-RDS communication test result. Use Case When using E-RDS Adj/Set/Operate Method N/A (Display only) Caution Be sure to use ERDS, RGW-PORT, COM-TEST, COM-RSLT, and COM-LOG as a set. Display/Adj/Set Range When not in execution : Unknown, When connection is completed : OK, When connection is failed : NG Default Value Unknown Related Service Mode

    Copier > Function > Install > Erds, Rgw-Port, Com-Test, Com-Log

    Supplement/Memo Embedded-RDS: Function to send device information such as the device counter, failure, and consumables to UGW via SOAP protocol UGW (Universal Gate Way): Remote monitoring service system

    Com-Log

    Embedded-RDS communication error log Detail To display the Embedded-RDS communication error log. The dates, times, and error codes of the latest 5 errors that occurred are displayed. As for the error detail information, the report can be output by executing COPIER > FUNCTION >

    Misc-P > Erds-Log.

    Use Case When using Embedded-RDS Caution Be sure to use ERDS, RGW-PORT, COM-TEST, COM-RSLT, and COM-LOG as a set. Display/Adj/Set Range Date : 6 digits Time : 4 digits Error code : 8 digits Related Service Mode

    Copier > Function > Install > Erds, Rgw-Port, Com-Test, Com-Rslt

    Copier > Function > Misc-P > Erds-Log

    Supplement/Memo Embedded-RDS: Function to send device information such as the device counter, failure, and consumables to UGW via SOAP protocol UGW (Universal Gate Way): Remote monitoring service system
  • Service Mode
  • 216

    Page 225

    COPIER (Service mode for printer) > FUNCTION (Operation / inspection mode) > INSTALL

    Rgw-Adsw

    UGW connection destination settings for Embedded-RDS Detail To change the server URL that the Embedded-RDS uses. Adj/Set/Operate Method Enter the setting value, and then press Apply key. Caution Com-TEST needs to be executed to reflect the settings. Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 2

    0 : Sha1

    1 : Sha2

    2 : D1 Environment (for testing) Default Value 0 Related Service Mode

    Copier > Function > Install > Com-Test

    Supplement/Memo Embedded-RDS: Function to send device information such as the device counter, failure, and consumables to UGW via SOAP protocol UGW (Universal Gate Way): Remote monitoring service system OPTION (Specification setting mode)

    ■ Body

    COPIER (Service mode for printer) > OPTION (Specification setting mode) > BODY

    Locale

    Setting of location Detail To set the location. At installation in areas other than Japan, perform the following procedure to match the setting information with that of the location. Use Case
  • At installation
  • When changing the location information
  • Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Enter the setting value under LOCALE, and then press Apply key. 2) Set the paper size configuration under SIZE-LC. 3) Execute COPIER > FUNCTION > CLEAR > ALL. 4) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Caution Since COPIER> FUNCTION> CLEAR> ALL is executed when changing the location, the setting information of user mode, service mode, etc. is initialized. The setting information of this item is not initialized. Display/Adj/Set Range 1 to 10 1 : Japan 2 : North America 3 : Korea 4 : China 5 : Taiwan 6 : Europe 7 : Asia 8 : Oceania 9 : Brazil 10 : Latin Default Value 1 Related Service Mode

    Copier> Function> Clear> All

    Copier> Option> Body> Size-Lc

  • Service Mode
  • 217

    Page 226

    COPIER (Service mode for printer) > OPTION (Specification setting mode) > BODY

    Size-Lc

    Setting of paper size configuration Detail To set the paper size configuration. At installation in areas other than Japan, perform the following procedure to match the setting information with that of the location. Use Case
  • At installation
  • Upon user's request
  • Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Set the location under LOCALE. 2) Set the paper size configuration under SIZE-LC, and then press Apply key. 3) Execute COPIER > FUNCTION > CLEAR > ALL. 4) Turn OFF / ON the main power switch. Caution Since COPIER > FUNCTION > CLEAR > ALL is executed when changing the location, the setting information of user mode, service mode, etc. is initialized. The setting information of this item is not initialized. Display/Adj/Set Range 1 to 4 1 : AB configuration 2 : Inch configuration 3 : A configuration 4 : AB / Inch configuration Related Service Mode

    Copier > Function > Clear > All

    Copier > Option > Body > Locale

    Ns-Cmd5

    Setting of CRAM-MD5 authentication method at SMTP authentication Detail Restriction of the use of CRAM-MD5 authentication method at SMTP authentication When 1 is set, CRAM-MD5 authentication method is not used. Use Case Upon user's request Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press Apply key. 2) Turn OFF / ON the main power switch. Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 1 0 : Used (SMTP server-dependent), 1 : Not used Default Value 0 Supplement/Memo SMTP authentication: Protocol in which user authentication function is added to SMTP, which is the protocol to be used for e-mail transmission. At the time of e-mail transmission, this protocol executes authentication of the user account and the password between the SMTP server and the user to approve e-mail transmission only when it's authenticated.

    Ns-Pln

    Setting of plaintext authentication at SMTP authentication Detail To restrict use of PLAIN / LOGIN authentication, which is plaintext authentication, at the time of SMTP authentication under the environment where the communication packet is not encrypted. When 1 is set, plaintext authentication is not used. Use Case Upon user's request Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press Apply key. 2) Turn OFF / ON the main power switch. Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 1 0 : Used (SMTP server-dependent) 1 : Not used Default Value 0 Supplement/Memo SMTP authentication: Protocol in which user authentication function is added to SMTP, which is the protocol to be used for e-mail transmission. At the time of e-mail transmission, this protocol executes authentication of the user account and the password between the SMTP server and the user to approve e-mail transmission only when it's authenticated.
  • Service Mode
  • 218

    Page 227

    COPIER (Service mode for printer) > OPTION (Specification setting mode) > BODY

    Ns-Lgn

    Setting of LOGIN authentication at SMTP authentication Detail Restriction of the use of LOGIN authentication method at SMTP authentication When 1 is set, LOGIN authentication method is not used. Use Case Upon user's request Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press Apply key. 2) Turn OFF / ON the main power switch. Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 1 0 : Used (SMTP server-dependent) 1 : Not used Default Value 0 Supplement/Memo SMTP authentication: Protocol in which user authentication function is added to SMTP, which is the protocol to be used for e-mail transmission. At the time of e-mail transmission, this protocol executes authentication of the user account and the password between the SMTP server and the user to approve e-mail transmission only when it's authenticated.

    Slpmode

    Setting of shift to sleep mode Detail To restrict shift to sleep mode 1/sleep mode 3. Use Case When sleep failure occurs Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press Apply key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Caution To restrict shift to sleep mode 2 is not available. Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 1 0 : Shift is available. 1 : Shift is not available. Default Value 0

    Sdtm-Dsp

    Setting of automatic shutdown menu display Detail It is a new function added to support LOT6. To display the auto shutdown menu in the machine supporting LOT6. Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press Apply key. 2) Turn OFF / ON the main power switch. Caution Even the models not supporting auto shutdown function display the service mode item (In such case, the menu will not be displayed even 1 is set). Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 1 0 : Hide the menu 1 : Display the menu Default Value 0

    Rmt-Sw

    ON/OFF of RUI service mode function Detail To set whether to enable the service mode function that can be used on remote UI. Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press Apply key. 2) Turn OFF / ON the main power switch. Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 1

    0 : Off

    1 : On

    Default Value 0
  • Service Mode
  • 219

    Page 228

    COPIER (Service mode for printer) > OPTION (Specification setting mode) > BODY

    Pswd-Sw

    Service mode password level Detail To change the service mode password level. Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press Apply key. 2) Turn OFF / ON the main power switch. Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 2 0: Password is not required 1: Password for service engineer is required 2: Passwords for service engineer and system administrator at user's site are required Default Value 0

    Sm-Pswd

    Password for service engineer Detail To set the password for service technician in 8-digit decimal number. Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press Apply key. 2) Turn OFF / ON the main power switch. Display/Adj/Set Range 1 to 99999999 Default Value 11111111

    ■ Fnc-Sw

    COPIER (Service mode for printer) > OPTION (Specification setting mode) > FNC-SW

    Crg-Proc

    Setting of the operation at the end of CRG life Detail To set the following 3 kinds of operations at the end of CRG life: Not stopped / Stopped once/ Completely stopped. Adj/Set/Operate Method Enter the setting value, and then press Apply key. Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 2 0 : Not stopped (default of B&W machine) 1 : Stopped once (default for color machine) 2 : Completely stopped Default Value 0

    Crglf-K

    Reference value of components other than toner included in the CRG life (for K) Detail Reference value of the life of the components other than toner (Drum / Developing Assembly / waste toner) included in the life of CRG (for K) Adj/Set/Operate Method Enter the setting value, and then press Apply key. Display/Adj/Set Range 100 to 200 Default Value 100

    ■ Dsply-Sw

    COPIER (Service mode for printer) > OPTION (Specification setting mode) > DSPLY-SW

    Crglw-Lv

    SW to display / hide the setting menu (user mode) of toner low threshold value Detail To switch whether to display the menu to set the threshold value in user mode which generates toner low. Adj/Set/Operate Method Enter the setting value, and then press Apply key. Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 1 Default Value 1
  • Service Mode
  • 220

    Page 229

    ■ Img-Mcon

    COPIER (Service mode for printer) > OPTION (Specification setting mode) > IMG-MCON

    Regm-Sel

    Adjustment of fine density correction Detail To adjust fine density correction. Use Case When the density of fine line or text is dark of light at 1200 dpi printing. Adj/Set/Operate Method Set +1 to make the density of fine line or text darker, and -1 to make it lighter at 1200 dpi printing. Display/Adj/Set Range -1, 0, +1 Default Value 0

    ■ User

    COPIER (Service mode for printer) > OPTION (Specification setting mode) > USER

    Scall-Sw

    ON/OFF of Service Call button display Detail To set whether to display or hide the Service Call button on the Touch Panel. When 1 is set, the button is displayed. Use Case When the sales company supports service initiated by the Service Call button Adj/Set/Operate Method Enter the setting value, and then press Apply key. Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 1

    0 : Off

    1 : On

    Default Value 0

    Scallcmp

    Setting of Service Call complete notice Detail To set whether to notify the completion of Service Call. With this setting enabled, a notification of repair completion is sent to UGW to clear the Service Call status that is retained internally. Use Case When service technician uses this mode after completing repair Adj/Set/Operate Method Enter the setting value, and then press Apply key. Caution After executing "1: Notified", the setting value becomes 0 immediately. Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 1 0 : Not notified 1 : Notified Default Value 0

    Ps-Mode

    Setting of compatible mode at PS usage Detail To set for compatibility with existing machine regarding image process or print specification with PS print. Setting of a value other than the setting values means that multiple settings are combined. (Example: 7=1+2+4) Use Case At replacement Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press Apply key. 2) Turn OFF / ON the main power switch. Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 63 8 : Change of default value of StrokeAdjust Default Value 0

    Smd-Expt

    Export of service mode Detail To enable the export of service mode setting values from RUI. Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 1 0: Disabled 1: Enabled Default Value 0
  • Service Mode
  • 221

    Page 230

    COPIER (Service mode for printer) > OPTION (Specification setting mode) > USER

    Acc-Slp

    Switching of the restriction to shift to sleep mode 3 when the card is connected Detail To switch whether to restrict the shift to sleep 3 when the card is connected. Adj/Set/Operate Method Enter the setting value, and then press Apply key. Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 1 0 : The machine does not shift to sleep mode 3. 1 : The machine shifts to sleep mode 3. Default Value 1

    Rpl-Imp

    Turning ON/OFF at replacement mode Detail To be able to import the settings values (which are exported by DCM and can only be imported to host machine) unique to the model such as IPv4 addresses to a different machine by turning ON the replacement mode. Use Case When migrating the settings at replacement of a host machine with a different one of the same model. Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 1 Default Value 0

    ■ Acc

    COPIER (Service mode for printer) > OPTION (Specification setting mode) > ACC

    Wlan

    Presence/absence of the wireless LAN function Detail To set whether to enable the wireless LAN function. Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press Apply key. 2) Turn OFF / ON the main power switch. Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 1 0 : Disabled 1 : Enabled Default Value 0 (Model where wireless LAN is provided as an option), 1 (Wireless LAN model)

    Wlanmode

    Setting of IEEE802.11n Detail To set whether to enable IEEE802.11n which is the wireless LAN standard. Use Case Upon user's request Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press Apply key. 2) Turn OFF / ON the main power switch. Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 1 0 : Disabled 1 : Enabled Default Value 1 (All models)

    Unif-Of

    Forcible deactivation of the uniFLOW function Detail If this switch is set to 1 and the device power is turned OFF and then ON while the uniFLOW function is in active state, the uniFLOW function is forcibly deactivated. In addition, when this switch is set to 1, Activate/Deactivate request from the server is ignored. Use Case Avoidance operation performed by a service engineer in the event of a uniFLOW failure. Used when, for example, connection to the uniFLOW server fails due to an error in the device. Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press Apply key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Caution Use only when necessary. After the work is completed, set the value back to 0. Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 1 0: Disabled, 1: Enabled Default Value 0
  • Service Mode
  • 222

    Page 231

    ■ Serial

    COPIER (Service mode for printer) > OPTION (Specification setting mode) > SERIAL

    Sn-Main

    Entry of serial number Detail To write the serial number of this machine in the Main Controller PCB. When this item is executed, the 8-digit alphanumeric entered in System Settings > Device Information > Location in user mode is written in the Main Controller PCB. When replacing the Main Controller PCB, be sure to write the serial number in the new PBC to prepare for trouble since the serial number of the device is not succeeded. Use Case
  • When replacing the Main Controller PCB
  • Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Write down the current data in System Settings > Device Information > Location in user mode. 2) After turning OFF the main power, replace the Main Controller PCB. 3) Enter the serial number (8-digit alphanumeric) in "Location" of step 1. 4) Execute SN-MAIN. After writing, the serial number entered in step 3 is deleted. 5) Turn OFF and the ON the main power. 6) Execute COPIER > FUNCTION > MISC-P> SPEC to output the spec report to check the serial number. 7) Enter the data backed up in step 1 in "Location". Caution Since the above "Location" is only temporarily used to store data, back up the data before input and enter it again after writing is completed. Related Service Mode

    Copier > Function > Misc-P > Spec

    Additional Functions Mode System Settings > Device Information> Location COUNTER (Counter mode)

    ■ Total

    COPIER (Service mode for printer) > COUNTER (Counter mode) > TOTAL

    Service1

    Service-purposed total counter 1 Detail To advance the counter when a paper is delivered outside the printer. The counter is advanced regardless of the original size. The counter is not advanced by delivery in service mode. Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 99999999 Unit Number of sheets Default Value 0

    Service2

    Service-purposed total counter 2 Detail To advance the counter when a paper is delivered outside the printer. The counter is advanced regardless of the original size. The counter is not advanced by delivery in service mode. Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 99999999 Unit Number of sheets Default Value 0

    Ttl

    Total counter Detail To display the total of counters of COPY, PDL-PRT, FAX-PRT, RPT-PRT, and MD-PRT. Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 99999999 Unit Number of sheets Default Value 0 Related Service Mode

    Copier > Counter > Tota L> Copy, Pdl-Prt, Fax-Prt, Rpt-Prt, Md-Prt

  • Service Mode
  • 223

    Page 232

    COPIER (Service mode for printer) > COUNTER (Counter mode) > TOTAL

    Copy

    Total copy counter Detail To advance the counter when a paper is delivered outside the printer. The counter is advanced regardless of the original size. The counter is not advanced by delivery in service mode. Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 99999999 Unit Number of sheets Default Value 0 Related Service Mode

    Copier > Counter > Total > Ttl

    Pdl-Prt

    PDL print counter Detail To count up when the PDL print is delivered outside the machine/2-sided printout is stacked. The counter is advanced regardless of the original size. The counter is not advanced by blank paper or delivery in service mode. Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 99999999 Unit Number of sheets Default Value 0 Related Service Mode

    Copier > Counter > Total > Ttl

    Fax-Prt

    FAX reception print counter Detail To count up when the FAX reception print is delivered outside the machine/2-sided printout is stacked. The counter is advanced regardless of the original size. The counter is not advanced by blank paper or delivery in service mode. Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 99999999 Unit Number of sheets Default Value 0 Related Service Mode

    Copier > Counter > Total > Ttl

    Supplement/Memo FAX model only

    Rpt-Prt

    Report print counter Detail To count up when the report print is delivered outside the machine/2-sided printout is stacked. The counter is advanced regardless of the original size. The counter is not advanced by blank paper or delivery in service mode. Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 99999999 Unit Number of sheets Related Service Mode

    Copier > Counter > Total > Ttl

    Md-Prt

    Media print counter Detail To count up when the media print is delivered outside the machine. The counter is advanced regardless of the original size. The counter is not advanced by blank paper or delivery in service mode. Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 99999999 Unit Number of sheets Default Value 0 Related Service Mode

    Copier > Counter > Total > Ttl

    2-Side

    2-sided copy/print counter Detail To count up the number of 2-sided copies/prints when the copy/printout is delivered outside the machine/2-sided copy/printout is stacked. The counter is advanced regardless of the original size. The counter is not advanced by blank paper or delivery in service mode. Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 99999999 Unit Number of times Default Value 0
  • Service Mode
  • 224

    Page 233

    COPIER (Service mode for printer) > COUNTER (Counter mode) > TOTAL

    Scan

    Scan counter Detail To count up the number of scan operations when the scanning operation is complete. The counter is advanced regardless of the original size. The counter is not advanced by delivery in service mode. Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 99999999 Unit Number of times Default Value 0

    ■ Pick-Up

    COPIER (Service mode for printer) > COUNTER (Counter mode) > PICK-UP

    C1

    Cassette 1 pickup total counter Detail To count up the number of sheets picked up from the Cassette 1 (standard Pickup Cassette). The counter is advanced regardless of the original size. The counter is advanced by printout in service mode. Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 99999999 Unit Number of sheets Default Value 0

    C2

    Cassette 2 pickup total counter Detail To count up the number of sheets picked up from the Cassette 2 (option Pickup Cassette). The counter is advanced regardless of the original size. The counter is advanced by printout in service mode. Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 99999999 Unit Number of sheets Default Value 0

    Mf

    Multi-purpose Tray pickup total counter Detail To count up the number of sheets picked up from the Multi-purpose Tray Pickup Unit. The counter is advanced regardless of the original size. The counter is advanced by printout in service mode. Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 99999999 Unit Number of sheets Default Value 0

    2-Side

    2-sided pickup total counter Detail To count up the number of sheets picked up in duplex mode. The counter is advanced regardless of the original size. The counter is advanced by printout in service mode. Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 99999999 Unit Number of sheets Default Value 0

    ■ Feeder

    COPIER (Service mode for printer) > COUNTER (Counter mode) > FEEDER

    Feed

    ADF original pickup total counter Detail To count up the number of originals picked up from the ADF. The counter is advanced regardless of the original size. Use Case When checking the total counter of original pickup by ADF Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 99999999 Unit Number of sheets Default Value 0
  • Service Mode
  • 225

    Page 234

    ■ Jam

    COPIER (Service mode for printer) > COUNTER (Counter mode) > JAM

    Total

    Printer total jam counter Detail To count up the number of total jam occurrences. Use Case When checking the total jam counter of printer Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 99999999 Unit Number of times Default Value 0

    Feeder

    ADF total jam counter Detail When checking the total jam counter of ADF Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 99999999 Unit Number of times Default Value 0

    2-Side

    Duplex Unit jam counter Detail To count up the number of jam occurrences in the Duplex Unit. Use Case When checking the jam counter of Duplex Unit Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 99999999 Unit Number of times Default Value 0

    Mf

    Multi-purpose Pickup Tray jam counter Detail To count up the number of jam occurrences in the Multi-purpose Tray Pickup Unit. The counter is advanced by paper size mismatch or misprint. Use Case When checking the jam counter of Multi-purpose Pickup Tray Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 99999999 Unit Number of times Default Value 0

    C1

    Cassette 1 pickup jam counter Detail To count up the number of jam occurrences in the Cassette 1 (standard Pickup Cassette). The counter is advanced by paper size mismatch or misprint. Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 99999999 Unit Number of times Default Value 0

    C2

    Cassette 2 pickup jam counter Detail To count up the number of jam occurrences in the Cassette 2 (option Pickup Cassette). The counter is advanced by paper size mismatch or misprint. Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 99999999 Unit Number of times Default Value 0
  • Service Mode
  • 226

    Page 235

    ■ Drbl-2

    COPIER (Service mode for printer) > COUNTER (Counter mode) > DRBL-2

    Df-Sp-Pd

    Separation Pad parts counter: ADF Detail When counting the number of sheets fed, a sheet of paper whose length in the vertical scanning direction exceeds 324 mm is counted as 2, and a sheet of paper other than that is counted as 1. Accumulated counter value Use Case When checking the consumption level of parts/replacing the parts Adj/Set/Operate Method To clear the counter value: Select the item, and then enter 0.Press Apply key. Caution Clear the counter value after replacement. Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 99999999 Unit Number of sheets Default Value 0

    Df-Sp-Rl

    ADF Pickup Roller parts counter Detail When counting the number of sheets fed, a sheet of paper whose length in the vertical scanning direction exceeds 324 mm is counted as 2, and a sheet of paper other than that is counted as 1. Accumulated counter value Use Case When checking the consumption level of parts/replacing the parts Adj/Set/Operate Method To clear the counter value: Select the item, and then enter 0. Press Apply key. Caution Clear the counter value after replacement. Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 99999999 Unit Number of sheets Default Value 0
  • Service Mode
  • 227

    Page 236

    FEEDER (ADF service mode) ADJUST (Adjustment mode) FEEDER (ADF service mode) > ADJUST (Adjustment mode)

    Docst

    Fine adjustment of VSYNC timing at ADF reading [front side] Detail To make a fine adjustment of the VSYNC timing when reading the front side of original with ADF. Execute this item when the output image after ADF installation is displaced. When replacing the Main Controller PCB / clearing RAM, enter the value of service label. As the value is incremented by 1, the margin at the leadgin edge of image is reduced by 0.1%. (The image moves in the direction of the leading edge of the sheet.) Use Case
  • When installing the ADF
  • When replacing the Main Contoroller PCB/ clearing RAM data
  • Adj/Set/Operate Method Enter the setting value (switch negative / positive by * key) and press Apply key. Display/Adj/Set Range -30 to 30 Unit 0.1 mm Default Value 0

    La-Spd

    Fine adjustment of magnification ratio in vertical scanning direction at ADF stream reading [front side] Detail To make a fine adjustment of the image magnification ratio in vertical scanning direction when stream reading the front side of original with ADF. As the value is incremented by 1, the image is reduced by 0.01% in vertical scanning direction. (The feeding speed increases, and the image is reduced.) Use Case
  • When installing the ADF
  • When replacing the Main Controller PCB/ clearing RAM data
  • Adj/Set/Operate Method Enter the setting value (switch negative / positive by * key) and press Apply key. Display/Adj/Set Range -200 to 200 Unit 0.01% Default Value 0

    Docst2

    Fine adjustment of VSYNC timing at ADF reading [back side] Detail To make a fine adjustment of the VSYNC timing when reading the back side of original with ADF. Execute this item when the output image after ADF installation is displaced. When replacing the Main Controller PCB / clearing RAM, enter the value of service label. As the value is incremented by 1, the margin at the leading edge of the image is decreased by 0.1mm. (The image moves in the direction of the leading edge of the sheet.) Use Case
  • When installing the ADF
  • When replacing the Main Controller PCB / clearing RAM data
  • Adj/Set/Operate Method Enter the setting value (switch negative / positive by * key) and press Apply key. Display/Adj/Set Range -30 to 30 Unit 0.1 mm Default Value 0
  • Service Mode
  • 228

    Page 237

    FEEDER (ADF service mode) > ADJUST (Adjustment mode)

    La-Spd2

    Fine adjustment of magnification ratio in vertical scanning direction at ADF stream reading [back side] Detail To make a fine adjustment of the image magnification ratio in vertical scanning direction when stream reading the back side of original with ADF. As the value is incremented by 1, the image is reduced by 0.01% in vertical scanning direction. (The feeding speed increases, and the image is reduced.) Use Case
  • When installing the ADF
  • When replacing the Main Controller PCB / clearing RAM data
  • Adj/Set/Operate Method Enter the setting value (switch negative / positive by * key) and press Apply key. Display/Adj/Set Range -200 to 200 Unit 0.01% Default Value 0

    Docstdup

    DADF img lead edge margin:front, 2-sided Detail To adjust the margin at the leading edge of the image on the front side at DADF 2-sided reading. As the value is incremented by 1, the margin at the leading edge of the image is decreased by 0.1mm. (The image moves in the direction of the leading edge of the sheet.) Execute this item when the output image after DADF installation is displaced. When replacing the Scanner Unit or Controller PCB/clearing the Reader-related RAM data, enter the value of service label. Use Case
  • When installing DADF
  • When replacing the Scanner Unit
  • When clearing the Reader-related RAM data
  • Adj/Set/Operate Method Enter the setting value (switch negative / positive by * key) and press Apply key. Caution Be sure to use DOCST at the time of 1-sided reading. Display/Adj/Set Range -30 to 30 Unit 0.1 mm Default Value 0 Related Service Mode

    Feeder> Adjust> Docst, Docst2

    Supplement/Memo Since the front side reading operation differs between 1-sided and 2-sided reading, separate service modes have been prepared to improve the accuracy. FUNCTION (Operation / inspection mode) FEEDER (ADF service mode) > FUNCTION (Operation / inspection mode)

    Mtr-On

    Operation check of ADF Motor Detail To start operation check of ADF Motor (M702). Use Case At operation check Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Select the item, and then press Yes key. It is driven for approximately 5 seconds and is automatically stopped. 2) Press Yes key. The operation check is completed. Required Time 5 secons

    Feed-On

    Operation check of ADF individual feed Detail To start operation check of the ADF individual feed in the mode specified by FEED-CHK. Use Case At operation check Adj/Set/Operate Method Select the item, and then press Yes key. Related Service Mode

    Feeder > Function > Feed-Chk

  • Service Mode
  • 229

    Page 238

    FEEDER (ADF service mode) > FUNCTION (Operation / inspection mode)

    Feed-Chk

    Setting of ADF individual feed mode Detail To set the ADF feed mode. Feed operation is activated in the specified feed mode by executing FEED-ON. Use Case At operation check Adj/Set/Operate Method Enter the value, and then press Apply key. Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 1 0 : One-sided 1 : 2-sided Default Value 0 Related Service Mode

    Feeder > Function > Feed-On

  • Service Mode
  • 230

    Page 239

    Fax

    List of SSSW SSSW No. Bit No. Function

    Sw 01

    (Switch relating to error and copy) Bit 0 Output of error code for service technician Bit 1 Error memory dump

    Sw 02

    (Switch relating to settings for network connection condition) Bit 7 Connect the terminal as F network type 2

    Sw 03

    (Switch relating to echo prevention) Bit 0 TCF EQM check Bit 7 Output 1080Hz before CED

    Sw 04

    (Switch relating to prevention of communication problems) Bit 1 Frequency check of CI signal Bit 3 Prohibit T.30 node F kept by both parties Bit 4 T.30 node F echo timer Bit 5 Frequency check of CI signal at PBX settings Bit 6 No CNG transmission at the time of manual transmission Bit 7 No CED transmission at the time of manual transmission

    Sw 05

    (Switch relating to standard functions and DIS signal settings) Bit 2 mm/inch conversion (text/photo mode / photo mode) Bit 3 Prohibition of bit transmission after DIS bit 33 Bit 4 Declaration of cut paper

    Sw 06

    (Switch relating to settings for reading condition) Bit 4 Scan width 0: A4, 1: LTR SW 07 to 11

    Not in use

    Sw 12

    (Switch relating to settings for page timer) Bit 0 Timeout period for 1 page (transmission) Bit 1 Timeout period for 1 page (transmission) Bit 2 Timeout period for 1 page (Halftone transmission) Bit 3 Timeout period for 1 page (Halftone transmission) Bit 4 Timeout period for 1 page (Reception) Bit 5 Timeout period for 1 page (Reception) Bit 7 Timeout period for 1 page

    Sw 13

    Bit 2 Execution of mm/inch conversion when sending the received image

    Sw 14

    Bit 2 Setting whether to execute inch to mm conversion in horizontal and vertical scanning directions or in vertical scanning direction only Bit 4 Declaration of inch-configuration resolution

    Sw 16

    Not in use

    Sw 17

    Bit 1 Range of selection of transmission level of modem (0 : 8 to 15, 1 : 0 to 15)

    Sw 18

    Bit 0 Detection of carrier disconnection between DCS and TCF Bit 1 Time to wait for carrier disconnection between DCS and TCF Bit 2 Prohibition of communication control for IP network SW 19 to 21

    Not in use

    Sw 22

    Bit 3 Prohibition of manual polling operation SW 23 to 24

    Not in use

    Sw 25

    (Setting for report display function) Bit 0 Prioritize the received abbreviated name to the dialed abbreviated name SW 26 to 27

    Not in use

  • Service Mode
  • 231

    Page 240

    SSSW No. Bit No. Function

    Sw 28

    Bit 0 Prohibit calling party for V8 procedure Bit 1 Prohibit called party from V8 procedure Bit 2 Prohibit calling party from V8 late-start Bit 3 Prohibit called party from V8 late-start Bit 4 Prohibit V.34 called party from starting fallback Bit 5 Prohibit V.34 calling party from starting fallback SW 29 to 35

    Not in use List of MENU No. Parameter Selection 01 to 05 Not in use 06 Telephone line monitor 0 to 3

    0: Dial

    1: Serviceman1

    2: Serviceman2

    3: Off

    07 Transmission level (ATT) 0 to 15 08 Upper limit of V.34 modulation speed 0 to 5

    0: 3429 Baud

    1: 3200 Baud

    2: 3000 Baud

    3: 2800 Baud

    4: 2743 Baud

    5: 2400 Baud

    09 Upper limit of V.34 data speed 0 to 13 0: 33.6 kbps 1: 31.2 kbps 2: 28.8 kbps 3: 26.4 kbps 4: 24.0 kbps 5: 21.6 kbps 6: 19.2 kbps 7: 16.8 kbps 8: 14.4 kbps 9: 12.0 kbps 10: 9.6 kbps 11: 7.2 kbps 12: 4.8 kbps 13: 2.4 kbps 10 OFF Hook signal frequency 0 to 2 0: 50 Hz 1: 25 Hz 2: 17 Hz 11 to 20 Not in use List of NUM Numeric parameter setting mode No. Parameter Allowable setting range 01 Not in use

    02 RTN transmission criteria X 1 to 99 % 03 RTN transmission criteria n 2 to 99 times 04 RTN transmission criteria m 1 to 99 lines 05 NCC pause (before ID code) 1 to 60 sec 06 NCC pause (after ID code) 1 to 60 sec

  • Service Mode
  • 232

    Page 241

    Numeric parameter setting mode No. Parameter Allowable setting range 07 Spare

    08 STORED_DIAL_MODE wait timer 0 to 65 sec 09 Not in use

    10 T.30 T0 timer 55 sec principally 11 T.30 T1 timer (for incoming transmission) 0 to 9999 (France: 3500, Others: 3000) 12 Maximum incoming lines 0 to 65535 (line)0: without limitation 13 T.30 EOL timer 500 to 3000 (set to 55 sec by default) 14 Not in use

    15 Threshold between hokking nad on-hook 0 to 999 16 Lead time to the first response when switching between FAX and TEL 0 to 9 17 Duration to activate pseudo-RBT cadence 0 to 999 18 Duration to deactivate pseudo-RBT cadence (short) 0 to 999 19 Duration to deactivate pseudo-RBT cadence (long) 0 to 999 20 Duration to activate pseudo-ring cadence 0 to 999 21 Duration to deactivate OFF Hook cadence (short) 0 to 999 22 Duration to deactivate OFF Hook cadence (long) 0 to 7 23 to 24 Not in use

    25 CNG monitor duration while the answering device is activated 0 to 999 26 to 28 Not in use

    29 Off-hook PCB duty settings(For NAC, setting can be made with SPL71100 in special management mode.) 20 (*10ms) 30 to 48 Not in use

    49

    Nsx Model Id

    0 to 4095 50 Not in use

    51 Threshold to detect hook 10 to 9999 52 Not in use

    53 Set DTMF calling counts when receiving FAX remotely 10 to 9999 (default 25) 54 Set Busy Tone outgoing duration when using handset

    55 to 80 Not in use

    Setting of NCU Parameters

    ■ Tone/Pulse

    Operation Method
  • Setting of Tone Parameters
  • Operate as follows, and change to the parameter setting mode.
  • While "#NCU" is displayed, press "OK" key
  • Press "#TONE" key
  • Press "OK" key
  • Setting of Pulse Parameters
  • Operate as follows, and change to the pulse setting mode.
  • While "#NCU" is displayed, press "OK" key
  • Press "#PULSE" key
  • press "OK" key
  • Item Function Setting range

    Tone

    01; Tone signal sending time (PSTN) 10 to 9999 (msec) 02; Minimum pause time (PSTN) 10 to 9999 (msec)

    Pulse

    Pulse Form

    Pulse digit format 0 to DP ( N ) 1 to DP ( N+1 ) 2 to DP ( 10-N )

    Pulse Num

    01; Not in use

    02; Not in use

    03; Pulse dial make ratio 10 to 90 (%)

  • Service Mode
  • 233

    Page 242

    Item Function Setting range

    Pulse

    Pulse Num

    04; Minimum pause time 10 to 9999 (msec)

    ■ Dial Tone

    ● Bit Switch Bit No. Function 1 0 Bit 0
  • -
  • Bit 1
  • Cadence pattern check Not detected Detected Bit 2 Signal frequency Changed Not changed Bit 3
  • -
  • Bit 4
  • Judgment of intermittent signal start from valid ON signal start from either valid ON signal or OFF signal Bit 5
  • -
  • Bit 6
  • Signal form Continuous Intermittent Bit 7 Signal detection Detected Not detected ● Numeric value parameter Parameter No. Function Setting range 01; T0 timer 0 to 9999 (x 10 msec) 02; T1 timer 0 to 9999 (x 10 msec) 03; T2 timer 0 to 9999 (x 10 msec) 04; T3 timer 0 to 9999 (x 10 msec) 05; T4 timer 0 to 9999 (x 10 msec) 06; Signal detection table 0 to 16 07; Signal detection level 0 to 7 08; Number of signal frequency 0 to 9999 ■ 2nd DIAL TONE Not in use

    ■ Busy Tone 0

    ● Bit Switch Bit No. Function 1 0 Bit 0
  • -
  • Bit 1
  • -
  • Bit 2
  • -
  • Bit 3
  • -
  • Bit 4
  • -
  • Bit 5
  • -
  • Bit 6
  • -
  • Bit 7
  • Signal detection Detected Not detected ● Numeric value parameter Not in use

    ■ Busy Tone 1

    ● Bit Switch Bit No. Function 1 0 Bit 0
  • -
  • Service Mode
  • 234

    Page 243

    Bit No. Function 1 0 Bit 1

  • -
  • Bit 2
  • -
  • Bit 3
  • -
  • Bit 4
  • -
  • Bit 5
  • -
  • Bit 6
  • -
  • Bit 7
  • Signal detection Detected Not detected ● Numeric value parameter Parameter No. Function Setting range 01;
  • -
  • 02; T1 timer 0 to 9999 (x 10 msec) 03; T2 timer 0 to 9999 (x 10 msec) 04; T3 timer 0 to 9999 (x 10 msec) 05; T4 timer 0 to 9999 (x 10 msec) 06; Signal detection table 0 to 16 07; Signal detection level 0 to 7 08; Number of signal frequency 0 to 9999

    ■ Reorder Tone

    ● Bit Switch Bit No. Function 1 0 Bit 0
  • -
  • Bit 1
  • -
  • Bit 2
  • Signal frequency Changed Not changed Bit 3
  • -
  • Bit 4
  • Judgment of intermittent signal start from valid ON signal start from either valid ON signal or OFF signal Bit 5
  • -
  • Bit 6
  • Signal form Continuous Intermittent Bit 7 Signal detection Detected Not detected ● Numeric value parameter Parameter No. Function Setting range 01;
  • -
  • 02; T1 timer 0 to 9999 (x 10 msec) 03; T2 timer 0 to 9999 (x 10 msec) 04; T3 timer 0 to 9999 (x 10 msec) 05; T4 timer 0 to 9999 (x 10 msec) 06; Signal detection table 0 to 16 07; Signal detection level 0 to 7 08; Number of signal frequency 0 to 9999

    ■ Multi

    Not in use
  • Service Mode
  • 235

    Page 244

    ■ Auto Rx

    ● Numeric value parameter Parameter No. Function Setting range 01; CI ON time 0 to 9999 (x 10 msec) 02; CI LONG ON time 0 to 9999 (x 10 msec) 03; CI OFF time 0 to 9999 (x 10 msec) 04; CI LONG OFF time 0 to 9999 (x 10 msec) 05; CI MAX OFF time 0 to 9999 (x 10 msec) 06; CI WAIT time 0 to 9999 (x 10 msec) 07; CI frequency 0 to 9999 (cycle) 08; CI frequency lower limit 0 to 9999 (Hz) 09; CI frequency upper limit 0 to 9999 (Hz)

    ■ Cng Detect

    ● Numeric value parameter Parameter No. Description Setting range 01; At F/T switching CNG MIN ON time 0 to 9999 (x10 msec) 02; CNG MAX ON time 0 to 9999 (x 10 msec) 03;
  • -
  • 04;
  • -
  • 05;
  • -
  • 06;
  • -
  • 07; At direct connecting to answering phone CNG MIN ON time 0 to 9999 (x 10 msec) 08; CNG MAX ON time 0 to 9999 (x 10 msec) 09; Tolerable time of instantaneous interrup- tion 0 to 9999 (x 10 msec) 10;
  • -
  • 11; Number of detection 0 to 9999 (times) 12; Hit ratio 0 to 9999 (%)

    ■ Rkey

    ● Numeric value parameter Parameter No. Function Setting range 01; Connection time of flash 0 to 9999 (x 10 msec) 02; Connection time of grounding wire 0 to 9999 (x 10 msec)

    ■ Pbx Dial Tone 1

    Not in use

    ■ Pbx Busy Tone

    Not in use
  • Service Mode
  • 236

    Page 245

    TESTMODE (Service mode for test print, operation check, etc.) PRINT (Print test mode) TESTMODE (Service mode for test print, operation check, etc.) > PRINT (Print test mode)

    Pg-Type

    Setting of PG number Detail To set the PG number of the test print. Use Case At trouble analysis Adj/Set/Operate Method Enter the setting value, and then press Apply key. Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 7 0: Grid Bk

    1: Ht

  • Solid black
  • 3: Solid white 4: 17 gradations 5: Thin horizontal line 6: Pascal correction chart 7: Chart128 Default Value 0

    Count

    Setting of PG output quantity Detail To set the number of sheets for PG output. Use Case At trouble analysis Adj/Set/Operate Method Enter the setting value, and then press Apply key. Display/Adj/Set Range 1 to 99 Unit 1 sheet Default Value 1

    Phase

    Setting of PG 2-sided mode Detail To set 1-sided/2-sided print for PG output. Even if 2-sided print is set for a machine that only supports 1-sided print, the setting is disabled. Use Case At trouble analysis Adj/Set/Operate Method Enter the setting value, and then press Apply key. Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 1 0 : 1-sided, 1 : 2-sided Default Value 0

    Mode

    Setting of test print image formation method Detail To set the image formation method for the test print. If PG-TYPE is 0/1, this setting is disabled because a specific image formation method is applied. Use Case At trouble analysis Adj/Set/Operate Method Enter the setting value, and then press Apply key. Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 4

    0: Tbic

    1: Resolution dithering 2: Gradation dithering 3: Color tone dithering 4: High-resolution dithering Default Value 0
  • Service Mode
  • 237

    Page 246

    TESTMODE (Service mode for test print, operation check, etc.) > PRINT (Print test mode)

    Thru

    Setting of image correction table at test print Detail It is possible to check the density characteristics due to the density correction process when normal gamma LUT is used, and the density characteristics of the engine when the linear gamma LUT is used. Use Case At trouble analysis Adj/Set/Operate Method Enter the setting value, and then press Apply key. Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 1 0 : Normal gamma LUT 1 : Through (linear) gamma LUT Default Value 0 Supplement/Memo Gamma LUT: Density gradation characteristic table

    Dens

    Adjustment of test print engine F value Detail This setting is used to adjust the F value of the engine of test print.The density increases as the value increases. Use Case At trouble analysis Adj/Set/Operate Method Enter the setting value (switch negative / positive by * key) and press Apply key. Display/Adj/Set Range -4 to 4 -4: Light +4: Dark Default Value 0

    Mabk

    Set toner thinning process at test print Detail To execute the thinning process to alleviate the toner scattering at test print. The thinning amount of toner increases in accordance with Mode 1 to Mode 4. Use Case Print Test print Adj/Set/Operate Method Enter the setting value, and then press Apply key. Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 3

    0: Off

    1: Mode1 2: Mode2 3: Mode3 Default Value 0

    Feed

    Setting of paper source at test print Detail To set the paper source at the time of test print output. If this mode is set when there is no Cassette 2 (option Pickup Cassette), the output is made from Cassette 1 (standard Pickup Cassette). Use Case At trouble analysis Adj/Set/Operate Method Enter the setting value, and then press Apply key. Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 4 0 : MP Tray 1 : Cassette1 2 : Cassette2 3 : Cassette3 4 : Cassette4 Default Value 1

    Start

    Output of test print Detail To output a test print with the PG pattern set in PG-TYPE, MODE, etc. Use Case At trouble analysis Adj/Set/Operate Method Press Apply key. Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 1 Default Value 0
  • Service Mode
  • 238

    Page 247

    FAX (FAX test mode)

    ■ Modem

    FAX model only

    Testmode > Fax > Modem

    Item Description

    Relay-1

    Title NCU relay test 1 Details N To test ON/OFF of relay and port switch of NCU. This mode is disabled for an NCU with no relay and port switch. Use case When analyzing the cause of a problem Adj/set/operate method Enter the setting value, and then press Apply key. Caution Be sure to set the value back to 0 after the test. Display/adj/set range 0 to 6 0: All OFF

    1: Cml On/Off

    2: P On/Off

    3: S On/Off

    4: H On/Off

    5: Hd On/Off

    6: R On/Off

    Default value 0 Related service mode

    Testmode > Fax > Modem > Relay-2

    Relay-2

    Title NCU relay test 2 Details To test ON/OFF of relay and port switch of NCU. This mode is disabled for an NCU with no relay and port switch. Use case When analyzing the cause of a problem Adj/set/operate method Enter the setting value, and then press Apply key. Caution Be sure to set the value back to 0 after the test. Display/adj/set range 0 to 7 0: All OFF

    1: Cist2 On/Off

    2: C1 On/Off

    3: Norg On/Off

    4: Dcsel On/Off

    5: Dclim On/Off

    6: Ipsel1 On/Off

    7: Ipsel2 On/Off

    Default value 0 Related service mode

    Testmode > Fax > Modem > Relay-1

    Freq

    Title To test whether the specified frequency is oscillated. By closing or opening the DC circuit in accordance with the setting value, the specified frequency is oscil- lated by the tone transmission function of the modem. Check this with the speaker. Details When analyzing the cause of a problem Adj/set/operate method Enter the setting value, and then press Apply key. Caution Be sure to set the value back to 0 after the test. Display/adj/set range 0 to 7

    0: Off

    1: 462 Hz 2: 1100 Hz 3: 1300 Hz 4: 1500 Hz 5: 1650 Hz 6: 1850 Hz, 7: 2100 Hz Default value 0
  • Service Mode
  • 239

    Page 248

    Testmode > Fax > Modem

    Item Description

    G3Tx

    Title G3 signal transmission test Details To test whether the specified G3 signal is transmitted. By closing or opening the DC circuit in accordance with the setting value, the specific G3 signal pattern is transmitted at the specified transmission speed by the G3 signal transmission function of the modem. Check this with the speaker. Adj/set/operate method Enter the setting value, and then press Apply key. Caution Be sure to set the value back to 0 after the test. Display/adj/set range 0 to 9

    0: Off

    1: 300 bps 2: 2400 bps 3: 4800 bps 4: 7200 bps 5: 9600 bps 6: TC7200 bps 7: TC9600 bps 8: 12000 bps 9: 14400 bps Default value 0

    Dtmftx

    Title DTMF transmission test Details To test whether the specified DTMF signal is transmitted. By closing or opening the DC circuit in accordance with the setting value, the specified DTMF signal is transmitted by the DTMF transmission function of the modem. Check this with the speaker. Adj/set/operate method Enter the setting value, and then press Apply key. Caution Be sure to set the value back to 0 after the test. Display/adj/set range 0 to 12

    0: Off

    1: 1 2: 2 3: 3 4: 4 5: 5 6: 6 7: 7 8: 8 9: 9 10: 0 11: * 12: # Default value 0 Supplement/memo DTMF (Dual Tone Multi Frequency): Signal method combining two specific frequencies like a push-tone phone.

    V34G3Tx

    Title V.34 G3 signal transmission test Details To test whether the specified V.34 G3 signal is transmitted. By closing or opening the DC circuit in accordance with the setting value, the specific G3 signal pattern is transmitted at the specified transmission speed and modulation speed by the G3 signal transmission func- tion (V.34) of the modem.Check this with the speaker. A setting value other than 0 is indicated as a 3-digit integer (1st digit: modulation speed, last 2 digits: transmission speed). A value other than the specified numerical value is invalid. Adj/set/operate method Enter the setting value, and then press Apply key. Caution Be sure to set the value back to 0 after the test.
  • Service Mode
  • 240

    Page 249

    Testmode > Fax > Modem

    Item Description Display/adj/set range 0 to 614

    0: Off

  • First digit (Modulation speed/baud rate)
  • 1: 2400 baud 2: 2743 baud 3: 2800 baud 4: 3000 baud 5: 3200 baud 6: 3429 baud
  • Last 2 digits (Transmission speed)
  • 01: 2400 bps 02: 4800 bps 03: 7200 bps 04: 9600 bps 05: 12000 bps 06: 14400 bps 07: 16800 bps 08: 19200 bps 09: 21600 bps 10: 24000 bps 11: 26400 bps 12: 28800 bps 13: 31200 bps 14: 33600 bps Default value 0

    ■ Faculty

    FAX model only

    Testmode > Fax > Faculty

    Item Description

    G34800Tx

    Title G3 4800 bps signal transmission test Details To test whether the G3 signal is transmitted at 4800 bps. By closing or opening the DC circuit, the specific G3 signal pattern is transmitted at 4800 bps by the G3 signal transmission function. Check this with the speaker. Adj/set/operate method Enter the setting value, and then press Apply key. Caution Be sure to set the value back to 0 after the test. Display/adj/set range 0 to 1

    0: Off

    1: On

    Default value 0

    Detect1

    Title Ring detection Details To check the ON/OFF state of CI, FC, and hook from the line. The detection results are displayed on the console (UART). Adj/set/operate method Enter the setting value, and then press Apply key. Caution Be sure to set the value back to 0 after the test. Display/adj/set range 0 to 1

    0: Off

    1: On

    Default value 0 Supplement/memo CI (Calling Identification): Ring signal UART (Universal Asynchronous Receiver Transmitter): Con- sole

    Detect2

    Title Calling tone detection test 1
  • Service Mode
  • 241

    Page 250

    Testmode > Fax > Faculty

    Item Description Details To check calling tone signal and FED. Set the CML relay to ON and detect the calling tone. The detection results are displayed on the console (UART). Adj/set/operate method Enter the setting value, and then press Apply key. Caution Be sure to set the value back to 0 after the test. Display/adj/set range 0 to 1

    0: Off

    1: On

    Default value 0 Supplement/memo CML (Connect Modem to Line) relay: Relay installed at the NCU (Network Control Unit) Board to switch between the telephone and fax.

    Detect3

    Title Calling tone detection test 2 Details To check calling tone signal and FED. Set the CML relay to OFF and detect the calling tone. The detection results are displayed on the console (UART). Adj/set/operate method Enter the setting value, and then press Apply key. Caution Be sure to set the value back to 0 after the test. Display/adj/set range 0 to 1

    0: Off

    1: On

    Default value 0 Supplement/memo CML (Connect Modem to Line) relay: Relay installed at the NCU (Network Control Unit) Board to switch between the telephone and fax.
  • Service Mode
  • 242

    Page 251

    Appendices

    Service Tools.................................... 244 General Timing Chart........................245 General Circuit Diagram....................246 Backup Data......................................247

    Page 252

    Service Tools Special Tools In addition to the standard tools set, the following special tools are required when servicing the machine: Name of Tool Parts.No Use Digital Multimeter

    Fy9-2002

    Used as a probe extension when making electrical checks. Solvents and Oils The table below lists the standard tools required in service works for this product. No. Name of Tool Use Remarks 1 Alcohol Cleaning: Plastic Rubber Metal part Oil stain Toner stain
  • Keep away from flame
  • Purchase locally
  • 2 Lubricant Apply to gear

    • Hy9-0007 (Molycote

    Em-50L)

    3 Lubricant Apply to ADF scanning area
  • FY9-6020(Oil glass clean-
  • er) Service Tools 244

    Page 253

    General Timing Chart Timing chart two consecutive prints on LTR paper Power switch ON Operation

    Wait

    Stby

    Intr

    Print

    Lastr

    Stby

    Cassette pickup solenoid (SL1) Main Fan (FM1/ FM2) Transfer Charging Bias Fixing Heater (H1) Primary Charging Bias (DC) Developing Bias Main Motor (M1) Primary Charging Bias (AC) Laser Diode BD Output signal (BDO) Print start command (EEC12) Laser Scanner Motor (M2) TOP sensor (PS204) Fixing delivery sensor (PS915) 19 20 17 18 15 16 13 14 11 12 9 10 7 8 5 6 3 4 1 2 General Timing Chart 245

    Page 254

    General Circuit Diagram

    A

    C

    B

    D

    E

    F

    A

    C

    B

    D

    E

    F

    4 3 2 7 6 5 1 8

    Dvacc

    +24U

    Ant

    Jp112

    Jp111

    Jp306

    Gnd

    Gnd

    P-Gnd

    Crgsns

    Dvdcpwm

    Pracpwm

    Pracc

    Prdcpwm

    +5R

    +24P1

    Dv

    Pr

    Jp305

    Jp304

    Jp303

    Gnd

    Trnfot

    Trcrnt

    Trpwm

    +3.3Aa

    Trpfot

    +24U

    Jp301

    Tr

    Jp302

    +3.3V

    Gnd

    /Posns

    Gnd

    Acn

    Ach

    Fsrth

    Jp_Lead

    Jp_Lead

    P-Gnd

    Ac-N

    Ac-H

    Cnt0

    Cnt1

    Gnd

    24V

    Gnd

    24V

    Cnt2

    /Vdo1

    Vdo1

    Vdo2

    /Vdo2

    +Sv(*)

    Gnd(Dcom)

    Gnd(5)(*)

    Gnd(Dcom)

    Gnd(Dcom)

    +24P1

    /Bdi(*)

    1

    /Acc

    /Dec

    Gnd

    +24P1

    Fanlock

    Cstsol

    Dupsol

    Gnd

    /Dec

    /Acc

    7 6 5 4 3

    J1102

    2

    Ft3

    11 12 12 11 3 2 1

    J250

    Mt15

    12

    J257

    4 1 2 3 5 6 7 8 9 10 10 9 8 7 6 5 3 2 1 4 2 3

    1 J905F

    Mt16

    3 2 1 1 2 2 1

    J407

    8

    J256

    6 8 7 6 5 3 2 4 4 2 3 5 7 8 2 3 1

    J9053M

    1 2 3 4

    J905M

    J9051M

    Mt2

    1

    2 Tp

    1 2

    Mt1

    1 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 13 12

    Ac-H

    Ac-N

    Ac-H

    Ac-N

    2 1 1 2 3 4 1 2

    J10

    2 3 1

    J915M

    1 2 3

    J918

    1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 13 12 1 2 3

    J206

    J210

    12

    J271

    2 1

    J212

    2 1 8

    J270

    2 3 1

    J209

    J255

    2 3 4 1

    J915

    2 3 4 1

    J902

    J801

    J259

    J262

    J264

    J261

    J258

    J263

    J265

    J260

    J201

    30

    J901

    30 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4

    M

    J802

    J207

    J1103

    Cstsol

    +24P1

    +24P1

    Dupsol

    1 2 1 2

    J1104

    1 2 3

    J1105

    J1101

    Sl

    1 2 1 2

    Sl

    1 2 3 1 2 3

    J805L

    J805Dh

    J805D

    321

    Gnd

    +24P1

    Fanlock

    Gnd

    +3.3A

    Gnd

    +3.3A

    /Dupsns

    /Wdsns

    +3.3A

    Gnd

    /Pisns

    +3.3A

    Gnd

    /Cstsns

    /Mpsns

    /Macc

    /Mdec

    +24P1

    Mfg

    Gnd

    /Fullsns

    +3.3A

    Gnd

    +24V_S

    Gnd

    /Clk

    /So

    /Si

    /Testp

    1 2 3 4 5 6

    J211

    1 2 3

    J208

    1 2 3

    J205

    1 2 3 4

    J203

    1 2 3

    J204

    1 2 3 4 5

    J202

    1 2 3

    J213

    1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 5 6 7

    M

    1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5 3 2 1 3 2 1 3 2 1 3 2 1 3 2 1 3 2 1

    J1202Fa

    J1205

    Gnd

    +24P1

    Fanlock

    J850

    1 2 3 1 2 3

    J804L

    J804Dh

    J804D

    3 2 1

    Mute

    Buzout

    N.C

    N.C

    +24V

    /Int_Touch

    +3.3V_Ui

    +3.3V_Ui

    Lcd_Csio_Sel

    /Panel_Cs

    Lvds_Data_1

    Lvds_Data_0

    Lvds_Data_Clk

    Gnd

    Gnd

    /Lvds_Data_1

    /Lvds_Data_0

    /Lvds_Data_Clk

    Panel_Clk

    Panel_Din

    Panel_Dout

    Gnd

    Panel_Rxo

    Panel_Txo

    /Rst_Panel

    Gnd

    Gnd

    Gnd

    /Lvds_Data_2

    Lvds_Data_2

    Lcd_De

    Gnd

    Gnd

    Gnd

    Ldc_R3

    Ldc_R4

    Ldc_R5

    Ldc_R6

    Ldc_R7

    Hsync

    Vsync

    Gnd

    Dclk

    +3.3V_Lcd

    N.C

    Lcd_B4

    Gnd

    Gnd

    Gnd

    Ldc_B5

    Ldc_B6

    Ldc_B7

    Ldc_G2

    Ldc_G3

    Ldc_G4

    Gnd

    Ldc_G5

    Ldc_G6

    Ldc_G7

    Ldc_R2

    Lcd_Clk

    Lcd_Dout

    Lcd_B2

    Lcd_B3

    Lcdpwm

    +24V

    N.C

    Lcd_Din

    /Lcdpe

    Lcd_Cs

    2 1

    Fb_Gnd

    Df_Gnd

    Cisclk

    Cis_Vref

    +3.3V_Cis

    Cismode

    Cisout0

    Cisout1

    Cisout2

    R_Cthd_Af

    G_Cthd_Af

    B_Cthd_Af

    Hps

    Gnd

    Book_Outa

    /Book_Outa

    /Book_Outb

    Book_Outb

    +3.3V_Sen

    Ledv

    Cissp

    Gnd

    Gnd

    Gnd

    Sig

    Des

    Gnd

    Adf_Outa

    /Adf_Outa

    /Adf_Outb

    Adf_Outb

    +24V_Sol

    Gnd

    Ds

    +3.3V_Sen

    +3.3V_Ds

    Mt42

    Mt41

    6 5 4 3 2 1 6 5 4 3 2 1

    M

    1 2 3 4

    J1501Dh1

    2 3 4 1

    J1501

    1 2 3 4

    M

    Mt1502

    1 2 3 1 2 3

    J1502

    J1301

    Mt1302

    1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2

    Sl

    J1302

    J1312

    1 2 3 1 2 3

    J1501D1

    1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 13 15 12 14

    J16

    J1303D

    J1303Dh

    1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 2 1 2 1

    J1303L

    J1310D

    J1310Dh

    J1310L

    1 2 3 4 5 6 7

    J927

    Mt1501

    4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 15

    J928

    12 13 14 15 1 2 3

    Mt1301

    12 11 10 9 8 2 3 4 5 6 1 7

    J926

    1 2 3

    J932

    28

    J925

    1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 16 17 18 19 20 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 12 13 14 15 9 10 11 9 10 11 24 25 26 27 28 24 25 26 27 28 21 22 23 21 22 23

    Sdo_Data4

    Sdo_Data5

    Sdo_Data6

    Sdo_Data7

    Sdo_Cmd

    +3.3V

    Gnd

    Gnd

    Gnd

    Sdo_Data0

    Sdo_Data1

    Sdo_Data2

    Sdo_Data3

    Sdo_Clk

    Gnd

    +3.3V

    /Rst_Emmc

    Gnd

    Gnd

    +Vdd_Emmc

    20 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 2 3 4 5 6 1 7 19 20 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 2 3 4 5 6 1 7 19

    J909

    J1_Mmc

    J954

    4 28

    J951

    40

    J953

    3 4 40 1 2 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

    Fan_On

    Gnd

    Fan_Detect

    24P1

    Mp Sl

    1 2

    J903

    1 2 3

    J923

    J1501D

    J1501Dh

    1 2 3 1 2

    Sl

    1 2 3

    J1501L

    3 2 1 1 2 3 4

    J1_Ttp

    1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 32 33 31 34 35 36 37 38 39 40

    J1_Lcd

    J971

    Usb

    Port

    +5V_Hs

    Uh_Hdm1

    Uh_Hdp1

    Gnd

    /Pd

    Gnd

    Sdio_Clk

    Sbd7/Sdio_Data3

    Sbd6/Sdio_Data2

    Sbd5/Sdio_Data1

    Sbd4/Sdio_Data0

    Sdio_Cmd

    +3.3V_Wl

    Gnd

    Gnd

    Gnd

    Gnd

    +3.3V_Wl

    J911

    Ethernet

    Port

    J910

    Usb

    Port

    Gnd

    /Modem_Dcd

    +3.3V_Mdm

    +3.3V_Mdm

    Modem_Esc

    /Modem_Rst

    Gnd

    /Modem_Cts

    /Modem_Ci1

    /Modem_Ci2

    /Int_Modem

    Gnd

    /Rst_Fax

    Moni_Out

    /Hook

    Hri

    Gnd

    Modem_Rx

    Modem_Tx

    J945

    Hand

    Set

    J944

    Tel

    J943

    Line

    2 3 4 5 1

    J972

    13

    J1_Wlan

    1 1 8 7 13 2 4 6 5 3 7 12 11 10 9 8 13 2 4 6 5 3 12 11 10 9 2 3 4 5 1

    J904

    13

    J908

    1 2 3 4 5 6 7 19

    J930

    13 14 15 16 17 18 19 9 10 11 12 8 3 4 5 6 1 2

    J931

    19 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 2 1

    J941

    J2000

    2 1

    J942

    2 3 1

    J2001

    Tag1

    Tag2

    +24V_S

    +24U

    J251

    J252

    1 2

    J214

    Ft2

    Ft1

    2 1 1 2

    J2100

    Gnd

    Sda

    Scl

    /Int

    +3.3V

    1 2 3 4 5

    J956

    1 2 3 4 5

    J961

    Unit5

    Connecting

    Pcb

    M2

    Laser Scanner Motor

    Unit6

    Laser Driver

    Pcb

    Sw1

    Main Switch

    Unit3

    High Voltage Power Supply

    Pcb

    H1

    Heater

    Ps915

    Fixing Delivery Sensor

    Tp1

    Thermoswitch

    Th1

    Thermistor

    Unit4

    Low Voltage Power Supply

    Pcb

    J1

    Inlet

    UNIT1 Fixing Assembly

    Unit2

    Engine Controller PCB

    Sw11

    Main Switch Only for EUR Other than EUR

    Fm2

    Main Fan

    Sl1

    Cassette Pickup Sorenoid

    Sl2

    Duplex Reverse Sorenoid Other than EUR Other than D1520/ MF412dn

    Ps201

    Duplex Reverse Sensor

    Ps202

    MP Tray Media Presence Sensor

    Ps203

    Cassette Media Presence Sensor

    Ps204

    Top Sensor

    Ps205

    Media Width Sensor

    Ps206

    FD Tray Media Full Sensor

    M1

    Main Motor Top Sensor Unit

    Fm1

    Main Fan Only for EUR

    Unit7

    Unit8

    Unit10

    Unit9

    Unit11

    Unit12

    Unit16

    Control Panel PCB

    Unit14

    Main Controller PCB

    Fm3

    Controller Fan

    Sl3

    MP Tray Pickup Sorenoid

    Sp1

    Speaker

    Unit15

    eMMC PCB

    Unit27

    Touch Panel

    Dsp1

    Lcd

    Ps3

    Document Sensor

    Ps2

    Document End Sensor

    Sl4

    ADF Delivery Sorenoid

    M4

    ADF Motor

    Ps1

    Cis Hp

    Sensor

    M3

    Reader Motor

    Unit26

    Contact Image Sensor

    Reader

    Adf

    Unit22

    Wireless LAN PCB

    Unit21

    Usb Pcb

    Unit18

    Ncu Pcb

    Unit19

    OFF Hook

    Pcb

    Sw2

    Door Switch

    Tag

    Cartridge Sensor

    Unit17

    Nfc Pcb

    D1550/ MF416dw/ MF415dw Other than D1520/ MF411dw Option drawer connecter Option Controller panel frame General Circuit Diagram 246

    Page 255

    Backup Data Data Location Replace Delete Backup by User Backup by Service Menu > System Management Settings

    Copier > Function > Clear

    Engine Con- troller PCB Main Con- troller PCB Initialize All Data / Set- tings Initializing Key and Cer- tificate Initializing Address Book Initializing Menu > Initi- alize All System Manage- ment Set- tings

    R-Con *2

    Srvc-Dat

    *3

    Counter

    Hist *4

    All *5

    Erds-Dat

    Yes/No Method Location to be stored Yes/No Method Location to be stored Address Book Main Con- troller PCB
  • Clear
  • -
  • Clear
  • -
  • -
  • -
  • Clear
  • Yes
  • Remote UI

    *9 Lui *10

    Pc, Usb

    memory No
  • -
  • Settings Manu Paper Set- tings Main Con- troller PCB
  • Clear
  • Clear
  • -
  • -
  • -
  • -
  • Clear
  • Yes
  • Remote UI

    *9 Lui *10

    Pc, Usb

    memory No
  • -
  • Network Settings Main Con- troller PCB
  • Clear
  • Clear
  • -
  • Clear Clear
  • -
  • -
  • Clear
  • Yes
  • Remote UI

    *9 Lui *10

    Pc, Usb

    memory No
  • -
  • Preferences Main Con- troller PCB
  • Clear
  • Clear
  • -
  • Clear
  • -
  • -
  • Clear
  • Yes
  • Remote UI

    *9 Lui *10

    Pc, Usb

    memory No
  • -
  • Timer Set- tings Main Con- troller PCB
  • Clear
  • Clear
  • -
  • Clear
  • -
  • -
  • Clear
  • Yes
  • Remote UI

    *9 Lui *10

    Pc, Usb

    memory No
  • -
  • Common Settings Main Con- troller PCB
  • Clear
  • Clear
  • -
  • Clear
  • -
  • -
  • Clear
  • Yes
  • Remote UI

    *9 Lui *10

    Pc, Usb

    memory No
  • -
  • Copy Set- tings Main Con- troller PCB
  • Clear
  • Clear
  • -
  • Clear
  • -
  • -
  • Clear
  • Yes
  • Remote UI

    *9 Lui *10

    Pc, Usb

    memory No
  • -
  • Fax Settings Main Con- troller PCB
  • Clear
  • Clear
  • -
  • Clear
  • -
  • -
  • Clear
  • Yes *6
  • Remote UI

    *9 Lui *10

    Pc, Usb

    memory No
  • -
  • Scan Set- tings Main Con- troller PCB
  • Clear
  • Clear
  • -
  • Clear
  • -
  • -
  • Clear
  • Yes *7
  • Remote UI

    *9 Lui *10

    Pc, Usb

    memory No
  • -
  • Memory Me- dia Print Set- tings Main Con- troller PCB
  • Clear
  • Clear
  • -
  • Clear

  • -
  • -
  • Clear
  • Yes
  • Remote UI

    *9 Lui *10

    Pc, Usb

    memory No
  • -
  • Printer Set- tings Main Con- troller PCB
  • Clear
  • Clear
  • -
  • Clear
  • -
  • -
  • Clear
  • Yes
  • Remote UI

    *9 Lui *10

    Pc, Usb

    memory No
  • -
  • Adjustment / Mainte- nance Main Con- troller PCB
  • Clear
  • Clear
  • -
  • -
  • -
  • -
  • Clear
  • Yes
  • Remote UI

    *9 Lui *10

    Pc, Usb

    memory No
  • -
  • System Manage- ment Set- tings Main Con- troller PCB
  • Clear
  • Clear
  • -
  • Clear Clear
  • -
  • -
  • Clear *12
  • Yes *13
  • Remote UI

    *9 Lui *10

    Pc, Usb

    memory No
  • -
  • Key and Certificate Main Con- troller PCB
  • Clear
  • Clear Clear *11
  • -
  • -
  • Clear
  • No
  • -
  • No
  • -
  • eRDS Main Con- troller PCB
  • Clear
  • Clear
  • -
  • -
  • -
  • -
  • Clear Clear No
  • -
  • No
  • -
  • Serial Num- ber Main Con- troller PCB
  • Clear *14
  • -
  • -
  • -
  • -
  • -
  • No
  • -
  • Yes*15
  • -
  • Job History Main Con- troller PCB
  • Clear
  • Clear
  • -
  • -
  • -
  • Clear
  • Clear
  • No
  • -
  • No
  • -
  • Page coun- ter Main Con- troller PCB
  • -
  • -
  • -
  • -
  • -
  • -
  • No
  • -
  • No
  • -
  • Part counter None
  • Clear
  • -
  • -
  • -
  • Clear
  • -
  • No
  • -
  • No
  • -
  • Service mode Service mode setting values (Reader) Main Con- troller PCB
  • Clear
  • -
  • -
  • Clear
  • -
  • -
  • No
  • -
  • No
  • -
  • Service mode setting values(Main Controller) Main Con- troller PCB
  • Clear
  • -
  • -
  • -
  • Clear
  • -
  • Clear
  • No
  • Remote UI *9

    Pc, Usb

    memory Yes Service mode *8

    Pc, Usb

    memory Backup Data 247

    Page 256

    Data Location Replace Delete Backup by User Backup by Service Menu > System Management Settings

    Copier > Function > Clear

    Engine Con- troller PCB Main Con- troller PCB Initialize All Data / Set- tings Initializing Key and Cer- tificate Initializing Address Book Initializing Menu > Initi- alize All System Manage- ment Set- tings

    R-Con *2

    Srvc-Dat

    *3

    Counter

    Hist *4

    All *5

    Erds-Dat

    Yes/No Method Location to be stored Yes/No Method Location to be stored Service mode setting values (En- gine Control- ler) Main Con- troller PCB
  • Clear
  • -
  • -
  • -
  • -
  • -
  • No
  • Remote UI *9

    Pc, Usb

    memory Yes Service mode *8

    Pc, Usb

    memory *1 Log data such as Mac address, USB serial number, printer-related setting values, scanner-related setting values, user data, and logs are initialized. *2. The factory adjustment values of the Reader and ADF are initialized. *3. Service data is cleared. User data is not cleared. The factory adjustment values of the Reader and ADF are not initialized. *4. The logs (communication management, print, jam, error, and alarm) are cleared. *5. The user data, service data, logs, and system administrator are initialized. (The system manager ID and password are changed back to the default values.) The factory adjustment values of the Reader and ADF are not initialized. *6. Excluding Fax Setup Guide *7. Excluding the shortcut key

    *8. Function > System > Import / Function > System > Export

    *9. Settings/Registration > Import/Export *10. Setting Menu List > System Management Settings > Import/Export of Settings. *11. When the key and certificate are initialized, TLS authentication of IEEE802.1X and the SSL setting are changed to "OFF". *12. The system administrator ID and the password are changed back to the default values. *13. Excluding [Forwarding Settings], [Remote UI On/Off], [Update Firmware], [Initialize Key and Certificate], [Initialize Address Book], and [Initialize System Management Settings] *14. After replacement of the PCB, resetting is required. FUNCTION > SERIAL > SN-MAIN *15. The device serial number can be entered in FUNCTION > SERIAL > SN-MAIN. Backup Data 248

    More from Canon

    Similar Printers